WELLESLEY COLLEGE
BULLETIN
CALENDAR NUMBER
1935-1936
WELLESLEY, MASSACHUSETTS
NOVEMBER, 1935
*KAKY
WELLESLEY COLLEGE
BULLETIN
CALENDAR NUMBER
1935-1936
Bulletins published eight times a year by Wellesley College,
Wellesley, Massachusetts. February, one number; April,
three; May, one; October, one; November, one; December,
one. Entered as second-class matter, February 12, 1912, at
the Post Office at Boston, Massachusetts, under the Act of
July, 1894. Application pending for additional entry at
Concord, N. H.
Volume 25 Number 2
DIRECTIONS FOR CORRESPONDENCE
In the list below are the names and addresses of persons to whom
inquiries of various types should be sent. The post office address is
Wellesley, Massachusetts.
General Policy of the College
The President of Wellesley College
Admission of Undergraduates
The Secretary of the Board of Admission
Applications for Readmission
The College Recorder
Admission of Graduates
The Dean of Graduate Students
Inquiries Concerning Dormitory Rooms and Notice of With-
drawal
The Dean of Residence
Payment of College Bills
The Assistant Treasurer (Checks should be made payable to Welles-
ley College)
Scholarships and Cooperative Houses
Candidates for Admission — The Dean of Freshmen
Students in College — The Executive Secretary who is Chairman
of the Faculty Committee on Scholarships
Questions Relating to Academic Work of Students
The Dean of the College
Questions Relating to Social Regulations
The Dean of Residence
Requests for Transcripts of Records
The College Recorder
Information and Recommendations for Educational and other
Positions
The Director of the Personnel Bureau
Miscellaneous Information
The Executive Secretary
Requests for Catalogues
The Information Bureau
Alumnae Affairs
The Executive Secretary of the Alumnae Association
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
Correspondence .... 2
Calendar 5
Board of Trustees ... 6
Standing Committees . . 7
Officers of Instruction and
Government .... 8
Standing Committees . 24
Foundation and Purpose . 25
Admission 26
Examinations 30
Subjects 33
Definition of Requirements . 35
To Advanced Standing . . 39
Of Candidates for Master's
Degree 40
Of Students not Candidates
for a Degree .... 41
Degrees: —
Requirements for B.A. Degree 42
Requirements for Honors in
a Special Field .... 44
Requirements for Master's
Degree 47
Courses of Instruction:
Art 48
Astronomy 54
Biblical History .... 56
Botany 60
Chemistry 65
Economics and Sociology . 69
Education 74
English Language and Litera-
ture 79
English Composition ... 85
French 89
Geology and Geography . . 95
German 100
Greek 104
Group Leadership . . 106
page
Courses of Instruction. — Cont.
History and Political Science 106
Hygiene and Physical Educa-
tion 113
Italian 120
Latin 123
Mathematics 127
Music 130
Philosophy and Psychology . 135
Physics 141
Spanish 145
Speech 147
Zoology and Physiology . . 150
Expenses 155
Residence 157
Health 157
Fellowships and Scholarships:
For Graduates .... 158
For Undergraduates . . 161
Personnel Bureau . . . 168
Hetty H. R. Green Hall . 168
Founders Hall 169
Libraries 169
Art Museum and Collections 169
Music Equipment . . . . 170
Alumna Hall 170
Laboratories and Scientific
Collections . . . . 170
Degrees Conferred in 1935 174
Certificates in Hygiene and
Physical Education . . 176
Honors in a Special Field . 177
Prizes 178
Fellows 179
Honor Scholarships . . . 180
Forms of Bequest .... 182
Summary of Students . . 183
Officers of Alumna Associa-
tion 184
Index 187
1935
1936
1936
1937
JULY
JANUAR\
JULY
JANUARY
S M T W T F
S
S
M
T W T
F
S
S
M T W T F
S
S
M
T W T
F S
. . 12 3 4 5
6
13
5
6
1 2
7 8 9
3
10
4
1 1
.... ; 2 3
4
11
I 2
7 8 9 10 11 12
5
6 7 8 9 10
3
4
5 6 7
8 9
14 15 16 17 18 19
20
12
13
14 15 16
17
18
12
13 14 15 16 17
18
10
11
12 13 14
15 16
21 22 23 24 25 26
27
19
20
21 22 23
24
2.S
19
20 21 22 23 24
25
17
18
19 20 21
22 23
28 29 30 31 .. ..
26,
27^28 _29_ 30
31
26
27 28 29 30 31
24
31
25
26,27 28
29 30
AUGUST
FEBRUARY
AUGUST
FEBRUARY
S M T W T F
S
S
M
T W T
F
S
S
M T W T F
S
S
M
T W T
F S
1 2
3
10
1
8
1
8
7
1
8
2 3 4
9 10 11
5 6
4 5 6 7 8 9
2
3
4 5 6
7
2
3 4 5 6 7
12 13
11 12 13 14 15 16
17
i.9
10
11 12 13
14
IS
9
10 11 12 13 14
15
14
15
16 17 18
19 20
18 19 20 21 22 23
24
16
17
18 19 20
21
22
16
17 18 19 20 21
22
21
22
23 24 25
26 27
25 26 27 28 29 30
31
23
24
25 26 27
28
29
23
30
24 25 26 27 28
31
29
28
SEPTEMBER
MARCH
SEPTEMBER
MARCH
S M T W T F
S
S
M
T W T
F
S
S
M T W T F
S
S
M
T W T
F S
12 3 4 5 6
7
1
2
3 4 5
6
7
..1234
5
1
2 3 4
5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13
14
8
9
10 11 12
13
14
6
7 8 9 10 11
12
7
8
9 10 11
12 13
15 16 17 18 19 20
21
15
16
17 18 19
20
21
13
14 15.16 17 18
19
14
15
16 17 18
19 20
22 23 24 25 26 27
28
22
23
24 25 26
27
28
20
21 22 23 24 25
2;,
21
22
23 24 25
26 27
29 30
29
30
31 . . ..
21
28 29 30 . .
28
29
30 31
OCTOBER
APRIL
OCTOBER
APRIL
S M T W T F
S
S
M
T W T
F
S
s
M T W T F
S
S
M
T W T
F S
.... 1 2 3 4
5
12
5
6
..12
7 8 9
3
10
4
11
1 2
3
to
.... 1
2 3
6 7 8 9 10 11
4
5 6 7 8 9
4
5
6 7 8
9 10
13 14 15 16 17 18
19
12
13
14 15 16
17
18
11
12 13 14 15 16
17
11
12
13 14 15
16 17
20 21 22 23 24 25
26
19
20
21 22 23
24
25
18
19 20 21 22 23
21
18
19
20 21 22
23 24
27 28 29 30 31
26
27
28 29 30
25
26 27 28 29 30
31
25
20
27 28 29
30 ..
NOVEMBER
MAY
NOVEMBER
MAY
S M T W T F
S
S
M
T W T
F
S
S
M T W T F
S
S
M
T W T
F S
1
2
9
1
8
2
9
1
8
2 3 4 5 6
9 10 11 12 13
7
14
1
3 4 5 6 7 8
3
4
5 6 7
2
3
4 5 6
7 8
10 11 12 13 14 15
16
10
11
12 13 14
15
16
15
16 17 18 19 20
21
9
10
11 12 13
14 15
17 18 19 20 21 22
23
17
18
19 20 21
22
23
22
23 24 25 26 27
28
16
17
18 19 20
21 22
24 25 26 27 28 29
30
24
31
25
26 27 28
29
30
29
30
23
30
24
31
25 26 27
28 29
DECEMBER
JUNE
DECEMBER
JUNE
S M T W T F
S
S
M
T W T
F
S
S
M T W T F
S
S
M
T W T
F S
12 3 4 5 6
7
1
2 3 4
5
6
..1234
5
1 2 3
4 5
8 9 10 11 12 13
14
7
8
9 10 11
12
13
6
7 8 9 10 11
12
6
7
8 9 10
11 12
15 16 17 18 19 20
21
14
15
16 17 18
19
20
13
14 15 16 17 18
19
13
14
15 16 17
18 19
22 23 24 25 26 27
28
21
22
23 24 25
26
27
20
21 22 23 24 25
2"
20
21
22 23 24
25 26
29 30 31
28
29
30 .. ..
27
28 29 30 31 ..
27
28
29 30 ..
Vacations, recesses, and holidays appear in italics.
CALENDAR
ACADEMIC YEAR 1935-1936
Academic year begins
Thanksgiving Day, holiday
,~ . / from 3.30 p.m
Christmas recess < „ tn <?<-»
\ to 10.30 p.m.
Examinations
Second semester begins
c . / from 3.30 p.m,
spring recess < . m:n
K 6 \ to 10.30 p.m.
General examination for seniors
Memorial Day, holiday
Examinations .
Commencement
Monday, September 23
November 28
Thursday, December 19
Wednesday, January 8
January 27 to February 6
Monday, February 10
Thursday, March 26
Monday, April 6
. May 29
May 30
June 1 to 10
Monday, June 15
ACADEMIC YEAR 1936-1937
Examinations ......
Freshman week .....
Halls of residence open for new students, 9 a.m.
Registration closes for new students, 10.30 p.m.
Halls of residence open for all other students, 2 f
Registration closes for all other students, 10.30 p
Academic year begins
Thanksgiving Day, holiday
r,, . i from 3.30 p.m
Christmas recess s iri -,n
[ to 10.30 p.m.
Examinations .
Second semester begins
c • / from 3.30 p.m.
bpnng recess \ . 1fl 7n
[to 10.30 p.m.
Memorial Day, holiday
General examination for seniors
Examinations .
Commencement
September 21-25
September 22-26
Tuesday, September 22
Tuesday, September 22
Thursday, September 24
. Friday, September 25
Monday, September 28
November 26
Thursday, December 17
Wednesday, January 6
February 1-11
Monday, February 15
Thursday, March 25
Monday, April 5
. May 31
June 4
. June 7-16
Monday, June 21
Trustees
BOARD OF TRUSTEES
Robert Gray Dodge, M.A., LL.B Boston
President of the Board
Candace Catherine Stimson, B.S. . . . New York City
Vice President
Grace Goodnow Crocker, B.A. ..... Cambridge
Secretary
Louise McCoy North, M.A., Emeritus . . . Madison, N. J.
Caroline Hazard, M.A., Litt.D., LL.D.
Paul Henry Hanus, B.S., LL.D. .
Belle Sherwin, B.S., LL.D.
Hugh Walker Ogden, M.A., LL.B.
Sarah Whittelsey Walden, Ph.D.
Frederic Haines Curtiss
Walter Hunnewell, B.A. .
Boynton Merrill, B.A., D.D.
Kenneth Charles Morton Sills, M.A.
Frank Gilman Allen .
William Truman Aldrich, B.S. .
Bertha Bailey, B.S. .
Alice Cheney Baltzell
Henry Knox Sherrill, B.D., D.D., LL.
Harriet Hinchliff Coverdale, B.A.
F. Murray Forbes, B.A.
Albert Davis Mead, M.A., Ph.D., Sc.D
Ruth Baker Pratt, M.H.L., Litt.D.
Edith Jones Tower, B.A.
Edward Allen Whitney, M.A.
Ellen Fitz Pendleton, M.A., Litt.D., LL.D., ex officio . Wellesley
President of Wellesley College
James Dean, B.A., ex officio Brookline
'Treasurer of Wellesley College
, Emeritus Peace Dale, R. I.
. Cambridge
Washington, D. C.
Longwood, Brookline
New Haven, Conn.
Boston
Wellesley
West Newton
Brunswick, Me.
Norwood
Brookline
Andover
Wellesley
Boston
New York City
Wellesley
Providence, R. I.
New York City
New York City
. Cambridge
, LL.D
D.
Trustees ;
COMMITTEES
EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE
Robert Gray Dodge, Chairman
Boynton Merrill Harriet Hinchliff Coverdale
Frederic Haines Curtiss Ellen Fitz Pendleton (ex officio)
Frank Gilman Allen James Dean (ex officio)
F. Murray Forbes Grace Goodnow Crocker (ex officio)
FINANCE COMMITTEE
Frederic Haines Curtiss, Chairman
Robert Gray Dodge Ellen Fitz Pendleton (ex officio)
Walter Hunnewell James Dean (ex officio)
COMMITTEE ON BUILDINGS
Walter Hunnewell, Chairman
James Dean Frank Gilman Allen
Ellen Fitz Pendleton William Truman Aldrich
Sarah Whittflsey Walden Grace Goodnow Crocker (ex officio)
COMMITTEE ON GROUNDS
Belle Sherwin, Chairman
Hugh Walker Ogden Walter Hunnewell
Ellen Fitz Pendleton Auce Cheney Baltzell
COMMITTEE ON EDUCATIONAL POLICY
Ellen Fitz Pendleton, Chairman
Bertha Bailey Kenneth Charles Morton Sills
Paul Henry Hanus Sarah Whittelsey Walden
Albert Davis Mead Edward Allen Whitney
LIBRARY COUNCIL
Trustee Members
Frederic Haines Curtiss Edith Jones Tower
Ellen Fitz Pendleton (ex officio)
Faculty Members
Annie Kimball Tuell Ethel Dane Roberts (ex officio)
Julia Eleanor Moody Helen Phipps Houck
Lucy Winsor Killough Edward Ely Curtis
PENSION AND INSURANCE BOARD
Trustee Members
Hugh Walker Ogden, Chairman F. Murray Forbes
Faculty Members
Louise Overacker Ellen Fitz Pendleton (ex officio)
Michael Jacob Zigler James Dean (ex officio)
Charles Bowen Hodges (ex officio)
8 Faculty
OFFICERS OF INSTRUCTION AND GOVERNMENT*
Mary Alice Willcox, ph.d.,
Professor of Zoology, Emeritus
Angie Clara Chapin, m.a.,
Professor of Greek Language and Literature, Emeritus
Alice Van Vechten Brown, m.a.,
Professor of Art, Emeritus
Ellen Louisa Burrell, b.a.,
Professor of Pure Mathematics, Emeritus
Hamilton Crawford Macdougall, mus.d.,
Professor of Music, Emeritus
Elizabeth Kimball Kendall, m.a., ll.b.,
Professor of History, Emeritus
Margaret Clay Ferguson, ph.d.,
Research Professor of Botany
Eliza Hall Kendrick, ph.d.,
Professor of Biblical History, Emeritus
Elizabeth Florette Fisher, b.s.,
Professor of Geology and Geography, Emeritus
Margaret Hastings Jackson, m.a.,
Professor of Italian, Emeritus
Anna Jane McKeag, ph.d., ll.d., ed.d.,
Professor of the History and Principles of Education, Emeritus
Eva Chandler, b.a.,
Professor of Mathematics, Emeritus
Mary Sophia Case, m.a.,
Professor of Philosophy, Emeritus
VlDA DUTTON SCUDDER, M.A., L.H.D.,
Professor of English Literature, Emeritus
Katharine May Edwards, ph.d.,
Professor of Greek and Comparative Philology, Emeritus
Charlotte Almira Bragg, b.s.,
Professor of Chemistry, Emeritus
Margaret Pollock Sherwood, ph.d., l.h.d.,
Professor of English Literature, Emeritus
Helen Abbot Merrill, ph.d.,
Professor of Mathematics, Emeritus
* The officers of instruction and government, exclusive of the retired members, are arranged in the
following order: professors, associate professors, assistant professors; instructors; assistants; lec-
turers.
Faculty 9
Alice Walton, ph.d.,
Professor of Latin and Archaeology, Emeritus
Alice Vinton Waite, m.a.,
Professor of English Language and
Literature and Dean, Emeritus
Laura Emma Lockwood, ph.d.,
Professor of English Language and Literature, Emeritus
Charles Lowell Young, b.a.,
Professor of American Literature, Emeritus
William Skarstrom, m.d., m.p.e.,
Professor of Hygiene and Physical Education, Emeritus
Clara Eliza Smith, ph.d.,
Professor of Mathematics, Emeritus
Olive Dutcher Doggett, m.a., b.d.,
Professor of Biblical History, Emeritus
Ellen Fitz Pendleton, m.a., litt.d., ll.d.,
President on the Alice Freeman Palmer Memorial Foundation
Sophie Chantal Hart, m.a.,
Class of 1898 Professor of Rhetoric and Composition
Arthur Orlo Norton, m.a.,
Professor of the History and Principles of Education
Louise Sherwood McDowell, ph.d.,
Class of 1898 Professor of Physics
Marian Elizabeth Hubbard, b.s.,
Professor of Zoology
Martha Hale Shackford, ph.d.,
Class of 1914 Professor of English Literature
Caroline Rebecca Fletcher, m.a.,
Professor of Latin
Julia Swift Orvis, ph.d.,
Alice Freeman Palmer Professor of History
Natalie Wipplinger, ph.d.,
Carla Wenckebach Professor of German
Grace Evangeline Davis, m.a.,
Associate Professor of Physics
Edna Virginia Moffett, ph.d.,
Professor of History
Agnes Frances Perkins, m.a., m.s.,
Professor of Rhetoric and Composition
Elisabeth Hodder, ph.d.,
Class of 1915 Professor of History
io Faculty
Laetitia Morris Snow, ph.d.,
Susan M. Hallowell Professor of Botany
Josephine Harding Batchelder, m.a.,
Associate Professor of Rhetoric and Composition
Eugene Clarence Howe, ph.d.,
Professor of Hygiene and Physical Education
John Charles Duncan, ph.d.,
Professor of Astronomy and Director of the Whitin Observatory
Julia Eleanor Moody, ph.d.,
Professor of Zoology
Alice Ida Perry Wood, ph.d.,
Associate Professor of English Literature, and
Director of Personnel Bureau
Mary Campbell Bliss, ph.d.,
Associate Professor of Botany
Alice Huntington Bushee, m.a.,
Helen J. Sanborn Professor of Spanish
Edward Ely Curtis, ph.d.,
Professor of American History
Elizabeth Wheeler Manwaring3, ph.d.,
Class of 1902 Professor of Rhetoric and Composition
Helen Somersby French, ph.d.,
Charlotte Fitch Roberts Professor of Chemistry
Muriel Streibert Curtis, b.a., b.d.,
Associate Professor of Biblical History
Alfred Dwight Sheffield, m.a.,
Professor of Group Leadership
Laura Hibbard Loomis, ph.d.,
Katharine Lee Bates Professor of English Literature
Mary Jean Lanier, ph.d.,
Professor of Geology and Geography
Mabel Minerva Young, ph.d.,
Lewis Atterbury Stimson Professor of Mathematics
Alice Maria Ottley, ph.d.,
Ruby Frances Hoive Far-well Professor of Botany, Curator of
Herbarium and Associate Director of Botanic Gardens
Myrtilla Avery, ph.d.,
Clara Bertram Kimball Professor of Art
and Director of Art Museum
Howard Edward Pulling, ph.d.,
Professor of Botany
3 Absent on leave for the second semester.
Faculty i i
Annie Kimball Tuell, ph.d.,
Professor oj English Literature
Anna Bertha Miller, ph.d.,
Professor of Latin
Lennie Phoebe Copeland, ph.d.,
Associate Professor of Mathematics on the Helen Day Gould Foundation
Louise Pettibone Smith, ph.d.,
Associate Professor of Biblical History
Seal Thompson, m.a.,
Associate Professor of Biblical History
Judith Blow Williams, ph.d.,
Professor of History
Lucy Wilson, ph.d.,
Professor of Physics, and Dean of the Class of 1938
Helen Sard Hughes, ph.d.,
Professor of English Literature, and Dean of Graduate Students
Barnette Miller, ph.d.,
Professor of History
Elizabeth Donnan, b.a.,
Katharine Coman Professor of Economics and Sociology,
and Head of Crofton House
Mary Amerman Griggs, ph.d.,
Professor of Chemistry
Edith Margaret Smaill, a.a.,
Assistant Professor of Speech
Helen Isabel Davis, b.a.,
Associate Professor of Botany and Director of Botanic Gardens
Margaret Terrell Parker, m.a.,
Associate Professor of Geology and Geography
Henry Raymond Mussey, ph.d.,
A. Barton Hepburn Professor of Economics
Gordon Boit Wellman, th.d.,
Associate Professor of Biblical History
Bertha Monica Stearns, m.a.,
Associate Professor of English Literature
Ruth Elvira Clark, litt.d.,
Professor of French
Ruth Johnstin, ph.d.,
Professor of Chemistry
Ada May Coe, m.a.,
Associate Professor of Spanish
Thomas Hayes Procter, ph.d.,
Professor of Philosophy
12 Faculty
Michael Jacob Zigler, ph.d.,
Associate Professor of Psychology
Margaret Alger Hayden, ph.d.,
Associate Professor of Zoology
Katharine Canby Balderston, ph.d.,
Associate Professor of English Literature
Louise Overacker, ph.d.,
Associate Professor of Political Science on the
Elizabeth Kimball Kendall Foundation
Dorothy Warner Dennis, b.a., dipl. e.u.,
Associate Professor of French, and Head of Maison Crawford
Lawrence Smith, m.a.,
Associate Professor of Economics and Sociology
Edith Christina Johnson, ph.d.,
Associate Professor of Rhetoric and Composition
Howard Hinners, b.a.,
Caroline Hazard Professor of Music
Marion Elizabeth Stark, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Mathematics
Ruth Elliott, ph.d.,
Mary Hemenway Professor of Hygiene and Physical Education
and Director of the Department
Marguerite Juliette Brechaille1, agregee de l'universit£,
Associate Professor of French
Helen Hull Law, ph.d.,
Associate Professor of Greek and Latin on
the Ellen A. Kendall Foundation
Edith Winifred Mosess, m.a.,
Assistant Professor of Speech
Helen Warton Kaans, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Zoology
Charlotte Genevieve MacEwan, m.s.,
Assistant Professor of Hygiene and Physical Education
Helen Joy Sleeper, m.a., mus.b.,
Assistant Professor of Music
Grace Elizabeth Howard, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Botany and
Assistant Curator of Herbarium
Katy Boyd Georgei, m.a.,
Assistant Professor of Biblical History
Francoise Ruet, m.a., agregee de l'universit£,
Assistant Professor of French
1 Absent on leave.
'Absent on leave for the second semester.
Faculty 13
Andree Bruel», docteur de l'universite' DE PARIS,
Associate Professor of I rench
Helen Thayer Jones, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Chemistry
Ruth Hutchinson Lindsay, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Botany
Lucy Winsor Killough, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Economics
Harriet Cutler Waterman, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Zoology
Gladys Kathryn McCosh, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Zoology
Elizabeth Beall, m.a.,
Assistant Professor of Hygiene and Physical Education
Ella Keats Whiting, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of English Literature, and
Dean of the Class of 1936
Grace Ethel Hawk, b.litt.oxon.,
Assistant Professor of English Literature
Gabriella Bosano, dottore in filologia moderna,
Professor of Italian
Leland Hamilton Jenks, ph.d.,
Professor of Social Institutions
Alice Hall Armstrong, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Physics
SlRARPIE DER NeRSESSIAN, LIC. ES LET., DIPL. E.S., DIPL. E.H.E.,
Associate Professor of Art
William Alexander Campbell^, m.f.a.,
Associate Professor of Art
Mary Lowell Coolidge, ph.d.,
Associate Professor of Philosophy, and
Dean of the College
Laurine Mack Bongiorno, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Art
Edith Hamilton, m.a.,
Assistant Professor of Rhetoric and Composition
Mary Lellah Austini, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Zoology
Mary Bosworth Treudleyi, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Economics and Sociology
Ada Roberta Hall, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Physiology
1 Absent on leave.
2 Absent on leave for the first semester.
'Absent on leave for the second semester.
!^ Faculty
Anita Oyarzabal, m.a.,
Assistant Professor of Spanish
Barbara Philippa McCarthy, ph.u.,
Assistant Professor of Greek
Dorothy Mae Robathans, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Latin
Helen Phipps Houck, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Spanish
Guy Mitchell Wilson, ph.d.,
Visiting Professor of Education
Edith Brandt Mallory, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Psychology, and
Consultant in the Personnel Bureau
Louise Kingsley, ph.d.,
Dorothy Heyworth, ph.d.,
Bernard Chapman Heyl3, m.f.a.,
Marianne Thalmann, ph.d.,
Agnes Anne Abbot,
Assistant Professor of Geology
Assistant Professor of Physics
Assistant Professor of Art
Associate Professor of German
Assistant Professor of Art
Angeline La Piana, dottore in lettere,
Assistant Professor of Italian
Edith Melcher, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of French
Edna Frances Heidbreder, ph.d.,
Professor of Psychology
Rene Escande de Messieres, agrege de l'universite,
Visiting Professor of French
TOSEPH GARABED HAROUTUNIAN, B.D., PH.D.,
Assistant Professor of Biblical History
Thomas Buckland Jeffery », dipl. oxon., m.f.a.,
Assistant Professor of Art
Barbara Salditt, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of German
Margaret Jeffrey, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of German
T. H. Vail Motter, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of English Literature
Theodore Lindsay Steiger, ph.d.,
Assistant Professor of Botany
» Ahsent on leave for the second semester.
Faculty i 5
Margaret Johnson,
Instructor in Hygiene and Physical Education
Fanny Garrison, b.a.,
Instructor in Hygiene and Physical Education
Mary Fisher DeKruif, m.d.,
Instructor in Hygiene and Physical Education, and Health Officer
Jean Evelyn Wilder, b.a.,
Instructor in Pianoforte
Marie-Antoinette Quarre1, b.a., c.e.s., dipl. e.s.,
Instructor in French
Margaret Elliott Van Winkle, m.s.,
Instructor in Zoology and Curator of the Museum
Harriet Elizabeth Lee, m.a.,
Instructor in Geology
Helen Hamilton Werthessen, b.des.,
Instructor in Art
Harriet Lucy Clarke, b.a.,
Instructor in Hygiene and Physical Education
Marion Isabel Cook, m.a.,
Instructor in Hygiene and Physical Education
Louise MacDonald Chapman, m.a.,
Instructor in Rhetoric and Composition
Katharine Fuller Wells, m.s.,
Instructor in Hygiene and Physical Education
Mary Elizabeth Powell, m.s.,
Instructor in Hygiene and Physical Education
Alice Burt Nichols, b.a., ed.m.,
Instructor in Education
Gladys Avery Lebert,
Instructor in Vocal Music
Enid Constance Straw, m.a.,
Instructor in Rhetoric and Composition
Jean Helen Harris, m.s.,
Instructor in Hygiene and Physical Education
Alice Marguerite Marie Malbot, lic. es let.,
Instructor in French
Johanna Elisabeth Volbehr,
Instructor in German
Helen Gertrude Russell, ph.d.,
Instructor in Mathematics
'Appointed for the first semester only.
I 6 Faculty
Cecile de Banke,
Instructor in Speech
Maria Priglmeir Bizzoni, m.a.,
Instructor in Italian
Edward Barry Greene, b.a.,
Instructor in Music and Director of the Choir on the
Hamilton C. Macdougall Foundation
Elinor Marie Schroeder, m.a.,
Instructor in Hygiene and Physical Education
Dorothy Jane Woodland, ph.d.,
Instructor in Chemistry
Virginia Onderdonk, b.a.,
Instructor in Philosophy
Rosemary Anne Murphy, m.a.,
Instructor in Physiology
Mary Eleanor Prentiss, m.a.,
Instructor in Rhetoric and Composition
Helen Walter Dodson, ph.d.,
Instructor in Astronomy
Yves Chardon,
Instructor in Violoncello
Clarence Everett Watters, mus.m., f.a.g.o.,
Instructor in Organ
Doris Elizabeth Rich, m.a.,
Jeannette Barry Lane, ph.b.,
Richard Burgin,
Helen Elizabeth Butts, ph.d.,
Margaret Hall Cole, ph.d.,
Elizabeth Runkle, m.a.,
Eva Elizabeth Jones, ph.d.,
Altha Louise Palmer, m.s.,
Adele Barre Robinson, b.a., b.des.
Instructor in German
Instructor in Speech
Instructor in Violin
Instructor in Zoology
Instructor in History
Instructor in Political Science
Instructor in Zoology
Instructor in Zoology
Instructor in Art
Faculty
Hubert Weldon Lamb, b.a.,
James Philip Hyatt, m.a., b.d.,
Katharine Fowler Finn, ph.d.,
David Barnett, b.a.,
Ernest Hocking Runyon, ph.d.,
John Winchell Riley, m.a.,
Margaret Shaughnessy, ph.d.,
John Huber McDowell *, m.a.,
Thelma Gorfinkle Alper, m.a.,
Elizabeth Richards Roy, m.a.,
Frances Dunbar Nichols, m.a.,
Barbara Goldsmith Trask, b.a.,
Alice Eleanor Taylor, b.a.,
Kathryn Sue Potter Vilter, b.a.
Louise Ward Gates, m.a.,
Margaret Skelton Atwood, b.a.,
Catherine Mary Gens, b.a.,
Alfred Harold Holway, m.s.,
Eliza Newkirk Rogers*, m.a.,
Lecturer in the History of Architecture
Harriet Boyd Hawes, m.a., l.h.d.,
Lecturer in Pre-Christian Art
Abigail Adams Eliot, b.a., ed.d.,
Lecturer on Nursery School Education
5 Appointed for the second semester only.
17
Instructor in Music
Instructor in Biblical History
Instructor in Geology
Instructor in Pianoforte
Instructor in Botany
Instructor in Economics and Sociology
Instructor in Economics
Instructor in Speech
Assistant in Psychology
Assistant in Geology
Assistant in Education
Assistant in Music
Assistant in Astronomy
Assistant in Chemistry
Assistant in Psychology
Assistant in Chemistry
Assistant in Chemistry
Assistant in Psychology
jg Faculty
Russell Gibson, ph.d.,
Simone David, agregee de l'universite,
John Robert Putnam French, m.a.,
Eugene Randolph Smith, m.a., ped.d.,
Charles Swain Thomas, m.a., litt.d.,
Lecturer in Geology
Lecturer in French
Lecturer in Education
Lecturer in Education
Lecturer in Education
Emma Marshall Denkinger, ph.d.,
Lecturer in Rhetoric and Composition
NlCOLETTE INA PeRNOT, LIC. ES LET., ,
Lecturer in French
Visiting Lecturer in Music
Lecturer in Education
Lecturer in Education
Walter Piston, b.a.,
Mary Chaplin Shute,
Rachel Louise Hardwick, m.d.,
Katharine Hazeltine Paton, b.a., b.d.
Lecturer in Biblical History
Special Lecturers in the Department of Hygiene
and Physical Education
W. Russell MacAusland, m.d.,
Lecturer on Orthopedics
Andrew R. MacAusland, m.d., tin*.j;rt
Lecturer on Orthopedics
Loretta S. Cummins, m.d., .
Lecturer on Hygiene of the b kin
Hti rfrt F Day. ph.b., m.d., f.a.c.s.,
Hilbert * . uay, , Lecturer on Preventive Surgery
Mary F. DeKruif, m.d., ,.
iviakx r. Lecturer on Health Problems
Leighton Tohnson, m.d., ^,
J Lw/arw o» #?£*>»' 0/ ^ M>" and throat
Samuel R. Meaker, m.d., ,
iMttnr o» fl>ffoiw of Menstruation and
Other Gynecological Problems
Abraham Myerson, m.d., u,,^^.
Lecturer on Mental Hygiene
Clifford L. Derick., m.d., ,,.,..
LI Lecturer on Internal Medicine
Officers of Administration 19
ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS
Ellen Fitz Pendleton, m.a., litt.d.. ll.d.,
President
Mary Lowell Coolidge, ph.d.,
Dean of the College, and Associate Professor of Philosophy
Frances Louise Knapp, m.a.,
Dean of Freshmen, and Chairman of the Board of Admission
Alice Ida Perry Wood, ph.d.,
Director of Personnel Bureau, and
Associate Professor of English Literature
Grace Goodnow Crocker, b.a.,
Executive Secretary of the College, and
Secretary of the Board of Trustees
Mary Cross Ewing, b.a.,
Dean of Residence
Helen Sard Hughes, ph.d.,
Dean of Graduate Students, and Professor of English Literature
Ella Keats Whiting, ph.d.,
Dean of the Class of 1936, and
Assistant Professor of English Literature
Lucy Wilson, ph.d.,
Dean of the Class of 1938, and Professor of Physics
Kathleen Elliott, b.a.,
College Recorder
Anne Wellington, b.a.,
Secretary of the Board of Admission
Florence Risley, m.a.,
Executive Secretary of the Alumnae Association
LIBRARIANS
Ethel Dane Roberts, b.a., b.l.s.,
Librarian, and Curator of the
Frances Pearsons Plimpton Library of Italian Literature
Antoinette Brigham Putnam Metcalf, m.a.,
Associate and Reference Librarian
Lilla Weed, m.a.,
Associate Librarian, and Curator of the English Poetry Collection
Helen Moore Laws, b.a., b.l.s.,
Cataloguer
20 Officers of Administration
Mary Louise Courtney, b.a.,
Secretary to the Librarian, and Order Assistant
Ethel Adele Pennell, b.a.,
Periodical and Binding Assistant
Eunice Lathrope, b.a.,
Assistant Cataloguer
Agnes Emma Dodge,
Librarian of Edith Hemenway Eustis Library of the
Department of Hygiene and Physical Education
Ruth Ford Catlin,
Librarian of Susan M. Hallowell Memorial Library and
of Caroline B. Thompson Memorial Library
Elizabeth Maria Trumbull,
Librarian of the Art Library
Margaret Dye Truitt, b.a.,
Librarian of the Music Library
Jane Sarah Hawkins, b.a., b.s.,
Assistant Cataloguer
PHYSICIANS
Elizabeth Louise Broyles, m.d.,
Resident Physician
Mary Fisher DeKruif, m.d.,
Health Officer, and Instructor in Hygiene and
Physical Education
Margaret Rioch Anthonisen, m.d.,
Consultant in Mental Hygiene
Marion Cotton Loizeaux, m.d.,
Assistant Physician
Annina Carmela Rondinella, m.d.,
Consulting Ophthalmologist
ASSISTANTS, CUSTODIANS AND SECRETARIES
Anna Elizabeth Anderson,
Secretary to the Department of Hygiene and Physical Education
Grace Ethel Arthur, b.a.,
Secretary to the President
Stella Frances Brewster, b.a.,
General Secretary of the Christian Association
Katharine Bullard Duncan,
Custodian of the Whitin Observatory
Virginia Phillips Eddy, b.a.,
Assistant Secretary to the President
Officers of Administration 21
Marion Frances Finlay, b.a.,
Secretary and Custodian to the Department of Botany
Celia Howard Hersey, b.a.,
Secretary of the Farnsworth Art Museum
Emily May Hopkins, b.s.,
Custodian to the Department of Chemistry
Marion Dorothy Jaques, b.a.,
Recorder in the Department of Hygiene and Physical Education
Marion Johnson, b.a.,
Secretary to the Dean of the College, and to the Class Deans
Kathleen Millicent Leavitt,
Secretary and Custodian to the Department of Zoology
Marion Lewis, b.a.,
Assistant to the College Recorder
Marion Douglas Russell, b.a., ed.m.,
Associate in the Personnel Bureau
Edith Alden Sprague, b.a., b.s.,
Appointment Secretary in the Personnel Bureau
Carol Maryette Terry, b.a.,
Cataloguer in the Art Museum
HEADS OF HOUSES
Helen Willard Lyman, b.a.,
Head of Cazenove Hall
Charlotte Henderson Chadderdon,
Head of Claflin Hall
Ethel Isabella Foster,
Head of Olive Davis Hall
Elizabeth Donnan, b.a.,
Head of Crofton House
Martha Hoyt Wheelwright,
Head of Tower Court
Helen Drowne Bergen,
Director of Horton, Hallowell and Shepard Houses
Frances Badger Lyman,
Head of Norumbega House
Inez Nicholson Cutter,
Head of Elms
Mary Elizabeth Lindsey, b.a.,
Head of Dower House
11 Officers of Administration
Katherine Ursula Williams, b.a.,
Lilian Haskell Lincoln, b.a.,
Dorothy Warner Dennis, b.a., dipl. e.u.,
Frances Hoyt Lewis, m.a.,
Louise Bolard More, m.a.,
Marguerite Mallett Raymond, b.a.,
Mary Isabelle Wiggin, b.a.,
Henrietta Page Alexander, b.a.,
Josephine Williams Brown,
Nancy Eugenia Foster,
Marguerite Livingston Thomas, b.a.,
Amy Kelly, m.a.,
Head of Severance flail
Head of Homestead
Head of Maison Crawford
Head of Shafer Hall
Head of Stone Hall
Head of Pomeroy Hall
Head of Noanett House
Head of Eliot House
Head of Washington House
Head of Beebe Hall
Head of Little House
Head of Munger Hall
BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION
James Dean, b.a.,
Evelyn Amelia Munroe, b.a.,
Essie May Van Leuven Decker,
Charles Bowen Hodges, m.e.,
Frederick Dutton Woods, b.s.,
Wilford Priest Hooper, b.s.,
Florence Irene Tucker, b.a.,
Mary Elizabeth Cutting, ph.b.,
Treasurer
Assistant Treasurer
Comptroller
Business Manager
Superintendent of Grounds
Superintendent of College Buildings
Purveyor
Dietitian
Officers of Administration 23
Ava Close Minsher,
Manager of the Post Office
Elizabeth Bradstreet Walsh, b.a.,
Director of Publicity
Eleanor Carr Phillips, m.a.,
Manager of the Information Bureau
24 Standing Committees
STANDING COMMITTEES
Administrative Board. — Dean Coolidge {Chairman), Misses Arm-
strong, Hamilton, Ruet, Stark, Treudley; Mrs. Mallory; and (ex officiis)
the President, the Dean of Residence, the Class Deans, the College
Recorder, and a College Physician.
Board of Admission. — Dean Knapp {Chairman), Misses Coe,
Hayden, Robathan, Wilson; and (ex officiis) the President and the
Secretary of the Board of Admission.
Committee on College Problems. — Miss Howard {Chairman),
Misses Bruel (2nd semester), Heyworth (1st semester), McCarthy;
Mrs. Hodder, Mrs. Killough, Mrs. Van Winkle.
Board of Control of the Alexandra Garden and Hunnewell
Arboretum. — Miss H. I. Davis {Chairman), Miss Ottley; and {ex
officiis) the President and the Chairman of the Department of Botany.
Committee on Curriculum and Instruction. — Dean Coolidge
{Chairman), Misses Copeland, Der Nersessian, Donnan, Griggs, Heid-
breder, Sleeper; and {ex officio) the President.
Faculty Members in Graduate Council. — Misses Abbot, Bat-
chelder, Bosano, French, Law, Shackford, Thompson; Mr. Hinners;
Mrs. Hodder; and (ex officio) the President.
Committee on Graduate Instruction. — Dean Hughes {Chairman),
Misses Bosano, Clark, French, Parker, L. P. Smith; Mr. Smith; and
{ex officiis) the President, the Dean of the College and the Director of
the Department of Hygiene and Physical Education.
Library Committee. — Miss Roberts {Chairman), Misses Moody,
Tuell; Mrs. Houck, Mrs. Killough; Mr. Curtis; and {ex officiis) the
President and the Associate Librarians.
Committee on Scholarships. — Miss Crocker {Chairman), Mrs.
Bongiorno, Misses Kaan, Stearns, J. B. Williams; and (ex officiis) the
Dean of the College, the Dean of Residence, the Dean of Freshmen,
the College Recorder, and the Secretary to the President.
Faculty Members in Senate of College Government Associa-
tion.— Misses Hawk, Barnette Miller, Snow; Mrs. Wheelwright;
and (ex officio) the President.
Faculty Members in Superior Court. — Misses Bliss, Griggs,
Lincoln; and (ex officio) the President.
Committee on Student Records. — Dean Coolidge (Chairman),
Misses Johnstin, Moses, Orvis, Waterman; Mr. Jenks; and (ex officiis)
the President, the Class Deans, the College Recorder, and the Director
of the Personnel Bureau.
Foundation and Purpose 25
WELLESLEY COLLEGE
Wellesley, Massachusetts
FOUNDATION AND PURPOSE
Wellesley College was established for the purpose of furnishing to
young women who desire to obtain a liberal education such advantages
and facilities as are enjoyed in institutions of the highest grade. The
first building of the College, erected and equipped under the supervision
and through the personal means of the founder, was opened to students
in 1875, with the announced purpose "of giving to young women oppor-
tunities for education equivalent to those usually provided in colleges
for young men." Throughout his work the founder aimed to put into
visible form his ideal of the higher education for women, "the supreme
development and unfolding of every power and faculty."
By the charter, granted by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts,
" the corporation of Wellesley College is authorized to grant such hon-
orary testimonials, and confer such honors, degrees, and diplomas, as
are granted or conferred by any University, College, or Seminary of
learning in this Commonwealth; and the diplomas so granted shall en-
title the possessors to the immunities and privileges allowed by usage or
statute to the possessors of like diplomas from any University, College,
or Seminary of learning in this Commonwealth."
In accordance with the spirit of the founder, the College is unde-
nominational, but distinctively Christian in its influence., discipline, and
instruction.
The members of the College meet daily for morning prayers in the
beautiful chapel presented in 1899 by Miss Elizabeth G. Houghton and
Mr. Clement S. Houghton as a memorial to their father, Mr. William S.
Houghton, a trustee of the College from 1880 to his death in 1894.
Services on Sunday are conducted in this chapel by preachers of differ-
ent denominations. At all these services and at vespers on Sunday, the
singing is led by a trained choir of students under the direction of the
department of music.
The Wellesley College Christian Association is organized to foster
religious life, and interest in social reforms and in home and foreign
service.
The department of Biblical History affords the systematic study of
the Bible required of all students.
26 Admission
ADMISSION
Students may qualify for admission to Wellesley College as candidates
for the bachelor of arts degree either as members of the freshman class
on the presentation of satisfactory entrance credentials, including school
records and entrance examinations, or as students with advanced stand-
ing with records of accomplishment in other colleges. Since the size of
the student body is limited to about fifteen hundred students, candi-
dates in both groups are chosen very carefully in order of the excellence
of their credentials including testimonials concerning health, character,
and scholarship. A student is not admitted, except in very unusual
cases, who is not at least sixteen years of age.
If a student is unable to meet the academic standard prescribed in
college or if she does not conduct herself in accordance with the reg-
ulations which are necessitated by the interests of a community of
students and faculty organized for purposes of study, she may be
required to withdraw from the College.
Application for Admission
Forms of application will be furnished on request. An application
fee of $10 is required of all applicants and no registration is recorded
until the fee is received. If the candidate cancels her registration or
fails to qualify for admission, the fee is not refunded, but it may be
transferred to apply to a later year if the request for the transfer is re-
ceived before November 1 of the year for which the candidate was regis-
tered to enter college. If a candidate's credentials are not received by
July 15 and no request to transfer the application is filed by November
1, the name of the candidate will be automatically dropped from the list.
The Board of Admission cannot usually consider applications re-
ceived later than May 1 of the year in which admission is sought. The
date of application is used as a basis for assigning rooms to accepted
candidates. It is not considered in the selection of candidates.
All communications concerning admission should be addressed to the
Secretary of the Board of Admission, Wellesley College, Wellesley,
Massachusetts.
Health Certificates
A report from the applicant's physician showing that she is organi-
cally sound and in good health, together with a certificate of recent
vaccination, must be filed with the Secretary of the Board of Admission
before June 1 of the year in which admission is sought. Blank forms for
these health reports will be sent to each registered applicant in the year
previous to her proposed entrance to college. Before a candidate is
Admission 27
formally accepted she is given a thorough physical examination in the
opening week of college under the direction of the college medical staff
and the department of physical education. The College reserves the
right to reject any candidate who, in the opinion of the college physi-
cians, is not fitted for work in the college community.
Admission to the Freshman Class
Through its admission procedure, the College tries to select students
with good intellectual ability, adequate preparation for further study,
genuine interest in some of the lines of study offered at Wellesley Col-
lege, and a purpose which will give incentive to steady work. In dis-
covering such students, the Board of Admission studies such criteria as
school records and recommendations, entrance examinations, psycholog-
ical or scholastic aptitude tests, information from the candidate con-
cerning her interests and plans for study. An attempt is made to eval-
uate all these records in the selection of members of the freshman class.
School Records
Complete records of a student's work in secondary school are re-
quired. Blanks for the preliminary records are sent to school princi-
pals in the spring, a year in advance of the student's completion of
preparatory work. Blanks for supplementary records are sent in the
spring of the year of final preparation for college. The Board of Ad-
mission examines these records carefully to discover evidence of intel-
lectual ability, growth of power, interest in special fields of study, and
steadiness of application.
The school record must be supplemented by statements from the
school principals, concerning the special abilities and interests of the
student, power of sustained work, good health habits, integrity, sense
of responsibility, co-operativeness, initiative and self-reliance in work
and in social action. The College wishes to be informed of circum-
stances which may have interfered with a student's work and of special
honors and accomplishments during the student's secondary school
course.
Admission Plans
There are four possible plans of admission to Wellesley College. A
description of each plan follows.
Plan A. — This plan calls for examinations in all subjects offered for
admission credit, either the examinations of the College Entrance Ex-
amination Board, Regents examinations of New York State or, for
foreign students, the matriculation examinations of a foreign university.
Plan A is used by less than a third of the candidates for admission to
Wellesley College.
28 Admission
Examinations under this plan may be taken in two or more successive
years. Students are advised to take final examinations in subjects
which they expect to continue in College. Either the comprehensive or
the ordinary examinations of the College Entrance Examination Board
may be used.
Entrance examinations in Biblical History, Harmony, Music Appre-
ciation and Applied Music will be conducted by Wellesley College.
Applications for these examinations must be made to the Secretary of
the Board of Admission of Wellesley College by May 1.
For detailed information concerning the application for the examina-
tions of the College Entrance Examination Board, candidates should
consult the statement on pages 30-32 under the caption "Examinations
of the College Entrance Examination Board."
Plan B. — Under Plan B four examinations of the College Entrance
Examination Board are considered in connection with the school record
to determine a candidate's admission. One examination subject must
be chosen from each of the following groups: (1) English or History;
(2) a foreign language; (3)* Mathematics, Physics, or Chemistry; (4) a
fourth subject designated by the applicant from the list of admission
subjects in which the College Entrance Examination Board offers ex-
aminations. At least two examinations must cover more than two units
of work.
The Board of Admission must give its permission, based upon the
evidence submitted by the school, before the applicant may take the
examinations. The comprehensive examinations set by the College
Entrance Examination Board are judged by readers appointed by this
Board, and are forwarded to the College for final decision by the Board
of Admission.
Under Plan B the candidate, if admitted to college, will be admitted
free from all conditions. Failure to meet completely the standard in
either kind of evidence required will not necessarily involve rejection of
the applicant; the Board may accept unusual excellence in one part of
the credentials submitted as offsetting unsatisfactory evidence or even
failure in another part. If the candidate fails of admission she may be
permitted to take examinations under Plan A or Plan B the following
June.
The four examinations must be taken in one examination season in
June in the examination centres provided by the College Entrance
Examination Board. Full details about applying for these examina-
tions will be found on pages 30-32 under the caption "Examinations of
the College Entrance Examination Board."
• In group (3) an examination in Biology may be offered in place of Mathematics, Physics, or
Chemistry, with the approval of the Board of Admission.
Admission 29
Plan C. — Under this plan candidates may take at the end of the
junior year the Scholastic Aptitude Test and two examinations (not
English) from the groups now required by Plan B. On the basis of the
results of these examinations, the Scholastic Aptitude Test, school rec-
ords, and recommendations from the principal, candidates may be given
permission to complete their credentials by taking two examinations in the
next examination season. Acceptance will depend upon the results of the
remaining two examinations and upon the school records of the final year.
The examinations used in this plan are those given by the College
Entrance Examination Board. The results of the examinations are
reported to the College instead of to the candidate as in Plan B.
A candidate whose examinations are not approved at the end of the
junior year, may apply for admission by examinations to be taken in the
senior year under any College Board examination plan acceptable to the
College.
Candidates wishing to enter by Plan C should make application to
the Board of Admission on or before May 1 of their junior year in
secondary school and permission to take examinations under Plan C
must be obtained from the Board of Admission.
Plan D. — Admission under this plan is on the basis of the school
records and recommendations and the Scholastic Aptitude Test. To
be considered for admission by Plan D a candidate must have ranked,
during the last two years of her school course, among the highest
seventh of a graduating class containing at least seven students. She
must have covered the equivalent of a standard four-year high school
course which satisfies in general the requirements for approval under
Plan B. Unqualified recommendation of the candidate by her school
principal or headmistress is essential.
Since all admission is on a competitive basis, candidates for entrance
by Plan D cannot be guaranteed admission. They may become eligible
for admission subject to the same conditions as candidates applying for
entrance by examination. As heretofore, final selection of all candi-
dates is made by the Board of Admission on the consideration of
all evidence, both personal and academic.
Candidates from any school except those offering New York State
Regents examinations may be considered for admission by this plan.
The College, however, will feel free to consider the geographical dis-
tribution of students in the entering class and the proportional represen-
tation from public and private schools.
Regulations governing the administration of Plan D:
1. Candidates are eligible to apply for admission without examina-
tion other than the Scholastic Aptitude Test, only in the year in which
they first graduate from a secondary school.
30 Admission
2. Candidates must register with the College Entrance Examination
Board to take the Scholastic Aptitude Test.
3. Applications should state specifically:
(a) The number of pupils in the graduating class.
(b) The applicant's exact numerical rank in the class.
4. Applications must be filed in the office of the Secretary of the
Board of Admission on or before May first in the year in which the
candidate first graduates from a secondary school.
Scholastic Aptitude Test
The Scholastic Aptitude Test of the College Entrance Examination
Board is required of all candidates for admission and students are
advised to take the Scholastic Aptitude Test at the end of the junior
year in secondary school.
Examinations of the College Entrance Examination Board
June Examinations. — The College Entrance Examination Board
will hold examinations in June 1936 at over three hundred points in
this country and abroad. A list of these places will be published about
March 1, 1936. Requests that the examinations be held at particular
points should be transmitted to the Secretary of the College Entrance
Examination Board not later than February 1, 1936.
Detailed definitions of the requirements in all examination subjects
are given in a circular of information published annually about Decem-
ber 1. Upon request to the Secretary of the College Entrance Exam-
ination Board a single copy of this document will be sent to any teacher
without charge. In general, there will be a charge of thirty cents, which
may be remitted in postage.
All candidates wishing to take these examinations should make
application by mail to the Secretary of the College Entrance Examina-
tion Board, 431 West 117th Street, New York, N. Y. Blank forms for
this purpose will be mailed by the Secretary of the Board to any teacher
or candidate upon request by mail.
The applications and fees of all candidates who wish to take the
examinations in June 1936 should reach the Secretary of the Board not
later than the dates specified in the following schedule:
For Examination Centers:
In the United States east of the Mississippi River or on the
Mississippi May 25, 1936
In the United States west of the Mississippi River or in
Canada May 18, 1936
Outside of the United States and Canada, except in Asia May 4, 1936
In China or elsewhere in the Orient April 20, 1936
Admission 31
An application which reaches the Secretary later than the scheduled
date will be accepted only upon payment of $5 in addition to the regular
examination fee of $10.
When a candidate has failed to obtain the required blank form of
application, the regular examination fee will be accepted if the fee arrive
not later than the date specified above and if it be accompanied by a
memorandum with the name and address of the candidate, the exact
examination center selected, and a list of the subjects in which the can-
didate is to take the Board examinations.
Candidates who have failed to file applications for examination may
be admitted by the supervisor upon payment of a fee of $5 in addition
to the regular examination fee. Such candidates should present them-
selves at the beginning of the period of registration. They will receive
from the supervisor blank forms of application which must be filled out
and transmitted to the Secretary of the College Entrance Examination
Board.
In order to exhibit their tickets of admission, to present their identi-
fication cards, and to obtain seats in the examination room, candidates
should report for a morning examination at 8:45 and for an afternoon
examination at 1:45. An examination will close for candidates ad-
mitted late at the same time as for other candidates. The exami-
nations will be held in accordance with the time (Standard Time or
Daylight Saving Time) observed in the local schools.
No candidate will be admitted to the Scholastic Aptitude Test late,
that is, after the test has begun.
The Scholastic Aptitude Test may be taken upon the completion of
the school course or at the end of the third year of secondary school work.
Each candidate desiring to take this test, even though he is to take no
other examination, must file with the Secretary of the Board the usual
application for examination. If the Scholastic Aptitude Test is taken
in connection with other examinations, no additional fee is required; if
taken alone, the fee is $10.
A week in advance of the Scholastic Aptitude Test each candidate
who is to take the test should receive a booklet containing, with explan-
ations and instructions, a specimen test, the blank spaces of which are to
be filled in by the candidate. In order to secure admission to the test,
the candidate must present not only his ticket of admission but also
this booklet with the spaces filled in as requested.
It is very desirable that candidates who are to take the Scholastic
Aptitude Test file their applications with the Secretary. Applications
for the test will be accepted by the supervisor, however, up to the day
before the test provided the supervisor's supply of material for the
Scholastic Aptitude Test is sufficient.
32 Admission
September Examinations. — The comprehensive examinations of
the College Entrance Examination Board are offered in September at
Wellesley College. Special permission to take these examinations must
be obtained from the Board of Admission of Wellesley College, and re-
quests should be entered by August 20. The September examinations
are conducted primarily as final examinations for a limited number of
promising students who have incurred only a slight failure in the June
examinations under Plan A.
SCHEDULE OF EXAMINATIONS
SEPTEMBER, 1936
Monday, September 21
9-12 A.M. English.
2- 5 P.M. French.
Tuesday, September 22
9-12 A.M. Latin.
2- 5 P.M. History.
Wednesday, September 23
9-12 A.M. Elementary Mathematics.
2- 5 P.M. German, Italian, Spanish.
Thursday, September 24
9-12 A.M. Chemistry, Physics.
2- 5 P.M. Greek,
Advanced Mathematics.
Friday, September 25
9-12 A.M. Scholastic Aptitude Test.
2- 5 P.M. Biology, Botany, Zoology.
Regents Examinations
Regents examinations with a rating of 75 per cent may be offered in
place of the examinations of the College Entrance Examination Board.
Credits must be presented on the card verified by the State Board of
Education of New York. The Board of Admission considers an average
lower than 85 per cent as doubtful evidence of ability for college work.
For further information concerning the acceptance of Regents Examina-
tions candidates are referred to the Board of Admission of Wellesley
College.
Dates on which Admission Credentials are Due
The following credentials must be in the hands of the Board of Ad-
mission before July 15 of the year in which entrance is desired:
0
Admission 33
1. Personal information blank with the candidate's choice of ex-
amination plan.
2. Before March 1 — Scholarship applications and requests for
financial aid. {Form must he obtained in advance. For information of
basis of award, see page 162.)
3. Before June 1 — Healthcertificatesand two 2" by V/4" photographs.
4. During May — Application for examinations of the College En-
trance Examination Board, including Scholastic Aptitude Test (for
exact dates, see pages 30-31).
5. Before July 1 — Official transcript of school record for the final year.
(Blank sent to school in May.)
6. Before July 15 — Official reports of Regents examinations.
Plan of Entrance Subjects
The plan of entrance subjects proposed by Wellesley College is de-
signed to give the student a foundation for various fields of study in the
liberal arts college. Since most college applicants have good general
ability in several lines of work and are uncertain when they enter college
where their interests in more advanced study may lead, it is important
for them to secure in secondary school such training and information as
will give them an introduction to several fields of study and such funda-
mental courses as will open to them the greatest freedom of election in
college. All students should offer a minimum of 15 entrance units*.
The experience of the past has seemed to indicate the value of the fol-
lowing units for the majority of students:
English 3 units
Foreign Language 5 units
Latin or Greek 3 units
fA modern language 2 units
French; German; Italian; Spanish
History 1 unit
Mathematics 3 units
Algebra 2 units
Plane Geometry 1 unit
Science 1 unit
This plan allows every student 2 elective units for additional work in
the fields which she believes have greatest value for her. Since most
* A unit represents a year's study of a subject with four or five class appointments a week or
not less than the equivalent of 120 sixty-minute hours of classroom work, two hours of laboratory
work counting as one hour of classroom work.
t A single unit of language is not accepted for admission credit.
34 Admission
students complete more than 15 units in secondary school there is
usually even wider opportunity for election. This plan recommended
by the College as the normal admission program is to be followed by all
candidates for admission with the possible exceptions indicated below.
An exception to the normal program either in foreign language or in
mathematics or in science is allowed to students who meet the condi-
tions stated in paragraph (1) or paragraph (2) below. Any other ex-
ceptions necessitate a special permission from the Board of Admission.
(1) Students from schools emphasizing sequences of work in the
natural sciences and mathematics or whose individual interests
and abilities are centered in these fields may substitute for the
language requirement indicated above a choice of any 5 units from
the following group: French 2 or 3 units; German 2 or 3 units;
Latin 2 units.
(2) Students definitely interested in the fields of language, litera-
ture, the arts, or social sciences who wish to increase their offering
in these fields more than the free electives permit may offer in
mathematics 2 units only, provided the course includes both al-
gebra and plane geometry; or they may offer 3 units of mathematics
and omit the unit of science. Students interested in economics,
mathematics, or science should offer at least 3 units of mathematics
for admission.
In the elective group of units the College will be glad to accept addi-
tional units in any of the subjects listed in the normal program or 1 or
2 units of art or music, a unit of Biblical history, and 1 or 2 units in the
social sciences besides history. Students interested primarily in lan-
guages, literature, and the arts are advised to offer for admission 4 units of
Latin and 2 units of history, of which 1 unit should be European history.
The Board of Admission is interested also to consider courses which
do not follow the published descriptions of unit requirements in subjects
as they are indicated in this Calendar, especially if such courses are
organized as sequences of study in given fields.
The College wishes to cooperate with schools and applicants for ad-
mission in their effort to organize such programs of study as will further
the real educational needs of students in their secondary school course
and will also give an adequate basis for continuing their work in college.
Students are urged to discuss their plans of work early in their secondary
school course with their school advisers and to confer also with the
College Board of Admission. In advance of correspondence with in-
dividual students, the Board will welcome from the school principals
information about unusual curricular plans or courses which the schools
recommend to their college groups.
Admission 35
Definition of Requirements
The definitions of requirements in all subjects in which the College
Entrance Examination Board offers examinations are based on the
statements outlined by this Board. The complete statement of these
requirements may be found in the pamphlet called "A Definition of
Requirements," published annually by the College Entrance Examina-
tion Board, which may be obtained by sending thirty cents in
stamps to the following address: College Entrance Examination Board,
431 West 117th Street, New York City.
In the following statement of requirements, the number enclosed in
parentheses following the subject indicates the number of units as-
signed to that subject, that is, the number of years with four or five
recitations a week which will normally be required in the secondary
school for adequate preparation in the subject.
ENGLISH (3)
The department has adopted the new requirements of the College
Entrance Examination Board that appear in the current number of the
"Definition of Requirements." To this document candidates are
referred for detailed information about the work to be accomplished to
meet the requirements in English.
The study of English in school has two main objects: (1) command of
correct and clear English, spoken and written; (2) ability to read with
accuracy, intelligence, and appreciation, and the development of the
habit of reading good literature with enjoyment.
Composition. — It is advisable that subjects for composition be taken
from the student's personal experience, general knowledge, and studies
other than English, as well as from her reading in literature. Practice
should be given in writing themes of from five to six hundred words and
in making simple outlines.
Literature. — A list of the books recommended for reading and
study, and suggestions concerning preparation for the College Board
examinations in English will be found in the "Definition of Require-
ments."
HISTORY (1, 2 or 3)
All applicants for admission are required to offer one unit in History.
One or two additional units of History may be offered from the follow-
ing: (1) American History (with or without Civil Government), (2)
Ancient History, (3) English History, (4) European History. For
suggestions about preparation in History and the scope of the College
Board examinations candidates are referred to the "Definition of
Requirements."
36 Admission
MATHEMATICS (2, 3 or 4)
In the document entitled "Definition of Requirements," published
by the College Entrance Examination Board, will be found the descrip-
tion of the requirements.
Algebra. — The requirement is met by the course in Mathematics
designated as A 1 (one unit) or A (two units).
Plane Geometry. — The requirement is met by the course in
Mathematics designated as C. If desired, the course designated as CD
may be substituted.
Solid Geometry and Trigonometry. — The requirement is met by
the courses in Mathematics designated as D and E.
LATIN (2, 3 or 4)
There are no prescribed readings in Latin, but the following recom-
mendations are made:
(1) In the second year the early reading should be easy Latin which
may be "made" or adapted Latin; not less than one half of this year
should be devoted to the reading of selections from Caesar. The read-
ing for the year may also include easy selections from such authors
as Aulus Gellius, Eutropius, Nepos, Phaedrus, Quintus Curtius Rufus,
and Valerius Maximus, or books of selections containing some of these
together with authors of prose works.
(2) In the third year, if the reading be in prose, not less than one
half should be devoted to the reading of selections from Cicero; the
reading for the year may also include selections from such authors as
Pliny, Sallust, and Livy, or books of selections containing these and
other authors of prose works.
(3) In the fourth year, if the reading be in poetry, not less than
one half should be devoted to the reading of selections from Vergil;
and the reading for the year may also include selections from such
works as the Metamorphoses, Tristia, Heroides, and Fasti of Ovid, or
books of selections containing poems or extracts from Ovid or from
other poets.
Further information concerning the character of the examination in
four units of Latin will be found in the "Definition of Requirements."
FRENCH, GERMAN, ITALIAN, SPANISH (2, 3, or 4)
Candidates in these departments are referred to the "Definition of
Requirements" published by the College Entrance Examination Board.
It is essential that the student should become accustomed from the
beginning to the use of the spoken language in the classroom.
Admission 37
GREEK (2 or 3)
2 Unit Requirement. — During the two years the student should
acquire a knowledge of the language sufficient to enable her (1) to
translate at sight simple passages of Attic prose; (2) to translate into
Greek a passage of connected English narrative, based on Xenophon;
(3) to read Greek aloud with correct pronunciation and with full
expression of the sense of the passage.
The prescribed study includes — (1) Grammar: inflections; the sim-
pler rules for composition and derivation of words; use of cases; con-
struction of sentences, with particular regard to the use and meanings
of the moods. (2) Prose Composition: regular practice in writing or
speaking Greek, with at least twenty written exercises, including some
connected passages. (3) Three books of Xenophon's Anabasis, or its
equivalent.
3 Unit Requirement. — In addition to the preparation for the
two unit requirement stated above, the student must be able to trans-
late at sight a passage from Homer, and to read it with a correct ex-
pression of the rhythm.
The prescribed study includes: three books of Homer's Iliad; Prose
Composition, continued practice in translation into Attic prose of con-
nected passages of English.
SCIENCE (1, 2 or 3)
One to three units of science may be offered from the following sub-
jects: (1) Biology, (2) Botany, (3) Chemistry, (4) Geography, (5)
Physics, (6) Zoology. The requirements in science are met by the
courses outlined in the "Definition of Requirements." The require-
ment in Botany may also be met by covering the main features in the
course outlined in the Laboratory Guide for the introductory course
at Wellesley College. Copies of this guide may be secured if desired
from the office of the Board of Admission, Wellesley College.
Students are not required to submit laboratory notebooks for admission
credit in science.
MUSIC (1 or 2)
One unit of admission credit is granted in either Harmony or Appre-
ciation.
Two units of admission credit are granted for either of the following
combinations: I. Harmony and Practical Music; II. Appreciation and
Practical Music.
No admission credit is given for Practical Music alone.
A. Harmony. — Students taking this examination must present, at
the time of the examination, their harmony notebooks indorsed by their
38 Admission
teachers. The examination will be adapted to the proficiency of those
who have had one year's systematic training with at least five lessons a
week or its equivalent. (It is understood that this work may be done
in two or more years.) The candidate should have acquired:
(1) The ability to harmonize in four vocal parts simple melodies or
basses of not fewer than eight measures in major and minor. These
melodies and basses will require a knowledge of (a) triads and inver-
sions, (b) diatonic seventh chords and inversions, (c) non-harmonic
tones, (d) modulation, transient and complete, to nearly-related keys.
It is expected that systematic work in ear-training, involving the
recognition of intervals (melodic and harmonic), melodies, and chords,
has been done in connection with the above, and students will be exam-
ined in the same.
The ground covered by this examination is represented by the follow-
ing textbooks. Goetschius: The Theory and Practice of Tone Relations,
Chaps. I through XXI. Foote and Spalding: Modern Harmony, Chaps.
I through XXI. Gehrkens: Music Notation and Terminology is sug-
gested for rudiments, and Wedge: Ear-Training and Sight-Singing
for practice in the recognition of intervals and for melodic dictation.
Material for practice in the recognition of chords may be found in any
harmony textbook.
B. Appreciation. — It should be the purpose of this course (a) to
provide suitable training to accompany the study of practical music
during the preparatory years, (b) to prepare students for entering a
course in elementary harmony, (c) to acquaint students with a small
but representative literature of music and with some of the elements
of musical form.
The course should cover the following:
(Note: It is suggested that the material outlined below under I and
II be made prerequisites to the course, not included in it.)
I. Elements: names of the scale tones; scale formation, major and
minor; key signatures; commonly used time signatures; commonly used
marks of expression; chord formations including the dominant seventh.
II. Ear-training: recognition of major and minor scales and triads;
recognition of all intervals in major and minor scales; recognition of
plagal cadence, perfect cadence, half cadence, deceptive cadence;
recognition of duple and triple meters and of rhythms characteristic of
Waltz, Minuet, Mazurka, and Polonaise.
III. A study of the following forms: Simple Three-part Song-form,
Binary Form, Ternary Form, Rondo Form, Theme and Variation
Form, Minuet and Trio Form.
Admission 39
In testing this knowledge, the student will be required to recognize
the form of a composition upon hearing it played three times.
IV. Memory work. The examination will include a memory test of
representative musical examples. A list of at least twenty examples
chosen by the student (from the works suggested for use in appre-
ciation courses by the music departments of three Eastern Women's
Colleges*) must be presented to the examiner. The examination on
this part of the work will be based on the list thus presented.
C. Practical Music
Piano. The candidate must be prepared to play for the examiners
the following and no candidate will be examined who is not ready to
perform these requirements: (1) Any scale (including major and all
forms of minor) at metronome speed of four notes = 88. (2) Any two
studies selected by the student from Czerny, Opus 261, Heller, Opus
45, or Le Couppey, Opus 20. (3) A Bach Two-Part Invention. (4)
The first movement of a sonata by Haydn, Mozart, or Beethoven.
(5) Apiece of moderate length (which must be memorized) selected from
the works of Schubert, Schumann, Mendelssohn, or Chopin. (6) Hymn
tunes and simple pieces at sight.
BIBLICAL HISTORY (1)
A course such as the one outlined by a committee of the National
Association of Biblical Instructors will meet the requirement. A
statement of this course has been published in "Christian Education,"
June and October, 1932, and a reprint of this can be obtained for
twenty-five cents from the Council of Church Boards of Education,
111 Fifth Ave., New York City.
ADMISSION TO ADVANCED STANDING
Terms of Admission
The number of students admitted to advanced standing in any year
is limited and all entrance is on a competitive basis. If a student has
maintained an excellent record in college and has special interests
which she can follow out at Wellesley College, the Board of Admis-
sion encourages her to apply for entrance with advanced standing
credit. For information about registration candidates should read
page 26.
A candidate should show that she has covered the admission require-
ments for the freshman class of fifteen units of secondary school work
* A list of these compositions will be furnished on application to the Department of Music of
Wellesley College.
40 Admission
(see page 33) and has completed at least a full year of highly satis-
factory work at another college. She should be entitled to honorable
dismissal from the college which she has attended and should be
recommended by her instructors. The Board of Admission will give
information about the colleges and universities from which credits are
accepted.
Residence of at least two years is required to obtain the B.A. degree,
of which one must be the senior year. The work of these two years
must include all the prescribed work (see page 43), not covered by the
credentials submitted. The exact amount of credit given for work
completed in another college will not be determined until after the first
year of residence. The success with which advanced standing candi-
dates carry the work in the first year at Wellesley is an important
consideration in deciding credit.
The selection of applicants for admission with advanced standing
will be made in July of the year in which entrance is desired.
Credentials
The following credentials must be in the hands of the Board of
Admission before July 1 of the year in which entrance is desired:
1. Official statement of college credits, with dates of attendance,
courses offered for credit, grades attained in each course, entrance
credits, and honorable dismissal.
2. Official record of any entrance examinations which have been taken.
3. Copy of the catalogue of the college attended, with name of
candidate, list of courses offered for credit, and page references.
4. Letter of recommendation from one of candidate's instructors
and the Dean.
5. Health credentials.
6. Statement from candidate of her reasons for wishing to transfer
to Wellesley College and of the subjects of her major interest.
Admission of Candidates for the M.A. and M.S. Degrees
Candidates for the degree of Master of Arts or Master of Science in
Hygiene and Physical Education must be graduates of Wellesley
College or of other institutions of satisfactory standing, and must
present adequate credentials signifying their ability to carry on the
work for the degree.
Application for admission as a graduate student in any department
should be made upon a form which will be furnished by the Dean of
Graduate Students on request. It is desirable that the application be
Admission 41
sent by March first of the year in which the student proposes to enter.
It should be accompanied (1) by the official record of courses and
grades, (2) by a copy of the catalogue of the institution attended,
marked to indicate the courses taken, (3) if possible, by papers and
reports of work.
A matriculation fee of five dollars is payable when a student is
accepted as a candidate for the Master's degree. The amount of this
fee will be deducted from the diploma fee of twenty-five dollars pay-
able when the degree is received.
Graduate fellowships and scholarships are described on pages 158-161.
A circular containing full information for graduate students will
be sent on application to the Dean of Graduate Students. For re-
quirements for the M.A. and M.S. degrees see page 47.
Admission of Students Not Candidates for a Degree
candidates for the certificate in hygiene and
physical education
A two years' course, especially designed for the training of teachers
of hygiene and physical education, and leading to the certificate of the
Department of Hygiene and Physical Education, is offered to grad-
uates of approved colleges who meet the requirements. Full informa-
tion will be found on pages 115-120.
Correspondence should be addressed to the Dean of Graduate
Students.
CANDIDATES FOR SPECIAL WORK IN OTHER DEPARTMENTS
Applicants who give satisfactory evidence of ability to pursue
advanced courses of study may be admitted at the discretion of the
Board of Admission, provided that they satisfy the requirements of
the departments which they propose to enter. It will be noted that
opportunities for prosecuting work along special lines are thus open
to persons of experience and success in teaching who possess the
requisite qualifications for admission to college classes.
Applicants of less maturity and attainment are not ordinarily ad-
mitted. If such desire admission they must expect to meet by exam-
ination the requirements prescribed for admission to the freshman
class, or a full equivalent for them, and to satisfy such additional re-
quirements as are prescribed by the departments which they propose
to enter. Specific statements of these requirements in Music will be
found on page 133.
As the capacity of halls of residence is not sufficient for candidates
for degrees, special students cannot be lodged in the college buildings.
\i Degrees
Comfortable homes may 'oe found in the village at about the same
expense as in college houses.
Correspondence should be addressed to the Secretary of the Board
of Admission.
DEGREES
The following degrees are conferred by the Trustees upon recom-
mendation of the Academic Council:
Bachelor of Arts.
Master of Arts.
Master of Science in Hygiene and Physical Education.
Requirements for the B.A. Degree
In constructing the curriculum of which the requirements are given below, the faculty
was guided by a belief that a student's four years in college should give her several specific
sorts of training. The prescribed work is planned to assure her possession of certain skills
which are of general use, and to add to the information which she has acquired before coming
to college further information considered of fundamental importance. Thus the prescribed
work in English Composition, Speech, and foreign language is designed to assure her having
accuracy and effectiveness in speaking and writing English, and in reading at least one for-
eign language. The prescription in Hygiene affords the student a knowledge of the laws
of health. The prescribed work in Biblical History gives a knowledge of the historical basis
of Christianity.
The requirement of work for distribution is made with the purpose of securing for each
student some acquaintance with methods of work and ways of thinking in various repre-
sentative fields of knowledge. The requirement of work for concentration is made in order
that the student shall make a reasonably thorough study of one field of knowledge. The
curriculum is so planned that a student has an opportunity for a considerable amount of ab-
solutely free elective work.
Every candidate for the B.A. degree in 1936 and thereafter must
complete before graduation the equivalent of sixty hours, and have in
addition a reading knowledge of either French or German.
The examination to test the student's reading knowledge of French or German
may be taken at the beginning of the freshman, sophomore, or junior year. A
reading knowledge of either Italian or Spanish may be accepted by the Academic
Council as a substitute for a reading knowledge of French or German in cases in
which students can show that such a knowledge of Italian or Spanish is needed
by them as a tool for work in some particular field. Students majoring in a
modern foreign language will be tested in a reading knowledge of a second
language, ancient or modern; such students may postpone the examination until
the beginning of the senior year.
Of the sixty hours required for the B.A. degree a certain number is
prescribed, a certain number must be elected to fulfill the require-
ments of work for distribution and work for concentration^ the rest is
free elective.
Degrees 43
I. Prescribed. The following subjects are required as specified:
Biblical History • 3 Hours
English Composition (unless exempted for the second
semester by the department) 3* "
Hygiene and Physical Education 120 (unless ex-
empted by examination) 1 hour
Hygiene and Physical Education (practical) ... If
Speech (unless exempted by examination) .... 1
Of the required subjects, English Composition, three hours, must be taken in
the freshman year; Hygiene and Physical Education one and one-half hours in
the freshman year, and one-half hour in the sophomore year; Biblical History,
three hours, in the sophomore year; Speech, one hour, before the junior year.
II. Work for Distribution. Six hours in addition to the pre-
scribed work, to be elected in each of the three groups given below.
The six hours in each of the three groups are to be elected so as to fall
three hours in one department and three hours in another. Only one
beginning course in a modern language may be counted for distribution.
Group I. Art, English Composition, English Literature, French, German,
Greek, Italian, Latin, Music, Spanish, Speech.
Group II. Biblical History, Economics and Sociology, Education, History
and Political Science, Philosophy and Psychology.
Group III. Astronomy, Botany, Chemistry, Geology and Geography,
Mathematics, Physics, Zoology and Physiology.
Every freshman must take for distribution three hours in each of two groups;
and every student is required to have had by the end of her sophomore year at
least three hours counting for distribution in each group.
III. Work for Concentration. Twenty-one hours in one field of
concentration, of which a major of twelve to fifteen hours shall be in one
department, and nine to six hours shall be in courses related or supple-
mentary to the major but falling in one or more departments other
than that in which the major is taken. J
All courses are classified in grades I, II, III; grade I including elementary
courses and grade III the most advanced courses. Of the courses offered to
fulfill the requirement of work for concentration at least one full course of grade
III must be taken in the senior year. Of the twenty-one hours required at least
nine hours must be above grade I and at least six hours must be of grade III.
• If a student fails to pass with a grade of at least C in the second semester of English Composi-
tion 101, she will be required to take an additional semester course in the sophomore year.
t The second hour in Hygiene and Physical Education is met by four periods in practical work,
two periods per week in the freshman year and two in the sophomore year.
t In the interpretation of this requirement the departments of Geology and Geography, History
and Political Science, Philorophy and Psychology shall count in each case as two departments.
44
Degrees
Every candidate for the B.A. degree must pass a genera! examination
in a major subject in addition to the regular course examinations.
Course Examinations
An examination period occurs at the end of each semester. At these
periods, and also during the days of the admission examinations in
September, examinations for the removal of conditions and deficiencies
and for advanced standing may be taken.
A student who wishes to take an examination upon a course which is
not a part of her approved schedule for the year, must apply to the
College Recorder for the requisite card of admission to the examination.
The last day for receiving applications for such cards is for the Septem-
ber examinations, September first; for the mid-year examinations,
January first; for the June examinations, May first.
N. B. Examinations for the removal of conditions and deficiencies
excepted, no student can be admitted to examination upon a course
which is not a part of her approved schedule for the year without per-
mission both from the chairman of the department concerned and her
class dean. No student, therefore, should enter upon preparation for
such an examination until her plan has been approved by both of the
above named officers.
Standard for Graduation
A certain quality grade is required for graduation and, for the purpose
of determining this quality grade, numerical values called "points" are
given to the grade letters as follows: for grade A, three points for each
semester hour of the course in which the grade is received; for grade B,
two points; for grade C, one point; for grade D (passing), no points; for
a grade below D, no points and not counted in hours toward a degree.
In order to be recommended for the degree of Bachelor of Arts a student
must in each semester attain as many quality points as the hours she
carries, i.e., a C average. Deficiency of points in any semester may be
made good only in accordance with regulations adopted by the faculty.
Students who are deficient in quality points at the end of the third year
or who are otherwise not of diploma grade will not be permitted to
continue.
The College reserves the right to require the withdrawal of students
whose scholarship is not satisfactory, and of those who for any other
reason are regarded as not in accord with the ideals and standards which
the College seeks to maintain.
Honors in a Special Field
Students who wish to become candidates for Honors may apply in
the spring of their sophomore or junior year to the special committee
Degrees 45
appointed to consider these applications. All applications must be
accompanied by recommendations from instructors.
A student electing to study for Honors will choose a Field of Special
Study and will work in that field under the direction of one or more of
the instructors concerned who will advise her on the possible develop-
ment of her field and will guide her in the carrying on of independent
work within it.
A candidate for Honors in a Special Field must take all the prescribed
work, and a minimum of twenty-one hours in the chosen field. This
field includes work in the major department and allied courses, and with
the approval of the major department directing the work may include
three hours of directed study independent of scheduled courses in the
junior year and three hours in the senior year. The able student is
thus led to form habits of investigation in a manner to assist her in
advanced study.
Admission to Honors in a Special Field will be confined to candidates
whose scholarship, maturity, and previous range of acquirement justify
exceptional concentration. The work in the Field of Special Study for
such a candidate will be subject to the following tests:
1. In general, the regular tests of the courses in the Field of Special
Study must be taken.
2. A comprehensive examination must be taken in the student's field
at the close of the senior year. This examination will take the place of
the general examination required for seniors and will be in part or wholly
oral.
Pre-Medical Course
Each student who is planning to study medicine is advised to confer
with her class dean before the beginning of her sophomore year.
Entering students are advised to elect two pre-medical sciences in the
freshman year.
In general, requirements for admission to medical schools of Class A
can be met by nine hours in Chemistry and six hours in Physics and
Zoology respectively, but each student is advised to study carefully the
requirements for the particular school which she has chosen.
Attention is called to the fact that twelve hours are required as a basis
for the general examination in any department. It is, however, possible
to fulfill the minimum requirement for medical schools, and to take the
general examination in an entirely different field.
Preparation for Hospital and Public Health Work
Students planning to prepare for work in hospital or public health
laboratories should begin both Chemistry and Zoology in their freshman
46 Degrees
year in order to have the necessary foundation for advanced courses.
The departments of Botany, Chemistry, and Zoology should be con-
sulted concerning combinations of courses in later years of the college
course.
General Instructions
The program in the freshman year is as follows:
English Composition 101 3 hours
Hygiene 120 1 hour
Hygiene 121 (practical work 2 hours) V* hour
Electives, 4 three-hour courses 12 hours
Total 16K hours
The courses must be chosen in accordance with the prerequisites
given in the department statements from the list of courses named be-
low, with the provision that one course must be chosen from each of two
of the three groups (see below, and also page 43), and with the advice
that the choice should not include two beginning courses in modern
language.
ELECTIVE COURSES OPEN TO FRESHMEN, ARRANGED BY GROUPS
Group I. Art 101, 102, English Literature 101, French 101, 102, 103,
104, 201, 202, German 101, 102, 104, Greek 101, 201, 202, 205, Italian
101, 102, Latin 101, 103, 104, 105, Musical Theory 101, 102, 201, 203,
207, Spanish 101, 102, 103, Speech 101, 104, 105.
Group II. Economics 101|, History 101, 102, Political Science 104f,
Philosophy 102f, 107f, Psychology 101f.
Group III. Astronomy 101, Botany 101, Chemistry 101, 103,
Geology 101, Mathematics 106, 107, Physics 101, 102, 104, 203, 205,
Zoology 101.
By special permission a student who wishes to carry only fourteen
and a half hours in her freshman year may take the one-hour French
course 202, or Italian 102, or the required one-hour course in Speech
if she has not elected the three-hour course in Speech.
If \6}4 hours are satisfactorily completed in the freshman year, the
normal program for the remaining years would be as follows:
Sophomore year 16X hours
t • 1 <; "
lumoryear lD
c • 1? "
senior year >■*■
If 16}4 hours are not completed in both the freshman and sophomore
years, a student may carry more hours in the junior and senior years
than specified above, subject to the usual regulations.
f Require special permission of Dean of Freshmen.
Degrees 47
Elective courses must be chosen with great care so that changes will
not be necessary. Students are held responsible for observing the
requirements for the degree and the proper sequence of courses.
Students, except entering freshmen, are required to choose in May
their electives for the year following. All requests for changes of
elective courses should be sent in time to reach the College before
September 15th.
Requirements for the M.A. and M.S. Degrees
Wellesley College offers graduate work leading to the degrees of
Master of Arts, and Master of Science in Hygiene and Physical Edu-
cation. The work required of a candidate is considered to be the
equivalent of twelve hours of college work. In general, a candidate is
required to work in one department. The program includes no fewer
than two full courses of Grade III or their equivalents, and may include
a thesis embodying the results of original research, or a report or reports
based on independent work. A candidate for either degree is required
to have a working knowledge of either French or German, to be tested
by examination at entrance. Individual departments may require a
second language. At least one year of graduate study is required of all
candidates, but more time may be needed for the completion of the
work. One year in residence is required of all candidates except grad-
uates of Wellesley College who have done the work at some institution
which does not grant a Master's degree to women.
Information regarding requirements for admission, theses, final
examinations, etc., will be found in the Graduate Circular which will be
sent on application to the Dean of Graduate Students.
48 Courses of Instruction
COURSES OF INSTRUCTION
1935-36
The following courses of instruction are offered by the several departments.
The College reserves the right to withdraw the offer of any course not chosen by
at least six students.
All courses are classified in grades I, II, III; grade I including elementary
courses and grade III the most advanced courses. Grade I courses are numbered
101, etc.; grade II courses 201, etc.; grade III courses 301, etc.
An asterisk (*) before the number of a course indicates that it is open to
freshmen.
ART
Professor: Myrtilla Avery, Ph.D. (Chairman), director of the art museum.
Lecturers: Eliza Newkirk Rogers,5 M.A.
Harriet Boyd Hawes, M.A., L.H.D.
Associate Professors: Sirarpie Der Nersessian, Lie. is Let., Dipl. E.S., Dipl. E.H.E.
William Alexander Campbell,3 M.F.A.
Assistant Professors: Laurine Mack Bongiorno, Ph.D.
Bernard Chapman Heyl,3 M.F.A.
Agnes Anne Abbot.
Thomas Buckland Jeffery,8 Dipl. Oxon., M.F.A.
Instructors: Helen Hamilton Werthessen, B.Des.
Adele Barre Robinson. B.A., B.Des.
Cataloguer: Carol Maryette Terry, B.A.
art museum
Secretary: Celia Howard Hersey, B.A.
Assistants: Alice Churchill Moore
Mary Catherine Keating
Some practice in the elements of drawing, painting, and modeling is required as part of all
courses in art (except as otherwise specified) in order to develop observation and increase
appreciation of aesthetic values. This work is planned for students of the history of art,
but will be adapted also to those whose interests are primarily in the studio.
*101. Introductory Course (1): Ancient, Early Christian, and Italian
Art.
This course, though planned to lay foundations for further study of the history
of art and leading directly to course 205, is complete in itself, having for its theme
classic art, its inheritances and its part in later European art. First semester:
Greek art, its predecessors in Egypt, Mesopotamia and /Egean lands, and the
art of pagan Rome. Second semester: Christian art in the East and in Italy.
The laboratory work includes drawing and water color.
Open to all students except those who have completed or are taking course 102
or 203. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Der Nersessian, Mr. Campbell, Miss Abbot,
Mrs. Werthessen, Mrs. Robinson, Miss Terry.
205. Introductory Course (2) : Mediaeval and Renaissance Art.
First semester: Mediaeval art, with emphasis on Romanesque and Gothic
architecture. Second semester: Renaissance and later art, with emphasis on
painting. The laboratory work includes modeling and oil painting.
3 Absent on leave for the second semester.
5 Appointed for the second semester only.
Art 49
Open to students who have completed course 101 or an equivalent. Not open to
students who have completed or are taking course 202. Three hours a week for a
year. Miss Avery, Mr. Campbell, Mrs. Bongiorno, Mr. Heyl,
Mrs. Werthessen, Miss Terry.
*102. Ancient, Early Christian, and Italian Art.
The ground covered in the history of art is in general the same as in course
101, but studies in the technique of drawing, modeling, and water color are not
included.
Open to all students except those who have completed or are taking course 101 or
203. This course may be offered as prerequisite for course 205 if supplemented by
course 104 or an equivalent. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Der Nersessian, Mr. Campbell, Mrs. Robinson.
202. Mediaeval, Renaissance, and Modern Art.
Architecture, sculpture, and painting, with emphasis on mediaeval architecture
in France and Renaissance painting in Italy. Laboratory work is not included.
Open to students who have completed course 101 or 102 and to seniors without pre-
requisite. Not open to students who have completed or are taking course 203 or 205.
Three hours a week for a year. First semester: Mr. Jeffery.
Second semester: Miss Der Nersessian.
106. Ancient Civilizations of Egypt, Hither Asia, the ^Egean Islands,
Greece and Rome.
An outline based on the monuments. Laboratory work is not included.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors. This course is recommended as a sup-
plementary study in archeology to students who have completed or are taking course
101 or 102. One hour a week for a year. Mrs. Hawes.
203. Outline Course in the History of Art.
This course follows the development of styles in architecture, sculpture, and
painting, emphasizing Greek sculpture, French mediaeval architecture, and
Italian Renaissance painting. The purpose is to develop observation and aes-
thetic appreciation as well as to relate important monuments to their contempo-
rary civilization. Laboratory work is not included.
Open to seniors except those who have completed or are taking course 101 , 102, or
202. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Avery.
207. Chinese and Japanese Art.
A study of the art of China and Japan as it reflects the life and philosophy of
the major periods. The laboratory work includes some practice in Japanese
brush handling.
Open to juniors and seniors without prerequisite. Three hours a week for the
first semester. Mr. Campbell.
50 Courses of Instruction
303. Painting of the Italian Renaissance.
A study of the rise and development of painting in Italy, including some study
of contemporary sculpture.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking course 205 or, by
permission, course 202. Three hours a week for a year. Mrs. Bongiorno.
305. Modern Painting.
Emphasis will be placed on the development of French painting from the 17th
century to the present day, as a background for the study of contemporary
movements. Practical experiments in composition, form, and color will be used
as a basis for the study of modern characteristics.
Open by permission of the department to seniors who have completed course 303,
311, or 313. Three hours a week for the second semester. Mrs. Werthessen.
306. Engraving and Etching from the Renaissance to the Present
Time.
A study of the rise and development of engraving and etching including com-
parisons with the allied arts of woodcutting, mezzotinting, and lithographing,
and a brief study of technical processes. Frequent visits to the Boston and Fogg
museums will be required.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking course 205 or 202.
Three hours a week for the first semester. Mrs. Bongiorno.
307. Studies in Mediaeval Art.
Problems in style and iconography connected with the origins of Italian paint-
ing and sculpture, involving the study of mediaeval miniatures and ivories and
early frescoes and sculpture of Campania and the Abruzzi. Laboratory prac-
tice in the technique of tempera, fresco, and manuscript illumination.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 205 or, by permission,
course 202. Three hours a week for the second semester.
Miss Avery, Miss Abbot.
310. Mediaeval, Renaissance and Modern Sculpture.
A study of the blending of classic and barbarian inheritances in the Middle
Ages, the emergence of the sculptural expression of the Renaissance, and analysis
of some modern trends. The laboratory work includes modeling from life to
develop a better understanding of the conventions of sculpture.
Open to students who have completed or are taking course 205 or, by permission,
course 202. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Avery, Mrs. Bongiorno, Miss Abbot.
311. Painting of Northern Europe.
The period of study extends from about 1300 to 1600 in France, Germany, and
the Low Countries, and includes the seventeenth century in Flanders and
Holland.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 205 or an equivalent.
Three hours a week for the first semester. Mrs. Bongiorno.
Art 51
312. Spanish Art. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
A study of the architecture, sculpture, painting, and minor arts in Spain from
the period of classical influence to the present day. Visits to the Boston and
Fogg museums alternate with laboratory work.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking course 205 or 202;
and, by permission, to juniors and seniors majoring in Spanish. Three hours a
week for the second semester. Mr. Heyl.
313. Baroque Art.
This course will consider the nature of baroque art. Its rise and development
in Italy will be emphasized, but the style will be studied also in monuments of
Spain, France, and the Netherlands.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 205 or, by permission,
course 202. Three hours a week for the first semester. Mr. Heyl.
314. Byzantine Art. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Mosaics and paintings of Byzantine, Bulgarian, Serbian, and Russian churches
from the sixth to the fourteenth century. Problems in style and iconography
with opportunities for independent work and comparative studies with Italian
art. Laboratory work is not included.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking course 202 or 205.
Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Der Nersessian.
315. Gospel Illustration in Byzantine Manuscripts.
Origin and development of the various cycles. Iconographical comparisons
with Armenian, Coptic, Syriac, and Slavonic manuscripts and with mediaeval
church decoration.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking course 205 or 202.
Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Der Nersessian.
318. Ancient Art. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Egypt and Hither Asia; beginnings of formal ornament; recently discovered
towns, temples, and tombs. Practical work is not required.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking course 202 or 205;
or to qualified juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking a course of
grade II in Biblical History, Greek, Latin, or History. Three hours a week for the
first semester. Mrs. Hawes.
319. Prehellenic Art. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Arts and crafts of Minoan Crete. The Age of Fable in the light of recent ex-
cavations. Methods of excavation. Origins of Greek art. Practical work is
not required.
Open to juniors and seniors under the same conditions as course 31S. Three
hours a week for the second semester. Mrs. Hawes.
320. Hellenic Art.
Greek architecture and sculpture from the sixth to the fourth century B.C.
$1 Courses of Instruction
Athens in the Age of Pericles. Masterpieces of Greek sculpture in American
museums. Laboratory work is not required.
Open to juniors and seniors under the same conditions as course 318. Three
hours a week for the first semester. Mrs. Hawes.
321. Hellenistic and Roman Art.
This course will follow the ramifications and syntheses of Classical Art from
the conquest of Alexander to the conversion of Constantine. Painting and the
minor arts will be studied. Laboratory work is not required.
Open to juniors and seniors under the same conditions as course 318. Three
hours a week for the second semester. Mrs. Hawes.
323. Studies in Church Architecture.
The course presents the varied forms of church architecture from its begin-
nings to the present day, with emphasis on the Renaissance period. Styles are
considered in relation to the historical and social background of the age. Prob-
lems providing opportunities for original work are assigned, with the purpose of
developing an understanding of construction and design and of the evolution of
architectural style. Drawing is not required.
Open to students who have completed course 205 or 202. Three hours a week for
the first semester. Mr. J effery.
324. Studies in Domestic Architecture.
A critical study of selected types of house design. This will include compari-
sons of one type in different countries, such as the half-timber house in England,
France, and Germany; analysis of developments and interrelations, as in the
Renaissance styles; and an investigation of the underlying principles of modern
house building. Laboratory instruction in architectural sketching.
Open to students who have completed course 205 and have completed or are taking
another course of grade III, or course 204. Three hours a week for the second
semester. Mrs. Rogers.
350. Research or Individual Study.
Independent work on special problems under direction of one or more mem-
bers of the department.
Open by permission of the department to juniors and seniors who have completed
or are taking a course of grade III. Three hours a week for a semester or for a year.
STUDIO COURSES
103. Studio Practice.
Modeling, drawing, sketching, and painting (oil and water-color).
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors. Six periods of class instruction and
three of studio practice counting three hours a week for a year. This course may
count toward the degree after one full course in the History of Art has been completed .
Miss Abbot, Mrs. Werthessen
104. Studio Practice.
Drawing, modeling, and water-color painting. This course is planned for
students who are conscious of no talent for practical art. Its purpose is to
Art 53
develop informed appreciation through practical study of the elements of the
artist's technique; and to train students of the history of art in quick sketching
and the use of color for recording observation. It corresponds in general to the
laboratory work of course 101, and is advised for students who have taken
course 102 and not course 103 and wish to major in art.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors who have not taken course 101 or course
103. One period of class instruction and two of studio practice counting one hour a
week for a year. This course may count toward the degree after one full course in the
History of Art has been completed. Mrs. Robinson.
204. Studio Practice.
Design.
Open by permission of the department to juniors and seniors who have completed
course 101, 103, or 104. Six periods of class instruction and three of studio practice
counting three hours a week for the first semester. This course may count toward the
degree after two full courses in the History of Art have been completed. Miss Abbot.
208. Composition. (Not given in 1935-36.)
Principles of design related to various types of composition, in conjunction
with direct study from the human model, still life, or landscape. Problems may
take the form of book illustration, painting and mural decoration, decorative
sculpture, etc.
Open to students who have completed course 204. Six periods of class instruction
and three of studio practice counting three hours a week for the second semester.
This course may count toward the degree after two full courses in the History of Art
have been completed. Miss Abbot.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
Courses 101 and 205, followed by grade III courses, form the usual sequence
for a major in Art. Courses 102 and 202 may in special cases be substituted for
courses 101 and 205 by permission of the department. A reading knowledge of
French, German, and Italian is important if a serious study of the History of Art
is contemplated.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
The general examination will be in two parts, two hours in the morning (with
slides or photographs) and two hours in the afternoon.
It will be designed to test:
(1) Knowledge of outstanding examples from earliest times to the present day.
(2) Understanding of the meaning of terms commonly used in the study of art.
(3) A general comprehension of the relations of the different styles and periods.
(4) Ability (a) to make use of visual material in presenting a subject; (b) to
perceive the value of evidence; (c) to coordinate material and present it logically.
In view of the varied aspects of the subject (architecture, sculpture, painting,
and the minor arts) in the different periods, a twelve-hour major is advised.
MUSEUM TRAINING COURSE
This course is open to graduates only and is described in a separate circular.
54 Courses of Instruction
ASTRONOMY
Professor: John Charles Duncan, Ph.D. (Chairman)
Instructor: Helen Walter Dodson, Ph.D.
Assistant: Alice Eleanor Taylor, B.A.
Custodian: Katharine Bullard Duncan.
*101. Descriptive Astronomy.
A general survey of the facts of Astronomy, of the methods by which they are
obtained and of the theories that account for them; facts with which every edu-
cated person should be familiar in order to understand the astronomical allusions
occurring in literature and to be alive to the beauty of the order that is about us.
Open to all undergraduates. Two lecture appointments, one two-period laboratory
appointment, and an average of one hour of evening observations, with an additional
lecture appointment at certain seasons, counting three hours a week for a year.
Mr. Duncan, Miss Dodson, Miss Taylor.
102. Descriptive Astronomy. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
This course covers the same topics as Astronomy 101, and students of both
courses attend the same lectures. No laboratory work is included in Astron-
omy 102, but in its place there is given a one-hour conference period for informal
discussions and for occasional reports by students on assigned topics. Opportu-
nity is given for constellation study and for observation with the telescopes.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors. Astronomy 102 counts as a free
elective but does not count toward fulfillment of the requirement for distribution in
Group III. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Duncan.
206. The History of Astronomy. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Development of the science from ancient times to the present, with special
emphasis on the period since Copernicus. Recitations, and reports by students.
Open to students who have completed course 101. Three hours a week for the
second semester. Mr. Duncan.
207. Practical Astronomy.
Practice in the use of astronomical instruments and methods, with emphasis
on observation with the equatorial telescope and its attachments.
Open to students who have completed course 101 or 102. Three hours a week for
the first semester. This course involves both daytime and evening work at the Ob-
servatory. Miss Dodson, Miss Taylor.
208. Practical Astronomy.
Practice in the use of astronomical instruments and methods, with emphasis
on the transit instrument and the determination of time, longitude, and latitude.
Open to students who have completed course 101 or 102 and who have a knowledge
of Trigonometry. Three hours a week for the second semester. This course involves
both daytime and evening work at the Observatory.
Mr. Duncan, Miss Taylor.
Astronomy 55
300. Stellar Astronomy.
Studies of the number, brightness, distribution, and motions of the stars;
double and variable stars; structure of the Galaxy; extra-galactic systems.
Open to juniors and seniors tuho have completed Astronomy 101 and who have a
knowledge of Trigonometry. Three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Dodson.
301. Astrophysics.
Astronomical spectroscopy; the laws of radiation; determination of radial
velocities; physical properties and constitution of the stars.
Open to students who have completed course 101 or 102, and Physics 301. Three
hours a week for the second semester. When combined with Physics 301 it may be
counted toward a major in Astronomy or Physics. Miss Dodson.
302. Determination of Orbits.
Determination, from three observations, of the elliptic and parabolic orbits of
bodies in the Solar System. Orbits of binary stars. Theory and practice.
Open to students who have completed course 101, and who have a knowledge of
Calculus. This course may be counted toward a major in either Astronomy or
Mathematics. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Duncan.
303. Celestial Mechanics. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
The attraction of bodies of various forms under Newton's law of gravitation.
The problems of two and of three bodies. Perturbations.
Open to students who have completed Differential and Integral Calculus. Three
hours a week for a year. Mr. Duncan.
304. Astronomical Seminar. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Open to graduate students. Ordinarily, three hours a week for a year.
Mr. Duncan, Miss Dodson.
350. Research or Individual Study.
Work under one or more members of the department on subjects to be deter-
mined by the interests and capabilities of the individual student. This course
may be taken repeatedly.
Open by permission of the department to graduates and other advanced students.
Two or three hours a week for a semester, or one to three hours for a year. The
amount of work contemplated must be indicated at the time of handing in electives.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
All students who desire a knowledge of astronomy as a part of their general
education should elect course 101. Students for whom the work of this course is
insufficient but who do not wish to major in the department may well continue
with course 206 or course 207 (or both), for which the course in Descriptive
Astronomy is the only prerequisite. A nine-hour major should include As-
tronomy 101, 207, and 208, and either Astronomy 301 with Physics 301 or As-
tronomy 302. A twelve-hour major should include an additional course of
grade III. Students majoring in Astronomy should take at least two courses of
mathematics and one of physics.
56
Courses of Instruction
GENERAL EXAMINATION
The general examination in Astronomy will be based upon the combination of
courses which the student has taken as a major. A choice of questions will
always be allowed. In addition to the written questions, there will be an oppor-
tunity for the student to show her familiarity with the use of astronomical in-
struments. No study during vacations will be required.
BIBLICAL HISTORY, LITERATURE, AND
INTERPRETATION
Associate Professors: Muriel Streibert Curtis, B.A., B.D. (Chairman)
Louise Pettibone Smith, Ph.D.
Seal Thompson, M.A.
Gordon Boit Wellman, Th.D.
Assistant Professors: Katy Boyd George,1 M.A.
Joseph Garabed Haroutunian, B.D., Ph.D.
Lecturer: Katharine Hazeltine Paton, B.A., B.D.
Instructor: James Philip Hyatt, M.A., B.D.
Assistant: Margaret Hopkins Wengren, B.A.
The requirement in Biblical History may be met in any of the following ways:
1. By course 112 and a semester course in the New Testament.
2. By course 104.
3. By course 210 (see prerequisite.)
If 112 and a semester course in the New Testament are chosen, one and one-half hours
may be counted as a free elective or, if another semester course is taken in the department,
it may be counted toward distribution.
Students intending to major in the department are advised to choose the first alternative.
112. The Development of Religion in the Old Testament. (Not given
in 1935-36.)
It is the purpose of this course to offer studies in the development of theology,
worship and ethics in the Old Testament. There will be included such historical
study of Hebrew national life and such presentation of the literary problems con-
nected with the Old Testament writings as are necessary to make intelligible the
development of thought. This year course is advised, not only for those
majoring in the department, but for those who wish opportunity for a more
intensive study of the Old Testament than is possible in the first semester of 104.
Open to sophomores. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Smith.
104. Studies in the Old and New Testaments.
First Semester: Selected Parts of the Old Testament. Aims: (1) Some compre-
hension of the religion which prepared the way for Christianity and which is one
of the principal influences that has shaped our civilization. (2) Familiarity
with some of the prose and poetry of a great classic. (3) Some understanding
of scholarly methods of handling Biblical material. (4) A perspective in reli-
gious thinking which may aid in building a foundation for the student's own
religion.
Second Semester: A study of Jesus as he is presented in the first three gospels.
The aim is to examine the environment in which he lived, to study the events of
his life from the historical point of view, to understand his teaching, and to
discover his abiding significance.
Required of sophomores except as indicated above. Three hours a week for a year.
Mrs. Curtis, Miss Smith, Miss Thompson,
Mr. Wellman, Mr. Haroutunian, Mr. Hyatt, Mrs. Paton.
'Abtent on leave.
Biblical History 57
202. The Life of Jesus.
This course continues the study of the Bible begun in course 112. It covers
the same general ground as does the second semester of course 104, but in a more
mature and intensive way.
Open to students who have completed course 112. Three hours a week {or the first
semester. Miss Thompson.
203. Elementary Hebrew. (Not given in 1935-36.)
The elements of Hebrew grammar, with practice in translation and the memo-
rizing of a vocabulary. Reading of selections from the Old Testament. At the
end of the course the student should be able to read simple Hebrew and to use
the language in the study of the Old Testament.
Open to juniors and seniors. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Smith.
204. The Beginnings of Christianity.
This course is designed to enable those students who have already studied the
Life of Jesus in course 104 or 202 to complete their study of the New Testament
and to see the principles of Jesus at work as they came in contact with the life of
the Grseco-Roman world. It deals with the rise and earliest development of the
Christian religion. The New Testament forms the basis for this study, with
emphasis upon the thought of Paul and of the Fourth Gospel.
Open to students who have completed courses 104, 202, or 210. Three hours a
week for a semester. Offered in both semesters. Miss Thompson.
206. Greek Testament. Text Study of Several New Testament Books.
(Not given in 1935-36.)
The course will deal with the development of Paul's theology. Such topics as
these will be discussed: Paul's theology as a Pharisee: his conception of God, sin,
salvation; his experience of Christ; his later theology. Parts of the following
books will be read in Greek: Acts, I and II Corinthians, Romans, Philippians,
Galatians.
Open to students who have completed course 210. Three hours a week for the
second semester.
207. History of Religions.
The aim of this course is to study the history of religions from the earliest
historical period through the leading religions of today. The approach is from
the historical standpoint and includes a study of comparative developments and
values. Readings, discussions, special topics, and short papers.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed the required work in Biblical
History. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Wellman.
208. Survey of the Application of Christian Ethics to Social Problems.
(Not given in 1935-36.)
A study of the attitudes of the Christian church toward social and political
questions in certain periods of her history. Among the topics studied are the
ethical aspects of the conflict between the Christian church and the Roman
Empire, the results of the development of monasticism upon the ethical stand-
ards of the church, the social ethics of the great Protestant reformers. Em-
58 Courses of Instruction
phasis will also be placed upon such modern movements as Christian socialism
and the "social gospel."
Open to students who have completed the required work in Biblical History and
who have taken or are taking Economics 101 or History 102 or any other course in
modern history. Three hours a week for the first semester.
209. Further Studies of the Old Testament.
This course offers opportunity for more detailed work on selected portions of
the Old Testament. Both content and emphasis (historical, literary, religious)
are determined by the interests of the students. Special reports and papers on
selected topics.
Open to students who have completed course 104 and by permission to students
who have finished the first semester of course 104. Required of those who major in
the department of Biblical History, and who have not taken course 112. Three
hours a week for the second semester. Miss Smith.
210. Special Biblical Studies for Students with a Knowledge of Greek.
This course is similar to course 104, offering a semester's study in the Old
Testament and a semester of work based on the synoptic gospels, but the New
Testament work is done in Greek.
Open to students who have completed or are taking a grade II Greek course. The
second semester may be taken separately by those who have done their Old Testament
work in course 112, and have fulfilled the language requirement. Students choosing
this way of fulfilling the requirement in Biblical History may postpone the zvork
until their junior year without special permission. Three hours a week for a year.
Mr. Wellman.
301. Seminar in History of Religion. (Not given in 1935-36.)
This study consists of readings and discussions in the history of religions.
Each student will be expected to investigate and study some particular historical
problem. Emphasis will be laid upon the historical method of study as well as
upon an understanding of the characteristic development of the religion under
attention. The course is given in one weekly appointment, possibly running
into extra schedule hours.
Open to approved seniors. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Wellman.
302. Interpretations of Christianity.
The aim of this course is to study the varying conceptions of the essentials
of Christianity as formulated in some of the most important periods of the his-
tory of the church; to consider these conceptions in their relations to the religion
of the New Testament and to the religious thought of the present day. This
course will be given in one weekly appointment running into extra schedule
hours.
Open to approved seniors who have completed course 204 or 206. Three hours a
week for a year. Miss Smith.
303. Second Year Hebrew. (Not given in 1935-36.)
Open to students who have completed course 203. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Smith.
Biblical History 59
305. Trends in Contemporary Christianity.
Studies of such developments as Anglo-Catholicism, fundamentalism and
modernism, the crisis theology, the Oxford Groups movement, humanism, the
social emphasis and the implications for religion of modern scientific concepts.
Open to students who have completed or are taking course 204 or 206. Three
hours a week for a semester. Of ered in both semesters. Mr. Haroutunian.
For an additional course which may count toward a major in Biblical History,
see Latin 307.
The attention of students is called to the course in Religious Education
(Education 204) and to the course listed under Group Leadership as being of
practical value to those especially interested in the work of this department.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
If a student is intending to major in the department, it is recommended that
she begin with course 112. If she begins with course 104, and then decides
to major in Biblical History, course 209 is required to complete the Old Testa-
ment work. Course 302 is open only to those who have had course 204 or 206.
Suggested Nine or Twelve Hour Sequences
(The courses in Hebrew, Religious Education, and Latin 307 have not been
included in the sequences given, but may be substituted in appropriate places.)
112, 202-204, 301 or 302, or both 301 and 302.
104, 204, 209, 301 or 302, or both 301 and 302.
104, 204, 208, 207.
104, 204, 305, 301 or 302, or both 301 and 302.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
Students will be expected to show a knowledge of the Bible as a whole, espe-
cially from the point of view of it as a record of religious thought and develop-
ment. In addition they will be expected: (1) to trace the religious ideas thus
derived in the later history of the Christian church, in its varied forms of per-
sonal experience and life and its differing types of organization; (2) to be fa-
miliar with the facts concerning the origin and development of primitive religion
and with the fundamental principles of other religious faiths outside of Judaism
and Christianity. Students who offer 303 (Hebrew) will be expected in place
of (1) or (2) above to present with comparative accuracy the forms of thought
appearing in the Old Testament and to show some appreciation of the relation-
ship existing between the development of religious ideas and the linguistic vehicle
by which they are conveyed.
Such questions of minute detail concerning Biblical history, biography and
literature as might be included in term examinations will not appear, but it is to
be expected that the student will show as basic to her understanding of religious
developments:
1. A broad knowledge of the outlines of the political history involved.
2. A grasp of the principles, procedure and results of historical and literary
criticism.
3. Such a knowledge of the content of the Bible as will make it possible for her
to illustrate concretely her general statements.
60 Courses of Instruction
BOTANY
Professors: Howard Edward Pulling, Ph.D.
Laetitia Morris Snow, Ph.D. (Chairman)
Alice Maria Ottley, Ph.D.
curator of herbarium.
Associate Professors: Mary Campbell Bliss, Ph.D.
Helen Isabel Davis, B.A.
director of botanic gardens.
Assistant Professors: Grace Elizabeth Howard, Ph.D.
assistant curator of herbarium.
Ruth Hutchinson Lindsay, Ph.D.
Theodore Lindsay Steiger, Ph.D.
Instructor: Ernest Hocking Runyon, Ph.D.
Assistant: Jean Louise Williams, B.A.
Laboratory Assistant: Helen Winifred Parker, B.A.
Secretary and Custodian: Marion Frances Finlay, B.A.
Freshmen presenting a satisfactory year course in Botany may apply for per-
mission to enter course 202, 204, 205, or 206.
*101. General Botany.
The chief objectives of this course are: to introduce students to the study
of the principles upon which all life depends; to show them how plants play a part
in the health, pleasure, and profit of man; to acquaint them with the origins and
characteristics of the great groups of plants, which man everywhere uses or con-
tends with; to afford them opportunity to become acquainted with the cultiva-
tion of plants in-doors and out-of-doors; and to help them learn how to obtain
answers to their own questions by individual experimentation.
Open to all undergraduates. Six periods a week, in general two of lecture and
recitation and four of laboratory or greenhouse or field, counting three hours a week
for a year. Miss Ottley, Miss Bliss, Miss Howard,
Miss Lindsay, Mr. Steiger.
202. Plant Biology.
This course deals with the organization of plants and the effects of this organ-
ization on the relations of the individual with its environment. The discussion
of these relations is based on the student's intellectual interests and experience,
augmented by laboratory and greenhouse experiment, to aid her in learning to
correlate knowledge and in securing a broad foundation for further study of bio-
logical principles and applications.
Open to students who have completed course 101 or its equivalent and to juniors
and seniors without prerequisite. Six periods a week, three of lecture and three of
discussion and laboratory, counting three hours a week for a semester; offered in both
semesters. MR- Pulling.
204. Cultivated Plants,
A study of garden plants — their identification and ornamental value, their
culture requirements, methods of propagation, and the means of protecting
them against pests and diseases. Lectures and supplementary reading summa-
rize the scientific principles underlying these subjects; field trips and laboratory
work in the gardens and greenhouses supply evidence of the way in which some
of these principles work out in actual practice. This course is intended to fur-
Botany 6i
nish a background for work in home gardens and also to stimulate an interest
in the educational and social value of gardening.
Open to students who have completed course 101 or have had other preparation
satisfactory to the department. Six periods a week, in general two of lecture and
four of discussion, laboratory, greenhouse or field, counting three hours a week for a
semester; offered in both semesters. Miss Davis.
205. Bacteria in Relation to Daily Life.
A brief survey of the field of microbiology. Emphasis is placed upon the study
of bacteria, molds, and yeasts in the home, with special reference to the preserva-
tion of foods and to general household sanitation. A less detailed study is
made of the larger problems of micro-organisms in relation to agriculture and
certain other industries, and to disease and public health. There will be one
visit to a Board of Health which may require half a day.
Open to students who have completed one year of either Botany, Chemistry or
Zoology. Three periods a week, in general one of lecture and discussion, and two of
laboratory or preparation, counting one hour a week for a year; no outside work is
required. Miss Snow.
206. The Structure of Plants.
In this course a comparative study is made of the structure of ancient and
present day types of vascular plants from the standpoint of evolution. This
study includes the origin and differentiation of the structural elements of the
plant body and micro-chemical tests of the cell-wall membranes of young and of
mature cells. Practice is given in preparing woody tissues for sectioning and in
making permanent microscopical mounts.
Open to students who have completed course 101 or its equivalent, and to juniors
and seniors without prerequisite. Six periods a week, in general two of lecture and
recitation and four of laboratory, counting three hours a week for a semester; offered
in both semesters. Miss Bliss.
302. Comparative Morphology of the Ferns, Gymnosperms, and An-
giosperms. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
This course considers the origin, development, and structure of vascular plants
from the standpoint of evolution. Special attention is given to tracing the steps
in the development of vegetative and reproductive organs, and to a considera-
tion of the homologies of sporogenous, reproductive, and embryological parts.
Students will become acquainted with the technique of plant histology and
embryology by preparing a considerable proportion of the microscopic slides
used in the classroom. The course aims to give that broad grasp of the pro-
gressive development of plant life on the earth essential to the highest efficiency
in teaching botany and to give equipment for independent research in the com-
parative morphology of plants.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed three year-hours of grade II
in Botany. Six periods a week, in general three of lecture and discussion and three of
laboratory, counting three hours a week for the first semester.
62 Courses of Instruction
304. Pathology of the Higher Plants. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
A general course on the diseases of plants. The structure, pathological proc-
esses and effects of representative fungi on plants of either economic or orna-
mental value are studied. A short time is devoted to a study of the methods
used in cultivating fungi. Modern methods of combating plant diseases are
briefly considered from the standpoint of the principles that underlie them.
One or more trips are taken for observation of diseased plants in the field.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed three year-hours of grade II
in Botany. Students who have had course 101 or its equivalent may take this course
and the prerequisite of grade II at the same time. Six periods a week, in general
two of lecture and discussion and four of laboratory and field, counting three hours
a week for the first semester. Miss Howard.
305. Ecology. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
A study of plants in their natural environment. The purpose of the study is
to determine why certain plants are found in meadow, forest, swamp, etc., and
how they are fitted for their special places in nature. Wherever possible the his-
tory of the succession of plants occupying a given area and the probable future
changes in the flora of the area will be determined.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed three year-hours of grade II in
Botany. Students who have had course 101 or its equivalent may take this course
and the prerequisite of grade II at the same time. Six periods a week, two of lecture
and discussion and four of field and laboratory, counting three hours a week for the
second semester. Miss Ottley.
306. Physiology.
First the nature and behavior of living protoplasm, and the fundamental
processes that determine the behavior of organisms are studied in the laboratory.
Then, by laboratory and greenhouse experiments with many kinds of plants, the
student is shown how these principles, which form the foundation of our under-
standing of growth and development, can be applied in further study and in
controlling the behavior of individual plants and groups of plants.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed three year-hours of grade II in
Botany and who have completed or are taking a year of either Chemistry or Physics.
Students who have completed course 101 or its equivalent may take this course and the
prerequisite of grade II at the same time. Six periods a week, two of lecture and
four of discussion and laboratory, counting three hours a week for a year.
Mr. Pulling.
307.f Cytology and Heredity.
Studies in the structure of the cell; the phenomena of cell division; the con-
stitution of the reproductive cells with special reference to the theories of hered-
ity and evolution. The classroom study of the problems of the transmission of
characters from parent to offspring is supplemented by experimental studies,
conducted by the students in the greenhouse, in the inheritance of color and other
characters in Petunia. At the beginning of the year each student is assigned a
t Course 307 will not be offered In 1936-37.
Botany &3
practical problem in plant breeding as a basis for the study of the behavior of
pure lines in hybridization and the origin and transmission of characters.
Open to seniors, and by permission of the department to juniors, who have com-
pleted three year-hours of grade II in Botany. Six periods a week, in general two
of lecture and discussion and four of laboratory or greenhouse, counting three hours
a week for a year. Miss Lindsay.
308. General Bacteriology.
The course is designed to give the student as wide a knowledge as possible of
the whole field of bacteriology. Practice in methods of making media, plating,
making transfers, staining, etc., is given to develop technique essential for the
study of bacteria and their activities. The work is arranged in problems such
as bacteria in relation to (1) their environment, (2) food spoilage and preserva-
tion, (3) our milk supply, (4) soil fertility, (5) sewage disposal, (6) our water
supply, and (7) disease. There will be three or four half day trips to observe
the practical application of the principles considered in class.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed one year of Chemistry and either
one year of Botany or Zoology, or a second year of Chemistry. Six periods a week,
in general two of lecture and discussion and four of laboratory, counting three hours
a week for a year. Miss Snow.
309. Landscape Gardening.
This course continues the study of ornamental plants begun in course 204,
placing special emphasis upon their use in landscape gardening. The funda-
mental principles of design, and the historical development of garden design are
studied to furnish the background for an intelligent appreciation of present-day
landscape architecture as a fine art. The laboratory practice gives training in
developing landscape plans for small estates.
Open to seniors who have completed three year-hours of grade II in Botany, includ-
ing course 204. By special permission course 204 may be taken in conjunction
with course 309. Six periods a week, in general two of lecture and four of discussion
and practice in drafting-room and field, counting three hours a week for the first
semester. Miss Davis.
310. Landscape Design.
This course continues the study of the principles of design with landscape
materials introduced in course 309, and also includes a summary of the funda-
mentals of landscape construction. The problems of city planning are dis-
cussed, from the standpoint of aesthetic and recreational requirements. Trips
are taken as often as possible for observation and study of actual examples of
the art.
Open to students who have completed course 309. Six periods a week, in general
two of lecture and four of discussion and laboratory, counting three hours a week for
the second semester. Miss Davis.
311. World Floras.
This course attempts to give the student familiarity with individual species
as members of the larger plant groups, to enable her to visualize the vegetation
64 Courses of Instruction
of the earth and to understand the conditions that have been operative in pro-
ducing the characteristic floras of today. This course should add interest to
travel and make more evident the influence of climate and plants on human
progress. Before the close of the first semester each student selects, in line with
her major interest, a group or groups of plants for study during the remainder of
the year. For example, she would choose certain group combinations for
Landscape Gardening, others for Pathology, still others for general culture.
Open to students who have taken course 101 or its equivalent, and have completed
or are taking three year-hours of grade II in Botany; by permission of the depart-
ment to seniors who have completed course 101 . Six periods a week, in general
two of lecture and discussion, and four of field, laboratory, or greenhouse study,
counting three hours a week for a year. Miss Ottley, Miss Howard.
320. Theoretical Physiology.
The content of this course in any year depends upon the needs and interests
of the students that elect it. The reading and discussions are concerned with
the abstract and logical aspects of the subject; the methods by which research
problems should be analyzed, the significance of explicit and implicit assump-
tions, the treatment of data, physiology as a field for deductive reasoning, etc.
Open to graduate students only. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Pulling.
322. Botanical Seminars.
The work in the seminars listed below varies from year to year, depending on
the botanical background of each student and on her plan for further study.
A field of botanical science is scrutinized from the standpoints of modern achieve-
ment, method of investigation, and the theories and reasoning involved in reach-
ing the present-day conclusions: (a) Anatomy; (b) Bacteriology; (c) Comparative
Morphology; (d) Cytology; (e) Ecology; (/) Genetics; (g) Geographical Distribu-
tion; (h) History of Botany; (1) Pathology; (;') Physiology; (k) Plant Materials;
(/) Taxonomy.
Open to graduate students only. Three to six hours a week for a semester or a
year. The Teaching Staff.
350. Research or Individual Study.
The study will be under the direction of an instructor in the field chosen and
may combine reading and investigation in the laboratory or may be restricted
to reading. The nature of the work will depend upon whether the student is a
senior or a graduate student, and upon the field of interest.
Open to graduate students and, by permission of the department, to approved
seniors. One to three hours a week for a year or three hours for a semester. The
amount of work contemplated must be indicated at the time of handing in electives.
DIRECTIONS TO STUDENTS
The major is based on course 101 or on two of the following courses: 202,
204, 206.
Course 308 may form a part of a Botany major that includes a year of grade
III other than, or in addition to, courses 309-310 or 350.
Chemistry 65
Courses 309-310 may form a part of a Botany major that includes a year of
grade III other than, or in addition to, course 308.
Course 308 in the Department of Physics or course 306 in the Department of
Geology may form part of a major in Botany.
Students interested in Public Health should include course 308 in their pro-
gram.
Those students who are planning to continue their botanical work after
graduation either along lines of teaching, research, agricultural and experiment
station work, or various kinds of technical laboratory work, landscape gardening,
horticulture, forestry, etc., should consult with the department regarding the
appropriate sequence of courses.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
All members of the staff are glad to discuss methods of review with students
and to suggest which of the references already assigned in the regular class work
would be most valuable for further study in securing a surer grasp of the subject
and a sense of the fundamental unity which underlies the various aspects of the
plant sciences. No summer reading is required.
A sufficient number of questions will be given to provide a choice for every
student, no matter what combination of courses she has made in her major.
Any group of courses accepted as a major in the department is considered
equal to any other group, of the same number of hours, as preparation for the
general examination. Students including courses 308 or 309 and 310 in their
major will find it valuable to have as broad a background as possible in pure
botany.
CHEMISTRY
Professors: Helen Somersby French, Ph.D.
Mary Amerman Griggs, Ph.D. (Chairman)
Ruth Johnstin, Ph.D.
Assistant Professor: Helen Thayer Jones, Ph.D.
Instructor: Dorothy Jane Woodland, Ph.D.
Laboratory Assistants: Kathryn Sue Potter Vilter, B.A.
Margaret Skelton Atwood, B.A.
Catherine Mary Gens, B.A.
Custodian: Emily May Hopkins, B.S.
*101. Elementary Chemistry.
This course is for beginners in chemistry and is planned to give the funda-
mental laws and theories of chemistry, in connection with the study of the non-
metals and a brief survey of the metals. Outside reading and reports thereon
bring the student some knowledge of the applications of chemistry.
Open to students who do not present chemistry for admission. Three periods of
lecture and recitation and one three-period laboratory appointment a week, counting
three hours a week {or a year.
Miss Johnstin, Miss Jones, Miss Atwood
*103. General Chemistry and Qualitative Analysis.
This course is intended for students who have offered chemistry for entrance.
In the first semester the preparatory work in chemistry is used as a basis for
acquiring a wider knowledge of general chemistry and for the study of chemical
66 Courses of Instruction
theories. In the second semester a study of solutions of electrolytes is presented
and special application of the theory to analytical reactions is made both in lec-
ture and laboratory.
Open to students who have completed the admission requirement or its equivalent.
Incoming freshmen may apply to the Dean of Freshmen, and other students to the
chairman of the department, for an examination for exemption from the first semester
of this course and admission to a year's work consisting of courses 201 and 202.
Three periods of lecture and recitation with one three-period laboratory appointment
a week for the first semester, and two periods of lecture with six periods of laboratory
a week for the second semester, counting three hours a week for a year. The second
semester may be taken separately by those who have completed course 101 .
Miss Griggs, Miss Jones, Miss Johnstin, Miss Woodland,
Mrs. Vilter, Miss Gens.
201. Qualitative Analysis.
This course presents in lecture and in laboratory a thorough study of solutions
of electrolytes, with special application to analytical reactions.
Open to students who have completed course 101. Two periods of lecture and six
periods of laboratory a week, counting three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Griggs, Miss Woodland.
202. Quantitative Analysis. First course.
This course deals with some of the elementary methods of gravimetric and vol-
umetric analysis. A study is made of the theory of each method including the
calculations. Laboratory technique is emphasized.
Open to students who have completed course 103 or 201. One period of lecture
and six periods of laboratory a week, counting three hours a week for a semester.
Offered in both semesters. Miss Griggs, Miss Woodland.
207. Quantitative Analysis. Second course.
A continuation of course 202, dealing with more difficult quantitative
methods.
Open to students who have completed course 202. One period of lecture and six
periods of laboratory a week, counting three hours a week for the second semester.
Miss Griggs, Miss Woodland.
301. Organic Chemistry.
A systematic study of both the aliphatic and aromatic series. The laboratory
work introduces the student to the fundamental methods of preparation and
purification of typical organic compounds.
Open to students who have completed course 103 or 201 and, by special permission,
to students who have completed course 101. Three periods of lecture and recitation
and one three-period laboratory appointment a week, counting three hours a week for
a year. Miss French, Miss Gens.
302. f Qualitative Organic Analysis. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
This course presents a systematic treatment of qualitative analysis as applied
to organic compounds. The last few weeks of the semester will include an in-
f Courses 302 and 310 will usually be offered in alternate years.
Chemistry 67
dividual problem for each student, involving organic preparations, and leading
to a final paper.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed courses 202 and 301. Two peri-
ods of lecture and recitation, six to seven periods of laboratory a week, counting three
hours a week for the second semester. Miss French.
303. Advanced Quantitative Analysis.
This course offers an opportunity for the study of some of the following more
advanced methods of quantitative analysis: colorimetric and electrometric de-
termination of hydrogen ion, including acid-base and oxidation-reduction titra-
tions, conductimetric titrations, electrodeposition of metals, and the complete
quantitative analysis of some more complex inorganic substances.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed courses 202 and 301. One
period of lecture and recitation and six periods of laboratory a week, counting three
hours a week for the second semester. Miss Griggs.
304. Chemistry of Food and Nutrition.
A study of the composition of common food materials and their function in
nutrition. Laboratory practice is given in standard methods of analysis of
foods including grain products, carbohydrates, fats and oils, milk and milk
products.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 202 and who have com-
pleted or are taking course 301. General Physiology {Zoology 308) is recommended
as a parallel course. Two periods of lecture and recitation and five periods of labora-
tory a week, counting three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Johnstin.
305. Physical Chemistry.
This course traces historically, summarizes and applies to practical problems,
the laws of matter in its various states of aggregation (including colloidal), and
also the laws governing solutions, chemical equilibrium, and reaction velocity.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 202, have completed or are
taking course 301 , and have completed or are taking a year of college Physics. Three
periods of lecture and discussion and one three-period laboratory appointment a week,
counting three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss French, Miss Woodland.
306. Theoretical Chemistry.
This course discusses the modern theories of matter and energy, including es-
pecially atomic and molecular structure, and theories of valency. It will also
include at least two of the following fields of chemistry: electrochemistry, ther-
mochemistry, and photochemistry.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 305. Three periods of
lecture and discussion a week, with approximately one three-period laboratory ap-
pointment each alternate week, counting three hours a week for the second semester.
Miss French, Miss Woodland.
68 Courses of Instruction
307. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.
A comprehensive survey of the different classes of inorganic substances and
the modern theoretical interpretation of their interactions.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 202 and who have completed
or are taking course 301. Three hours a week for the second semester.
Miss Jones.
308. Advanced Qualitative Analysis. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
A continuation of course 201, dealing with the more difficult problems of quali-
tative analysis. The course includes the systematic detection of acid radicals,
and the complete analysis of unknown substances.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed courses 202 and 301. One
period of lecture and six of laboratory a week, counting three hours a week for the
first semester. Miss Griggs.
309. Physiological Chemistry.
A study of the chemistry of the more important organs and tissues of the body
and of the chemical changes involved in the digestion, assimilation and elimina-
tion of food constituents. The laboratory work includes a study of the methods
of analysis generally employed in hospital practice.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 202 and who have completed
or are taking course 301. General Physiology {Zoology 30S) is recommended as a
parallel course. Two periods of lecture and recitation and five periods of laboratory
a week, counting three hours a week for the second semester. Miss Johnstin.
310.f Quantitative Organic Analysis Including Microanalysis.
This course includes the classical methods of Liebig and of Dumas for the
quantitative determination of carbon, hydrogen, and nitrogen in organic com-
pounds; and also the newer methods of elementary micro combustions.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed courses 202 and 301. Two
periods of lecture and recitation, six to seven periods of laboratory a week, counting
three hours a week for the second semester. Miss French.
320. Seminar.
Newer developments in chemistry will be considered with the historical
background of each. This course usually meets every other week for two hours
during the evening.
Open to graduate students. One hour a week for a year. The Teaching Staff.
350. Research or Individual Study.
Each student electing this work will undertake an individual problem under
the direction of the instructor in the field chosen. The work will include both
laboratory work and reading.
Open to graduate students and, by permission of the department, to undergraduates
who have completed at least nine hours in the department. Three hours a week for
a semester or for a year.
t Courses 302 and 310 will usually be offered in alternate years
Economics and Sociology 69
directions for elections
For any major in Chemistry: Courses 101 and 201, or 103, 202, and 301 are
essential. Any other courses in the department may be added to these to com-
plete the twelve-hour major.
It is advisable that all students majoring in Chemistry should complete one
year of college Physics, and acquire a reading knowledge of French and German
before the senior year.
Students intending to go on to graduate work in Chemistry should complete,
in addition, at least one year of college Mathematics, with some work in Calculus.
Pre-medical students are referred to the requirements as given on page 45.
For Hospital and Public Health work, students are advised to elect courses 101
and 201, or 103, 202, 301, 304 and 309.
Seniors electing Chemistry 304 and 309 may upon the recommendation of this
department obtain special permission from the Zoology Department to take
General Physiology (Zoology 308) without prerequisite.
Students intending to use their Chemistry after graduation from Wellesley
College will be recommended by the department only if they have completed
at least nine hours of Chemistry.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
The aim of the general examination in Chemistry will be to test the student's
knowledge of the fundamental principles and important facts of Chemistry and
her ability to correlate and apply this material.
ECONOMICS AND SOCIOLOGY
Professors: Elizabeth Donnan, BA. (Chairman)
Henry Raymond Mussey, Ph.D.
Leland Hamilton Jenks, Ph.D.
Associate Professor: Lawrence Smith, M.A.
Assistant Professors: Lucy Winsor Killough, Ph.D.
Mary Bosworth Treudley,1 Ph.D.
Instructors: John Winchell Riley, M.A.
Margaret Shaughnessy, Ph.D.
Assistant: Ruth Morley Warfield, M.A
*101. Economic Principles and Problems.
This course seeks to contribute to the understanding of contemporary life
through a study of the economic order on which our present social and political
system is built. It studies the growth of machine technique, corporate organiza-
tion, mass production, and international trade, with the machinery of money and
banking. It analyzes the price system under competition and monopoly. It
considers briefly the causes and results of existing inequalities in the distribu-
tion of wealth, living standards as related to income, trade unions, trusts, unem-
ployment, social legislation, and other proposed methods of economic reform.
One field trip will be required.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors, and to freshmen by permission of the
Dean of Freshmen. This course is prerequisite to later election. Three hours a
week for a year. Miss Donnan, Mr. Mussey, Mr. Smith,
Mrs. Killough, Mr. Rilev, Miss Shaughnessy.
1 Absent on leavet
jo Courses of Instruction
102. Social Organization.
This course is an introduction to the study of society from the cultural stand-
point. It embraces an examination of fundamental factors in social behavior,
and a survey of the main features and trends of contemporary social organiza-
tion.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors. Three hours a week for a semester;
offered in both semesters. This course, since it covers but one semester, may not be
used for distribution without course 101. Mr. Jenks, Mr. Riley.
202. History of Social Institutions.
This course is devoted to the study of structure and change in civilization.
During the first semester attention is given to primitive culture and to the his-
torical development of such representative institutions as law, business enter-
prise, the church, and the family. In the second semester attention will be
centered upon civilizations as wholes, their tendency to rise and decay, upon
problems of culture contact such as are involved in imperialism, upon the nature
and types of revolutions, and the problem of progress.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking courses 101 and
102 or 101 , 204 and 209, and to seniors majoring in History who have completed or
are taking 101 or 102. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Jenks.
204. Economic History of the United States.
A study of our national development in its economic and social aspects, with
special emphasis upon the struggle between agrarian and business interests, the
growth of business combinations, and the development of government control
of business.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors who have completed or are taking course
101. Three hours a week for the second semester. Miss Donnan.
209. Economic History of England.
This course attempts a comparison of economic and social life in England be-
fore and after the Industrial Revolution. Such topics as the manifestations of
capitalism in the seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries, the effect of capi-
talism on the work of women, the struggle between landed interests and rising
manufacturers over factory acts and corn laws, the vicissitudes of poor law
legislation, and the increase in the concern of the government for the welfare of
the individual are considered.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors who have completed or are taking course
101. Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Donnan.
210. Financial Organization of Society.
This course deals with money, credit, general price levels, and business cycles.
It first emphasizes monetary standards and current monetary changes and prob-
lems. The work of commercial banks and the functioning of the Federal Reserve
system are studied. Business cycles are dealt with historically and theoretically,
and current recovery programs are analyzed. Investment credit is considered
with respect to investment banks, corporation securities, and stock exchanges.
Open to students who have completed course 101. Three hours a week for a year.
Mr. Smith.
Economics and Sociology 71
301. Theories of Social Reconstruction.
A study of the theories of socialism, communism, and fascism, and of the ideas
underlying present proposals for a reorganized capitalism in the United States.
The various theories are analyzed critically, and their relations to contemporary
labor movements and social policies are examined.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 30S or 316. Three hours a
week for the second semester. Mr. Mussey.
303. Social Welfare.
A study of the historical development of philanthropy and of present problems
and practices in the field of social work.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking any course of grade
II in the department. Three hours a week for the second semester. Mr. Riley.
304. The Prevention of Poverty.
A study of standards of living and their maintenance through the development
of social insurance, social services and minimum wage legislation, and of changes
in the theory and practice of public relief.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking any course of grade
II in the department. Three hours a week for the first semester. Mr. Riley.
305. Public Regulation of Business.
The problems of regulation, especially in relation to capitalization and price
control, that have arisen out of the development of railroads, public utilities, and
industrial trusts in the United States; the principles and practice of regulation of
such industries; the newer demand for regulation by the wide application of
public "economic planning."
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking any course of grade
II in the department. Three hours a week for the second semester. Mr. Mussey.
308. The Modern Labor Problem.
A study of the past and present relations of workers to property owners and the
state, with special reference to British and American conditions. Trade union-
ism and other working-class movements are studied. The legal position of labor
is examined in view of the labor policies of employers and the state. The present
struggle for power over labor in American industries is surveyed.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking any course of grade
II in the department. Three hours a week for the first semester. Mr. Mussey.
310. Public Finance.
A study of the principles and the practical problems of public expenditure,
borrowing, and taxation, considering especially their relations to industry and
the way people live. Expenditures: their dependence on war and the modern
increase of government functions; their effects on the life of the citizens. Public
debts: origin; effects on production, trade, finance, and international relations.
72 Courses of Instruction
Taxation: theory and incidence; the chief taxes laid by cities, states, and the fed-
eral government.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking any course of grade
II in the department. Three hours a week for the first semester. Mrs. Killough.
311. Social and Economic Investigation.
A study of statistical methods as used in economics and sociology. The tech-
nique of a statistical investigation is examined in detail with emphasis on methods
of classification and presentation. Frequency distributions and simple correla-
tion are studied and applied.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking a full course of
grade II in the department. Three periods of lecture and recitation and three hours
of laboratory a week, counting three hours a week for the first semester.
Mrs. Killough.
312. Social and Economic Investigation.
The study of economic and social statistics with emphasis on the analysis of
time series. Some time is spent on probability theory and multiple and partial
correlation. Consideration is given to the place of the quantitative method in
the social sciences.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 311. Three periods of
lecture and recitation and three hours of laboratory a week, counting three hours a
week for the second semester. Mrs. Killough.
313. Seminar. Selected Topics in Economic and Social Movements and
Theories.
Open to graduates and approved seniors who are taking a major in the department.
Three hours a week for the second semester. Miss Donnan.
314. International Trade and Investment.
A study in modern political economy, examining the economic position of the
United States in relation to other countries. It deals with theories of interna-
tional trade and capital movements; national resources and trade; government
control over commerce, especially tariffs and raw material control. Various
aspects of economic nationalism are considered.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking course 210. Three
hours a week for the second semester. Mrs. Killough.
316. History of Social Thought.
This course deals with outstanding trends of thought from the Greeks to mod-
ern times, as reflected in the writings of such social and political philosophers as
Plato, Aristotle, Augustine, Machiavelli, Locke, and Rousseau.
Open to seniors who have completed or are taking courses 101, and 202 or 209-204,
in the department, or Political Science 104 and any other course of grade II in His-
tory or Political Science. Three hours a week for the first semester. Mr. Jenks.
317. History of Economic Thought.
A study of the development of economic thought with special emphasis on the
relation between economic conditions and economic thinking in the nineteenth
Economics and Sociology 73
century. After a brief review of Greek, Roman, and mediaeval thought and
some attention to the doctrines of the mercantilists and the physiocrats, the work
of Adam Smith, Ricardo, Malthus, J. S. Mill, and the Austrians, is exam-
ined with more detail, and some consideration is given to the writings of nine-
teenth-century American economists.
Open to seniors who have completed a full course of grade II in the department.
Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Donnan.
318. Modern Economic Thought. (Not given in 1935-36.)
A study of recent economic doctrine with special emphasis on those aspects
which diverge from nineteenth-century theory, and some attention to the rela-
tion of economic science to other social sciences.
Open to seniors who have completed course 317. Three hours a week for the second
semester. Miss Donnan.
319. Modern Social Thought.
A study of the principal trends of social and political thought manifested since
the revolutionary period, especially in Great Britain and the United States.
Open to seniors who have completed or are taking courses 101, and 202 or 209-204,
in the department, or Political Science 104 and any other course of grade II in His-
tory or Political Science. Three hours a week for the second semester. Mr. Jenks.
320. Population Problems. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
A study of population theories beginning with Malthus, and of practical prob-
lems arising out of the increase, the distribution, and the movement of population.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking any course of grade
II in tlie department. Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Treudley.
350. Research or Individual Study.
To a limited number of advanced students wishing to do individual work out-
side of regular courses the department is prepared to offer a course of directed
reading, to be tested by examination.
Students desiring to register for such a course must secure the approval of the
chairman of the department in advance of the time at which elective s are due. Three
hours a week for the first semester.
For the course in Group Leadership, of special value to students interested in
the practical application of economic and social study, see page 106.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
The aim of the general examination set by the Department of Economics and
Sociology will be to present for analysis new problems, calling for an application
of the principles and the body of factual material acquired by the student in
those courses which have constituted her major in the department. In the same
way that the examination at the end of each course attempts to test the student's
power to reorganize and to correlate the material of the course and to bring
it to bear upon a new situation, so the general examination will attempt to test
that power with the larger body of material at the student's command as a result
of all her work in the department.
74 Courses of Instruction
EDUCATION
Professor: Arthur Orlo Norton, M.A. (Chairman)
Associate Professors: Dorothy Warner Dennis, B.A., Dipl.E.U.
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF FRENCH
Muriel Streibert Curtis, B.A., B.D.
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR OF BIBLICAL HISTORY
Fishing Professor: Guy Mitchell Wilson, Ph.D.
Lecturers: Abigail Adams Eliot, B.A., Ed.D.
Eugene Randolph Smith, M.A., Ped.D.
John Robert Putnam French, M.A.
Charles Swain Thomas, M.A., Litt.D.
Mary Chaplin Shute
Rachel Louise Hardwick, M.D.
Instructor: Alice Burt Nichols, B.A., Ed.M.
Assistants: Grace Allerton Andrews, M.A.
Frances Dunbar Nichols, M.A.
Elizabeth Koontz Sanford,
B.A., B.S. in Ed.
ANNE L. PAGE MEMORIAL
(Kindergarten and First Grade.)
Director: Matilda Remy, B.S. in Ed.
Kinder gartners: Anna Alden Kingman, B.A., Ed.M.
Jane Talmadge Loomis, B.A.
Nancy Anne Jacobs, B.A.
First Grade: Helen Cooley
WELLESLEY NURSERY SCHOOL
Director: Lorna Lougee, B.A.
The Department of Education offers both undergraduate and graduate courses. Nine
hours of work may be counted toward the B.A. degree. Full work for the M.A. degree is
offered.
201. Modern Education: A Study of the Principles of Education, and of
the Applications of Psychology to Education.
(See note IV, page 77.) This course is organized to meet the needs not only of
prospective teachers but also of all who are interested in the intelligent direction
of education in the home and in the community. The work of the course is illus-
trated throughout the year by visits to assigned schools for the observation of
children and of classroom practice, and by examples of school work. A time
allowance is made for the inspection of schools. The number of visits will not
exceed eight for the year.
Open to juniors and to seniors who have completed or who are taking Psychology
101. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Norton, Mrs. A. B. Nichols.
202. History of Education: Western Europe.
Like course 203 this course is intended not only for prospective teachers, but
also for all students who are interested in the intelligent discussion of educational
affairs. The greater part of the semester is devoted to a study of personalities,
problems, and policies in the development of public education in England,
France, and Germany in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. The course
will begin with a brief survey of the historic foundations of modern education in
Greek, Roman, and early Christian culture and in the rise of universities, the
Education 75
revival of classical learning and the Reformation. The lectures are illustrated
by manuscripts, lantern slides, and translations from the documents.
Open to juniors and seniors, Graduates may elect this course under certain con-
ditions. Three hours a week for the first semester. Mr. Norton.
203. History of Education: The United States.
This course may be taken as an independent unit, or it may follow course 202.
The topics include a study of European influences in American education; the
colonial beginnings of education in Virginia, Pennsylvania, New York, and New
England; national and state policies concerning education, 1776-1860; educa-
tional leaders: Thomas Jefferson, Emma Willard, Mary Lyon, Horace Mann,
Henry Barnard and others; the expansion and reorganizations of public and
private education since the Civil War; educational problems of today. The
course is illustrated throughout by a wealth of original documents.
Open to juniors and seniors. Graduates may elect this course under certain con-
ditions. Three hours a week for the second semester. Mr. Norton.
204. Principles and Problems of Religious Education.
This course is intended to give some aid in the intelligent guidance of the
child's developing religion and some acquaintance with recent attempts to im-
prove the quality of instruction in the church school. Courses in Psychology
and Education are recommended as preparatory or accompanying courses.
Open to students who have completed the required work in Biblical History. One
hour a week for a year. Mrs. Curtis.
301. Secondary Education.
The principles and methods of secondary education, with special reference to
the high schools and junior high schools of the United States. A study will be
made of approved methods of teaching English, foreign languages, sciences,
mathematics, and history in high schools. Opportunity will be given for obser-
vation of the work of specially successful high school teachers in the subject
which the student expects to teach. In connection with this course a semester of
practice teaching is arranged for graduate students. Practice in teaching is not
open to undergraduates.
Open by permission to seniors who have completed a full course in Education, and
to graduates. Three hours a week for a year. Students who take course 302 or 303
are permitted to count the first semester of course 301 as a semester course.
Mr. Norton, Mr. Thomas, Mrs. A. B. Nichols, and Lecturers.
303. Principles and Methods of Teaching French in Secondary Schools.
The aim of this course is to teach the students how to impart to their pupils, in
the shortest possible time, a speaking, understanding, reading, and writing
knowledge of French. The instructor will deal with the several aspects of
modern language work, such as the teaching of vocabulary, of grammar, of
composition and of translation; the selection and use of books, the equipment of
the teacher and of her department in the high school.
Open to seniors who have completed Education 201 and who are taking course
301, 302, 305, 306 or 307 in the Department of French. Students who elect this
y6 Courses of Instruction
course may also elect the first semester of Education 301 as a semester course. This
course may be counted toward a major in French. Three hours a week for the second
semester. Miss Dennis.
320. Educational Tests, Measurements and Statistics.
The standardized tests now available for college preparatory and other second-
ary school studies will be examined in detail in this course. The uses, advan-
tages, misuses and disadvantages of such tests will be considered. Students will
be given practice in constructing tests, in the technique of testing, and in the
arithmetical interpretation of results.
Open to seniors who have completed one full course in Education. Three hours a
week for the first semester. Mr. Wilson.
321. Problems in the Application of Psychology to Education.
The subject-matter of this course will vary from year to year in accordance
with the equipment and needs of students. The methods of educational investi-
gation and experimentation will be considered, and each student will be given an
opportunity for intensive work in a problem in her field of interest.
Open by permission to seniors who have completed a full course in Education and
who have an adequate equipment in Psychology, and to graduates who have com-
pleted two full courses in Education and who hate an adequate equipment in Psy-
chology. Three hours a week for the second semester. Mr. Wilson.
322.J The Education of Young Children: History, Theory, Problems.
This course deals with nursery, kindergarten, and primary education. The
topics include (1) a review of the origins and historical development of education
for children under nine years of age; (2) a detailed critical study of current
theories of the nursery school, the kindergarten, and the primary school; (3) the
child in relation to the home, the community, and the school; (4) current prob-
lems in child study.
Open to seniors who have completed Psychology 101, or an equivalent, and one full
course in Education. Open also to graduates {see course 323). Three hours a week
for a year. Miss Eliot, Miss Shute, Dr. Hardwick.
323.J The Education of Young Children: Materials and Methods.
The practical application of the theory given in course 322. This course in-
cludes on the one hand a detailed study of the methods and materials of educa-
tion for children under nine; and on the other extensive observation with practice
in teaching. Observation and practice are given in the Wellesley Nursery School
and the Anne L. Page Memorial, both situated on the Wellesley College campus.
The schools of Boston and vicinity furnish a rich field for further study. A de-
tailed study of the curriculum, activities, materials, and equipment is a part of
the course.
Open to graduates only. This course presupposes or is to be taken with course 322.
{Graduates must ordinarily take courses 322 and 323 togetlier.) Three hours a
week for a year.
% See notice on page 78.
Education 77
324. Elementary Education: History, Theory, Practice, and Problems.
(Not offered in 1935-36.)
This course includes a detailed study of present elementary school practice, a
critical discussion of the principles which underlie that practice, and the investi-
gation of selected problems in elementary education.
Open to graduates who have completed Psychology 101 , or an equivalent, and two
full courses in Education. Three hours a week for a year.
325. History of Education. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
This course covers the same periods in the history of education as course 202,
but with additional reading, critical examination of the materials, and a detailed
study of one or more topics from the sources. It is intended for graduate stu-
dents who have had no general course in the history of education.
Open to graduates only. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Norton.
Attention is called to the course in Group Leadership, page 106, of especial
value to students taking Education. It is not counted as a course in Education.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
I. Students who intend to teach should (in their sophomore year if possible)
consult a member of the Department of Education concerning city and state re-
quirements for the certificate to teach. In a majority of states these require-
ments include from six to seven and one-half hours in Education; a few states
require nine hours in this subject. Plans should be made in the sophomore year
for completion of the necessary courses in Education, which must be taken in the
junior and senior years.
II. In general, the department recommends the following arrangements: (1)
For a six-hour elective in Education choose three hours in the junior, and three
hours in the senior year. (2) For a seven and one-half hour elective, add to the
above one and one-half hours in any semester of the junior and senior years.
(3) For a nine-hour elective choose six hours in one year and three in the other, or
four and one-half hours in each year.
III. (1) Prospective high school teachers should choose from the following
courses: 201, 202, 301, 303 (for teachers of French only), 320, 321.
(2) Prospective kindergartners or directors of nursery schools should include
course 322 in place of course 301 or 303.
(3) Students who are interested in religious education should include course
204 in their list.
IV. Students who have completed the prerequisite in Psychology (course
101), and who have completed Education 201, shall be entitled to credit for
Education 201 on application blanks for state teachers' certificates, as follows:
3 semester hours in Principles of Education (or Principles of Teaching or
Introduction to Education).
3 semester hours in Educational Psychology.
78 Courses of Instruction
the theory and practice of pre-school (kindergarten,
nursery school) education
A five-year course, leading to the degrees of B.A. and M.A., may be planned
by students who intend to specialize during the fifth year in the field of pre-school
(kindergarten, nursery school) education.
The Department of Education offers exceptional facilities for this study. The
Anne L. Page Memorial and the Wellesley Nursery School on the college campus
and the Ruggles Street Nursery School in Boston give abundant opportunity for
observation and practice in the nursery school, the kindergarten, and the first
grade. Three lecturers of the department (Miss Eliot, Miss Shute, and Dr.
Hardwick) provide the necessary instruction in connection therewith. Various
clinics and special classes for children in Boston and vicinity are also open to
student observers. Related courses in other departments of the college may be
chosen to form, with the courses in Education, a unified program of study.
The following suggestions are not intended to debar juniors and seniors who
completed the prerequisites announced for the various courses in Education from
entering upon graduate study in this field. Such students should consult the
chairman of the department as to the best arrangement of their remaining under-
graduate work.
Freshmen and sophomores, however, who look forward to service in the field
of pre-school education may profitably include the following courses in their
undergraduate years:
1. Sophomore Year: Complete course 101 in Psychology.
2. Junior Year: Elect Education 201 or 202 and Psychology 207 (or 101, if not
taken in the sophomore year).
3. Senior Year: Elect Education 322 and Psychology 310 (or 207, if not taken
in the junior year).
4. Elective courses in the Sciences, Literature, Art, and Music, and any major
subject, are useful as a preparation for graduate study of the theory and practice
of pre-school education.
5. The studies of the graduate year will be adapted to the needs of each stu-
dent. In general, they will include Education 323 (and 322, if this course is not
taken in the senior year) and such other courses or independent work as the cir-
cumstances require.
The general requirements for the M.A. degree are stated in the Graduate Cir-
cular. This should be consulted in all cases. It may be obtained from the
Secretary to the Dean.
English 79
ENGLISH
I. ENGLISH I.ANGUAGE AND LITERATURE
Professors: Martha Hale Shackford, Ph.D.
Laura Hibbard Loomir, Ph.D.
Elizabeth Wheeler Manwaring,' Ph.D.
Helen Sard Huches, Ph.D. (Chairman)
Annie Kimball Tuell, Ph.D.
Associate Professors: Alice Ida Perry Wood, Ph.D.
Katharine Canby Balderston, Ph.D.
Bertha Monica Stearns, M.A.
Assistant Professors: Ella Keats Whiting, Ph.D.
Grace Ethel Hawk, B.Litt. Oxon.
T. H. Vail Motter, Ph.D.
Assistant: Evelyn Kendrick Wells, M.A.
*101. English Literature of the Renaissance — An Introduction.
This course presents through selected types the literature of the English Ren-
aissance as it reflects the thought, the adventure, the creative impulse of the
period, from More's Utopia through the Age of Shakespeare. It considers the
representative forms of Renaissance poetry; the sonnet, the short lyric, through
Jonson and Campion, the romantic epic in Spenser's Faerie Queene. It studies
representative types of Elizabethan and Jacobean drama, in the plays of Shake-
speare and his contemporaries. It studies the prose of the period in the work of
Lyly, Sidney, and Bacon.
Open to freshmen, sophomores, and juniors. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Tuell, Miss Balderston, Miss Stearns, Miss Whiting,
Miss Hawk.
201. Historical Development of English Literature.
In order to avoid the rapid reading in a general survey, the course in different
years concentrates on particular phases of English literature, considered histori-
cally in relation to contemporary English life and thought. In general, the first
semester deals with literature in the Middle Ages and the Renaissance; the second
semester, with literature of the seventeenth, eighteenth, and nineteenth centu-
ries. This course counts for hours toward the degree, but not for admission to a
course of grade III. Examination both semesters.
Open to juniors and seniors. No prerequisites. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Hughes.
202. American Literature.
The course presents a comprehensive account of American literature from its
beginnings in the seventeenth century to modern times. It stresses the work of
representative writers and the changing conditions of American social life.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors. No prerequisites. Three hours a
week for a year. Miss Stearns.
203. Seventeenth Century Poetry and Prose Exclusive of Milton.
This course emphasizes the stress and conflict of an age of transition. It
considers primarily the innovations of Donne and Jonson in poetry and those of
3 Absent on leave for the second semester.
80 Courses of Instruction
Bacon, Browne, Burton, Walton, and Hobbes in prose. Some time is given also
to reading the Cavalier and religious poets.
Open to sophomores who have taken course 101 in the department, and to juniors
and seniors without prerequisites. Three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Hawk.
204. Milton.
The primary object of the course is the critical study of Milton as a master in
lyric, epic, and dramatic poetry, and as a writer of notable prose. The character
and genius of the poet are considered as influenced by the political and religious
conflict of the time.
Open to sophomores who have taken course 101 in the department, and to juniors
and seniors without prerequisites. Three hours a week for the second semester.
Miss Hawk.
206. The English Novel: The Rise of the Types.
The course deals with selected stages in the growth of the English novel, from
the Elizabethans to Scott, placing special emphasis upon the eighteenth century
in the work of Richardson, Fielding, Smollett, Sterne. It follows mainly the
trend of realism, but considers types of romance: the pastoral, the picaresque,
and forms associated with the Romantic Movement, — the tale of terror, the his-
torical novel, the novel of social reform. Class discussions, lectures, tests.
Final paper for students intending to do major work in the department; for
others, final paper or examination.
Open to sophomores who have taken course 101 in the department, and to juniors
and seniors without prerequisites. Three hours a week for a semester; offered in
both semesters. Students electing this course should state on the slip the semester
chosen. Miss Tuell.
207. Arthurian Romance.
The course begins with an introductory study of those legends in ancient
Celtic literature which definitely influenced later Arthurian story. It traces the
historical development of Arthurian tradition through the mediaeval chronicles,
the French and the English verse romances, but centers in the study of the
sources and significance of Malory's Morte d' Arthur. As time permits, modern
forms of Arthurian romance are discussed.
Open to sophomores who have taken course 101 in the department, and to juniors
and seniors without prerequisites. Three hours a week for the second semester.
Mrs. Loomis.
208. Chaucer.
This course traces the development of Chaucer's art. His poetry is studied
in relation to its sources, and to the social and literary background of his time.
The major portion of his work is read.
Open to sophomores who have taken course 101 in the department, and to juniors
and seniors without prerequisites. Three hours a week for the first semester.
Mrs. Loomis.
English 8i
209. Versification.
The course has as its object in general such study of the principles of English
versification as may give to the student of literature a keener appreciation of
poetic expression; and, in particular, for those interested in writing verse, op-
portunity for experiment and criticism.
Open to students, except freshmen, who have completed or are taking one full course
in the department of English Literature, and also to those majoring in English Com-
position. One hour a week for a year. Mr. Motter.
210. Modern Poetry.
For the year 1935-36 this course will present some fifteen important long
poems, English and American, from Hardy's Dynasts to Bridges' Testament of
Beauty and Ezra Pound's Cantos. It may not be counted toward a major in this
department.
Open to juniors and seniors without prerequisites. One hour a week for a year.
Mr. Motter.
211. The History of the English Drama.
This course studies English drama from its beginnings to the close of the
Victorian period. The first semester, covering the period from the Middle Age
to the Puritan Revolution, will concentrate upon the great Elizabethans; Shake-
speare, represented by two plays, will not overshadow the attention given to his
principal contemporaries. The second semester begins with the development of
Restoration drama and continues through the establishment of the modern
theatre.
Open to sophomores who have taken course 101 in the department, and to juniors
and seniors without prerequisite. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Motter.
301. Social Ideals in English Letters. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Study of selected masterpieces from the social point of view. Rapid reading
of Piers Plowman, More's Utopia, Swift's Gulliver's Travels; more careful work
with Burke and the Revolutionary poets, and with the prose and poetry of the
Victorian Age.
Open to seniors who have completed two full courses in English Literature or
Economics or History, or who have completed one full course in any of these depart-
ments and are taking another course. Three hours a week for a year.
303. Contemporary Drama. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
The modern English drama is considered in relation to parallel European
drama. This course may not be counted toward a major in English Literature.
Open to students who have completed two full courses above grade I in the depart-
ment. Two hours a week for a year.
306. Victorian Prose, 1830-1900.
The course makes a fairly even division of time between novel and essay.
Stress is laid upon Dickens, Carlyle, Thackeray, Newman, George Eliot, Ruskin,
Arnold, Meredith, Pater, with some attention to Morris, Hardy, James. The
course is concerned too with minor groups and figures, as it traces the main
82 Courses of Instruction
tendencies of fiction, and, with reference to present issues, successive problems
of modern thought. Class discussion and lectures. Written reviews and at
least one term paper. First semester, examination; second semester, final paper
or examination.
Open to juniors and seniors who have either (/) completed a course of grade I, and
have completed or are taking three hours of work of grade II in the department*
or (2) completed three hours of grade II in the department* Three hours a week for
a year. Miss Tuell.
307. English Poetry of the Nineteenth Century.
The course considers the work of the great Georgian and Victorian poets in
their relation to one another and to contemporary thought. Extended study is
given to Wordsworth and Coleridge; Shelley and Keats; Tennyson and Brown-
ing; with briefer readings from Byron, Scott, Landor, Clough, Arnold, Rossetti,
Morris, Swinburne, and Meredith. Written reviews. Occasional brief papers.
First semester, examination; second semester, test to be decided later.
Open to juniors and seniors who have either (I) completed a course of grade I and
have completed or are taking three hours of work of grade II in the department* or
(2) completed three hours of grade II in the department* Three hours a week for a
year. Miss Shackford.
309. Shakespeare.
This course traces the development of Shakespeare as a dramatist and poet.
About thirty plays are read in all, chronologically, according to types. The
plays before 1600 are read in the first semester, the plays after 1600 in the second.
Sufficient study of Shakespeare's predecessors and contemporaries is made to
enable the student to distinguish the traditional and imitative aspects of Shake-
speare's plays. The course also considers Shakespeare's life, the theater of his
day, representative source problems, and the development of Shakespearean
criticism. The-course requires frequent short papers during the term, and a final
examination in each semester.
Open to juniors and seniors who have either (I) completed a course of grade /, and
have completed or are taking three hours of work of grade II in the department*
or {2) completed three hours of grade II in the department* Three hours a week
for a year. Miss Balderston.
310. Eighteenth Century Literature.
This course considers the major writers of the eighteenth century, with the
exception of the novelists. In the first semester, the emphasis is upon the Queen
Anne group, — Pope, Swift, Addison, and Steele; in the second semester, upon
Doctor Johnson and his circle and the precursors of the Romantic Movement.
The course traces the influence upon literature of politics, of current ideas con-
cerning man and society, and changing standards of criticism. Examination
both semesters.
Open to juniors and seniors who have either (I) completed a course of grade I, and
♦Courses 201, 202, and 210, not in the English Literature major, do not serve as prerequisites
for grade III.
English 83
have completed or are taking three hours of work of grade II in the department* or
(2) completed three hours of grade II in the department.* Three hours a week for a
year Miss Hughes.
311. Seventeenth Century Exclusive of Milton. (Not offered in 1935-
36.)
This course will be devoted to a somewhat intensive study of certain phases
of the century.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 101, and have completed
or are taking a full year course or two semester courses of grade II. Three hours a
week for a year.
312. History of the English Language. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
The course traces the development of the English language from its beginning
to the present day, treating phonology, and changes in grammar, and vocabulary.
Consideration is given to problems of modern usage. Selected works of English
authors which illustrate the various stages in the development of the language
are studied.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking a full year course or
two semester courses of grade II either in English Composition or in English Litera-
ture. In some cases other students whose preliminary training has been done in a
language other than English may be admitted by special permission. Three hours a
week for a year.
320. Seminar. Studies in Eighteenth Century Literature. (Not given
in 1935-36.)
For 1935-36 the subject will be: criticism of social manners and literary taste
in the prose and verse satire and in the novel of the period with particular refer-
ence to the writings of Swift, Pope, and Fielding. Incidental study of the world
of men and letters which influenced these writers will be included. The work will
be carried on by means of assigned reading, class discussion of individual reports,
and conferences on individual investigations.
Open to seniors who have completed six hours of work in the department, and to
graduate students. Three hours a week for a year.
321. Seminar. Modern Authors. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Two or more authors are chosen each year for special study. The work is
carried on by class reading and discussion, and by assigned readings upon which
individual reports are made.
Open to graduates, and to approved seniors who are taking a twelve-hour major in
the department. Three hours a week for a year.
322. Seminar. English Romanticism. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
A study of the Romantic Movement in England, from its beginnings in the
eighteenth century, on through the work of the early nineteenth century poets.
Certain phases of the relation of English to German literature during the period
of reaction are studied.
Open to graduates, and to approved seniors who are taking a twelve-hour major in
the department. Three hours a week for a year.
•Courses 201, 202, and 210, not in the English Literature major, do not serve as prerequisites
or grade III.
84 Courses of Instruction
323. Seminar. Critical Studies in English Drama. (Not offered in
1935-36.)
In 1934-35 the general subject was the English drama of the Renaissance,
with special study of the work of Lyly, Marlowe, Shakespeare, and Jonson. The
course attempts to give training in methods of research, touching problems relat-
ing to: the theory of tragedy, comedy, the theatre, publication, textual criticism,
but the primary object is the study of Shakespeare's most important work in
the light of contemporary drama. Special topics, discussions, conferences.
Open to seniors who have completed six hours of work in the department, and to
graduate students. Three hours a week for a year.
324. Seminar. Critical Studies in American Literature. (Not given in
1935-36.)
This course considers the literary achievement in America from 1825 to 1865.
It deals primarily with the work of Poe, Emerson, Thoreau, Hawthorne, Mel-
ville, and Whitman.
Open to seniors who have completed six hours of work in the department, and to
graduate students. Three hours a week for a year.
325. Seminar. Beginnings of the English Renaissance from Caxton
to Shakespeare. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
The course aims to give graduate training, and so to present the beginnings of
the English Renaissance that the student may rightly estimate the achievements
of the great Elizabethans.
Open to graduates, and to approved seniors. Three hours a week for a year.
326. Seminar. Mediaeval English Literature.
The first semester will be devoted to a specialized study of English ballads and
the English mediaeval drama; the second semester to a historical review of the
literature produced in England from 1200-1500. Paper the first semester, ex-
amination the second. Methods those of graduate study.
Open to graduates, and to approved seniors who are taking a twelve-hour major in
the department. Three hours a week for a year. Mrs. Loomis.
327. Seminar in Old English. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
A study of Old English inflections, phonology, and syntax. The reading of
the best pieces of literature in Old English prose and poetry. A particular prob-
lem in either literature or language is assigned to each student for investigation.
Open to graduates, and to seniors by permission of the department. Three hours a
week for a year.
328. Bibliography.
This course aims to acquaint the graduate student with the chief information
and procedure requisite for the discovery and use of her material: examination of
original texts, study of editions, use of general works of reference, technical
periodicals, and special studies in different fields of English literature.
Not open to undergraduates. Required of graduate students in the department.
One hour a week for the first semester. Miss Manwaring.
English 85
350. Research or Individual Study.
On consultation with the department, qualified seniors or graduate students
may arrange for directed study in a field in which they have already worked.
Permission to register for this must be obtained before electives are handed in.
One to three hours a week for a year. The amount of work contemplated must be in-
dicated at the time of handing in the electives.
For courses in Greek Literature in English translations see Department of
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
To insure a desirable distribution of work over several periods of literary
history, students in planning majors in the department should make sure that
one of their grade III courses studies the literature of a period not previously
treated in courses of grade I and grade II.
Courses Not Included in the Major. Courses 201, 202, 210.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
The English Literature department will present for the general examination
two sets of questions, i.e. morning and afternoon, covering the courses offered by
the department. In this list of questions there will be a sufficient number to
insure a fair opportunity for choice. Each student will select the questions
dealing with the subjects she has studied in her major.
The questions will seek to test: (1) the student's knowledge of authors, works,
types, and periods included in her major; (2) her intelligence and accuracy in
correlating her knowledge; (3) her independence of judgment and her literary
discrimination.
Members of the department will meet the seniors majoring in the department
in a group once or twice during the first semester of each year to discuss the pur-
pose of the general examination, and the best methods of study to prepare for it.
II. ENGLISH COMPOSITION
Professors: Sophie Chantal Hart, M.A.
Agnes Frances Perkins, M.A., M.S. (Chairman)
Elizabeth Wheeler Manwaring,* Ph.D.
Alfred Dwight Sheffield, M.A.
Associate Professors: Josephine Harding Batch f.lder, M.A.
Edith Christina Johnson, Ph.D.
Assistant Professor: Edith Hamilton, M.A.
Lecturer: Emma Marshall Denkinger, Ph.D.
Instructors: Louise MacDonald Chapman, M.A.
Enid Constance Straw, M.A.
Mary Eleanor Prentiss, M.A.
Assistant: Frances Eldredge, M.A.
*101.f Required Freshman Composition.
First semester: exposition. Emphasis on structure and on use of source ma-
terials. Weekly themes or their equivalent. Second semester: critical and
1 Absent on leave for the second semester.
f If a student submits papers notably deficient in English as part of her work in any department,
she may incur a condition in English Composition, whether or not the has completed the require-
ment in English Composition
86 Courses of Instruction
interpretative writing; description; simple narration. Fortnightly themes or
their equivalent.
Required of freshmen. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Perkins, Miss Manwaring, Mr. Sheffield, Miss Batchelder,
Miss Hamilton, Miss Denkinger, Mrs. Chapman, Miss Straw,
Miss Prentiss.
102. Continuation Course in Composition.
Practice in the organization and presentation of ideas developed from the
student's reactions to planned reading. Special stress on vocabulary, and on
paragraph and sentence, in relation to thinking.
Required of students who have made D grade in the second semester of course 101.
(In case the number of students incurring this requirement falls below the minimum
for a class, the work will be individually conducted on a tutorial plan.) Three
hours a week for the first semester. Mr. Sheffield.
201. The Essay.
This course traces the development of the technique of the English essay
through the letter, the character, and other literary forms; and studies the meth-
ods of such essayists as Lamb, Hazlitt, Stevenson, and Chesterton. The course
offers varied reading in contemporary essays and frequent practice in writing
different types of essays, with class discussion of principles and craftsmanship.
Open to students who have completed the requirement in English Composition.
Not open to students who have completed three semesters of grade II work or are
taking course 203, 206, 301, or 304. Three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Johnson.
203. Studies in Journalistic Writing.
A critical study of selected types of journalistic writing: news story, editorial,
special article, book review, dramatic review, as exemplified in typical American
and English newspapers and weekly periodicals. Weekly or fortnightly assign-
ments.
Open to students who have completed the requirement in English Composition.
Not open to students who have completed three semesters of grade II work or are
taking course 201, 206, 301, or 304. Three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Perkins, Miss Batchelder.
204. Studies in Contemporary Writing.
This course is a continuation of course 203, 206, or 201, or may be taken sepa-
rately. A study of the elements of style, the essay form, the critical review, the
biography, and the sketch. Fortnightly themes or their equivalent.
Open to students who have completed the requirement in English Composition.
Not open to students who have completed three semesters of grade II work or are taking
course 205, 207, 208, 302, or 304. Three hours a week for the second semester.
Miss Perkins, Miss Batchelder.
205. Further Studies in Journalistic Writing.
This course is primarily a continuation of course 203 or may be elected sepa-
rately. A study of articles in various American and English monthly magazines,
English 87
with special reference to the suggested use of the student's own resources.
Monthly or fortnightly articles, and collateral reading.
Open to students who have completed the requirement in English Composition.
Not open to students who have completed three semesters of grade II work or are
taking course 204, 207, 20S, 302, or 304. Three hours a week for the second semester.
Miss Perkins.
206. Free Writing.
Practical and creative forms of prose composition with illustrative reading.
The types of writing are selected in accordance with the interests of individual
members of the class. Discussion of papers in class and in conference.
Open to students who have completed the requirement in English Composition.
Not open to students who have completed three semesters of grade II work or are taking
course 201, 203, 301, or 304. Three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Hamilton.
207. Free Writing (continued).
Emphasis laid upon contemporary material in the types of writing studied and
practiced. Discussion of papers in class and in conference.
Open to students who have completed the requirement in English Composition.
Not open to students who have completed three semesters of grade II work or are taking
course 204, 205, 208, 302, or 304. Three hours a week for the second semester.
Miss Johnson, Miss Hamilton.
208. Studies in Biography and Literary Portraits. (Not given in 1935—
36.)
This course deals with some of the problems and practices that distinguish
biography as a developing form of literary art. Emphasis will be placed on the
contemporary biographer's way of handling his materials, often as influenced by
other fields of expression. This course may follow course 203 or 206 or 201.
Writing varied and frequent.
Open to students who have completed the requirements in English Composition.
Not open to students who have completed three semesters of grade II work or are
taking course 204, 205, 207, 302, or 304. Three hours a week for the second semester.
Miss Batchelder.
301. Narrative Writing.
Study of the principles and forms of narrative writing, including the short
story. The course aims to lead the student to discover the possibilities of ma-
terial at her disposal, and to appreciate more fully the qualities of good narrative.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed the requirement in English
Composition. Two hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Manwaring, Miss Johnson.
302. Descriptive, Narrative, and Critical Writing.
This course may be a continuation of course 301 or may be elected separately.
By means of frequent practice in descriptive, narrative and critical writing, and
study of the elements of good prose style, the course aims to develop keener
sense of the excellences of many kinds of writing. It provides reading and class
discussion of the theory and practice of numerous writers.
88 Courses of Instruction
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed the requirement in English Com-
position. Two hours a week for llie second semester.
Miss Johnson, Miss Denkinger.
303. The Theory and History of Criticism.
Lectures on the critical theory of Plato and Aristotle and on the more im-
portant English and French critics.
Open to juniors and seniors. One hour a week for a year. Miss Hart.
304. Advanced Course in English Composition.
Studies in exposition, description, and narration, with one piece of dramatiza-
tion or an original play. An opportunity will be given once each semester to
correct some freshman themes, under the criticism of the instructor. Frequent
practice in writing.
Open to seniors who have completed course 203 or 206 or 201 followed by course
204, 205, 207, or 208; or courses 301-302; or, by special permission, course 303.
Not open to students who are taking course 301 or 302 or a course of grade II. Three
hours a week for a year. Miss Hart, Miss Perkins.
305. Modern Drama.
This course deals with some of the chief plays produced in English and in other
languages from Ibsen to O'Neill. Translations will be used. The emphasis of
the course is on the evolution of play-writing technique; its aim is to help stu-
dents who desire subsequently to write plays or to write dramatic criticism.
Frequent writing.
Open to juniors and seniors. Two hours a week for a year.
Miss Hart, Miss Denkinger.
350. Research or Individual Study.
Open by permission to graduate students only. One hour a week for a year.
MAJORS
Courses should be elected in the following sequence:
Grade I: 101.
Grade II: 201, 203, 206 (first semester); 204, 205, 207, 208 (second semester).
Grade III: 301 (first semester); 302 (second semester), 303, 304, 305.
Recommended for a twelve-hour major: 101, two semester courses of grade II
(see restrictions under individual courses); six hours of grade III. Course 303
should always be included.
Note. — Either 301-302 or 304 must be taken in the senior year in a twelve-
hour major.
Note that no two of the grade II courses may be taken at the same time, nor
may any of these or 301-302 or 304 be taken at the same time. Course 303 and
course 305 may be taken at the same time with another grade III or grade II
course in the department.
Courses in English Language (English Literature 312 and 327) or English
Literature 209 or 306 may count as a part of a twelve-hour major in Composition;
but at least three hours of grade III work in Composition must be included in any
major in the department.
French 89
Students intending to teach English Composition would do well to include
in their program some courses in English Literature and, if possible, a course
in English Language.
Students are referred to the course in Group Leadership, page 106.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
The general examination in English Composition will include questions on the
theory — on the principles of craftsmanship — underlying the specific courses the
student has taken; it will include a study of the forms of description, narration,
and exposition in their general aspects; a study of differing types of essay, of
biography, of criticism; a study of the historical development of the sentence, of
the paragraph, and of the linguistic elements composing our vocabulary. The
student will be expected to organize her answers clearly and to write with reason-
able fluency and finish. Supplementary reading and detailed instructions will
be given in a department statement to be issued later.
FRENCH
Professor: Ruth Elvira Clark, Litt.D. (Chairman)
f'isiting Professor: Rene Escande de Messieres, Agrege de l'Universite.
Associate Professors: Dorothy Warner Dennis, B.A., Dipl.E.U.
Marguerite Juliette Brechaille,1 Agregee de l'Universite.
Andree Bruel,2 Docteur de l'Universite de Paris.
Assistant Professors: Francoise Ruet, M.A., Agregee de l'Universite.
Edith Melcher, Ph.D.
Lecturers: Simone David, Agregee de l'Universite.
Nicolette Ina Pernot, Lie. is Let.
Instructors: Alice Marguerite Marie Malbot, Lie. es Let.
Marie-Antoinette Quarre,4 B.A., C.E.S., Dipl.E.S.
A limited number of qualified students are permitted to spend the junior year in France
with the foreign study group of the University of Delaware.
All courses beginning with course 101 are conducted in French.
*101. Elementary Course.
The course includes (1) a practical study of French pronunciation, phonetic
drill; (2) the practical study of French grammar; (3) readings on French life and
French institutions; (4) selected readings from modern writers. Constant oral
drill and frequent written work.
Open to students who do not present French for admission. Three hours a week
for a year. Miss Dennis.
*102. Selected Readings from Modern French Authors Dealing with
Life in Different Regions of France.
These texts serve as a basis for a systematic review of syntax introductory to
theme writing and oral narrative, and a practical study of French pronunciation
with phonetic drill.
Open to students who have completed course 101 , or present two units in French for
admission. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Dennis, Miss Melcher.
1 Absent on leave.
• Absent on leave for the first semester.
4 Appointed for the first semester only.
go Courses of Instruction
*103. French Life and Institutions.
A study of modern plays and novels dealing with aspects of French con-
temporary life. Stress will be laid on grammar, vocabulary and pronunciation.
Frequent themes and exercises. Outside reading.
Open to students who present three units in French for admission. This course is
intended for students who need further training in the spoken and written language.
Students whose classroom work has been conducted hitherto mainly in English are
urged to elect this course rather than course 104. It is not open to students who have
completed course 104 and only exceptionally, by permission of the department, to
students who have completed course 102. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Bruel, Miss Clark, Miss Melcher, Miss Pernot, Miss Quarre.
*104. Introduction to the Study of French Literature.
A study of representative literary masterpieces of various periods. The aim
of this course is to prepare students for more advanced work in language and
literature, acquainting them with French methods of literary study. It pro-
vides an historical background and includes a study of pronunciation, grammar,
and vocabulary, as well as application of lecture expliquee methods. It affords
constant practice in the written and spoken language. Outside reading of rep-
resentative novels.
Open to students who present three units of French for admission or have com-
pleted course 102. This course is intended for students whose previous classroom
work has been conducted mainly in French. It is not open to students who have
taken course 103. Three hours a week for a year. Mrs. David, Miss Malbot.
*201. French Civilization before the Revolution.
An introduction to the civilization of France, as revealed in history, art, and
selected literary masterpieces. Emphasis is laid on language as a preparation
for later courses. Class discussion, oral reports, frequent written work.
Open to students who have completed course 103 or 104, or present four units in
French for admission, and, on recommendation of the department, to students who
have completed course 102 or another three-hour course of grade II. Three hours a
week for a year. Miss Dennis, Miss Ruet.
*202. Composition, Translation, Grammar.
First course. Weekly written work. The object of the course is to provide
additional practice in the written and the spoken language.
Open to students who have completed course 103 or 104 or present four units for
admission, and on special recommendation of the department to students who are
taking course 103. One hour a week for a year. Miss Clark, Miss Bruel,
Miss Quarre.
205. Composition, Translation, Grammar.
Second course. The work of the course is on the same lines as in course 202,
but more advanced in nature.
Open to students who have completed course 202 or 201 or 204 or 207, and to other
students on recommendation of the department. One hour a week for a year.
Miss Pernot.
French 91
203. History of French Literature.
A survey course, intended primarily for students who do not expect to major
in French; more ground is covered than in course 204. Class discussion of se-
lected masterpieces, short papers, outside reading. First semester: a brief
study of the Middle Ages and the Renaissance; the seventeenth century. Sec-
ond semester: the eighteenth century and the first half of the nineteenth.
Open to students who have completed course 103 with a grade of at least C, or 104
and, exceptionally, on recommendation oj the department, to students who have com-
pleted course 102 or course 201. This course is not open to students who have com-
pleted or are taking course 204. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Melcher.
204. Studies in French Literature.
A study of representative French authors of the Middle Ages, the Renaissance
(the texts used are in modern French), the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries.
The course will stress the work of the sixteenth and seventeenth century writers.
A few subjects only are chosen for each period and special attention is given to
method and to the handling of material in view of further work. Brief papers,
lecture expliqu'ee, outside reading, class discussion.
Open to students who have completed course 104 and, on recommendation of the
department, also to students who have completed course 103; and, exceptionally, to
students who have completed course 201. This course is not open to students who
have completed or are taking course 203. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Malbot.
206. Pronunciation and Diction.
This course is intended primarily to supplement advanced courses by practical
work in speech. An analytical study of American defects, both general and re-
gional, in French speech, and means of remedying such defects. A practical
study of pronunciation and intonation.
Open to students who have completed courses 103 or 104, or 102 with the consent of
the department, and to those who have taken or are taking a grade II or a grade III
course in French. Two class periods a week and one hour of practice work, counting
as one hour a week for a year. Miss Pernot.
207. The Development of Modern French Drama.
After a brief introductory survey of the drama of the Middle Ages, the Renais-
sance, and the Classical Age, this course will study the theatre of the eighteenth
century, including Voltaire, Marivaux, Beaumarchais, le drame bourgeois; the
plays of the Romantic period; the comedy of manners and the problem play;
le theatre libre; contemporary drama, including plays by Rostand, Maeterlinck,
Curel, J. Romains, Claudel, Giraudoux, and others.
Open to students who have completed course 104 or a three hour course of grade II,
and, on the recommendation of the department, to students who have completed course
103. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. de Messieres.
301. The Classical Period of French Literature.
The main object of the course is the study of the development of French classi-
cal literature and of society. The authors studied are: Malherbe, Descartes,
92 Courses of Instruction
Pascal, La Rochefoucauld, La Bruyere, Bossuet, Fenelon, Corneille, Racine,
Moliere, La Fontaine, Boileau. Outside reading. Brief papers.
Open to students who have completed course 201 with a grade of at least C, or course
204 or 207 or 203; also to seniors who are taking three hours of grade II. Three hours
a week for a year. Mrs. David.
302. Eighteenth Century Literature. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
The aim of this course is to trace the development of the esprit philosophique,
and to show the evolution of ideals in this century. While other authors will
be taken up, the course will stress the works of Montesquieu, Voltaire, and
Rousseau. Class discussions of selected masterpieces, oral reports, short papers.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 204 or 207 or 203, or who
have taken a grade III course. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Clark.
304. Conversation.
A conversation course based on the reading of contemporary regional novels
on Brittany, Normandy, Touraine, Beam, Provence, etc.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking a three-hour course
of grade II, and, on recommendation of the department, to sophomores who have
completed a three-hour course of grade II. Two hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Malbot, Miss Quarre.
309. Conversation.
The work of the course is the same as in 304, but other novels will be assigned.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking a three-hour course
of grade II, to students who have completed course 304, and, on recommendation of
the department, to sophomores who have completed a three-hour course of grade II.
Two hours a week for the second semester. Miss Malbot, Miss Bruel.
305. Intensive Reading.
The work of this course will consist of the intensive study of one subject.
In 1935-36 the subject chosen will be: History of the French Novel with special
emphasis on the evolution of the genre. Oral reports, class discussion, approxi-
mately a paper a fortnight.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 204 or 207 or 203, or who
are taking a course of grade III. Three hours a week for a year.
Mr. de Messieres.
306. Nineteenth Century Literature. Romanticism.
A study of the romantic movement in French literature, and in particular of
the great novelists and poets of that period: Lamartine, Vigny, Victor Hugo,
Musset, Chateaubriand, Mme. de Stael, Benjamin Constant, Balzac, Fromentin,
Stendhal, Barbey d'Aurevilly. Approximately a paper a fortnight. Occa-
sional visits to Farnsworth Art Museum or Boston Museum of Fine Arts for
basis of written work.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed a full grade III course, and to
approved juniors and seniors who have completed course 204 or 207 or 203. Three
hours a week for a year. Mr. de Messieres.
French 93
307. Contemporary French Literature.
I. The evolution of French poetry from Baudelaire to the present day, with
special studies of Baudelaire, Verlaine, Rimbaud, Claudel, Valery, Mme. de
Noailles, etc. II. The masters of French prose during the same period: Barres,
Bergson, Gide, Proust, Giraudoux, Mauriac, Maurois, J. Romains, etc.
Open to seniors who have completed course 301 or 302 or 305 or 306 and, excep-
tionally, on special recommendation of the department, to seniors who have com-
pleted course 203 or 204. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. de Messieres.
308. Studies in Language.
Advanced composition and translation.
Open to juniors and seniors zvho are taking a course of grade III, and, on recom-
mendation of the department, to juniors and seniors who have completed a course of
grade II. Two hours a week for the first semester. Miss Ruet.
310. Studies in Language.
The aim of this course is the same as in 308, but different subjects and texts
will be studied.
Open to juniors and seniors who are taking a course of grade III, or have com-
pleted course 308, and, on recommendation of the department, to juniors and seniors
who have completed a course of grade II. Two hours a week for the second semester.
Miss Ruet.
350. Research or Individual Study.
Open to approved seniors who have taken two full grade III courses in the depart-
ment, or zvho have completed one full grade III course and are taking another full
grade III course. The permission of the department must be secured before electives
are handed in. Two to three hours for a semester or a year. The amount of work
contemplated must be stated at the time of handing in electives.
321. Old French. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Open to graduate students who have completed twelve year-hours of college French,
and, on recommendation of the department, to seniors who have completed the same
amount of work. Three hours a week for a year.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
I. Course 101 counts for the degree but does not count towards a major.
Course 102 counts for the major only if directly followed by a three-hour course
of grade II.
Students planning to major in the department should not carry two three-
hour courses of grade II without permission of the department.
II. A nine-hour major will consist of not less than three hours of grade III
and not more than three hours of grade I.
A twelve-hour major will consist of not less than six hours of grade III and not
m ore than three hours of grade I.
III. Course 202 taken in the sophomore year, course 205 in the junior year
and courses 308, 3 10 in the junior or senior year will be most valuable to students
94 Courses of Instruction
majoring in French and especially to 8tudents who wish to take the general
examination in French. Course 206 will give additional training in diction.
Students majoring in French literature are advised to include 301 in their
program.
The following courses are suggested to students planning to elect French 302:
History 102 or 201, English Literature 206, 310.
Students proposing to elect French 30S are advised to elect English Literature
207 and 206.
Students proposing to elect French 306 are advised to elect History 201,
English Literature 322, and German 305.
Students proposing to elect French 307 in the senior year are advised to elect
course 306 in the junior year.
All students are urged to consult their instructors and the chairman of the de-
partment in regard to their higher electives, especially such students as intend to
teach French and desire the recommendation of the department. It will be
well for them to plan fifteen hours of electives.
Only those students who have completed satisfactorily a twelve-hour major
in the department will be recommended as teachers of French.
Special attention is called to Education 303, which is open to seniors who are
taking French 301, 302, 305, 306, or 307.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
The general examination in French will consist of two parts:
Part I. French Literature, to be given in the morning. Three hours.
Part II. French Language, to be given in the afternoon. Two hours.
In part I general questions only will be asked on the subjects studied in courses
201, 203, 204, 207, especially questions that stress the interrelation between these
courses and courses of grade III. The longer part of this examination will be
devoted to questions bearing on the subjects studied in courses of grade III,
involving correlation of earlier and later courses, comparisons, study of a type
or "genre," etc.
Part II will consist mainly of translation from French into English, and Eng-
lish into French, or in explication de texte.
Model Groupings of Twelve-Hour Majors Suitable as a Basis for the
General Examination
I. Students entering with two units of French.
First Year: 102.
Second Year: One of the following, on special recommendation of the de-
partment: 201, 203.
Third Year: 301.
Fourth Year: One of the following: 302, 305, 306, 307.
II. Students entering with three units of French.
First Year: 103 or 104.
Second Year: One of the following: 201, 204, 207, 203.
Third Year: Preferably 301, or one of the following: 302, 305, 306.
Fourth Year: 307 (or one of the following, if not previously taken: 302, 305,
306).
Geology and Geography 95
III. Students entering with four units of French.
First Year: 201.
Second Year: 301.
Third Year: One of the following: 302, 305, 306 (preferably 306, if 307 is to
follow).
Fourth Year: 307 (or one of the following, if not previously taken: 302, 305,
306).
Important Note
To the preceding should be added, if possible, one or more of the following
courses:
A. Grammar and Composition Courses: 202 in the sophomore year, 205 in
the junior year, 308, 310 in the junior or senior year.
B. Pronunciation and Diction: Course 206.
C. Conversation Courses: 304, 309 in the junior or senior year. (In the
sophomore year on recommendation of the department.)
D. Research or Individual Study: 350 in the senior year.
For nine-hour groups in accordance with plans 1 and 2 students should follow
directions suggested for the first three years in any of the foregoing model
groupings.
GEOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHY
Professor: Mary Jean Lanier, Ph.D. (Chairman)
Associate Professor: Margaret Terrell Parker, M.A.
Assistant Professor: Louise Kingsley, Ph.D.
Lecturer: Russell Gibson, Ph.D.
Instructors: Harriet Elizabeth Lee, M.A.
Katharine Fowler Lunn, Ph.D.
Assistant: Elizabeth Richards Roy, M.A.
*101. General Geology.
First Semester— Physiography. A study of the work which wind, waves,
rivers, glaciers, volcanoes, and earth movements have done and are doing to
shape the earth's surface. This study explains the origin of hills and valleys, of
plains, plateaus and mountains, of continents and ocean basins, and makes clear
the ways in which these surface features have affected man's life. Second Se-
mester— Historical Geology. The origin of the earth and its history from the
time of its origin until the present. The evolution of life on the earth traced
from its earliest known appearance through its recent development.
Open to all undergraduates. Six periods a week: in general, three of lecture or
discussion and three of laboratory or field work, counting three hours a week for a
year.
Miss Lanier, Miss Parker, Miss Kingsley, Miss Lee, Mrs. Lunn, Mrs. Roy.
GEOLOGY
202. Mineralogy.
A study of minerals, including those which are economically valuable, such as
ore minerals and gem stones, and those which are essential constituents of rocks.
The student will learn to identify and determine the composition of all the better
known minerals, making use of both physical properties and methods of blowpipe
analysis. The modes of occurrence of minerals and the industrial uses to which
they are put are included in the study.
96 Courses of Instruction
Open to students who have completed Geology 101 or Chemistry 101. Two three-
period appointments a week for lecture and laboratory work, counting three hours a
week for the first semester. Mr. Gibson, Miss Lee.
203. Economic Geology.
A study of economically valuable mineral deposits, both metallic and non-
metallic. The course deals with the origin, composition, and geological and
mineralogical relations of these deposits, and, briefly, with their geographic dis-
tribution and political significance.
Open to students who have completed course 202. Two three-period appoint-
ments for lecture, class discussion, and laboratory work, counting three hours a week
for the second semester. Mr. Gibson, Miss Lee.
205. Invertebrate Paleontology. (Not given in 1935-36.)
The course deals with the facts and principles of organic evolution as revealed
by the invertebrate life of the past. The steps in the development from simple,
generalized forms to more complex and specialized types are illustrated by a
detailed comparative study of fossils of the various phyla. The effects of
physical environment upon life development are emphasized.
Open to students who have completed Geology 101 or Zoology 101. Two two-
period appointments for lectures, class discussion, and laboratory work, with inde-
pendent laboratory assignments. The course counts three hours a week for the
second semester. Miss Kingsley.
301. Field Geology. (Not given in 1935-36.)
An introduction to the methods of field study. The course is designed to
train the student to make a topographic map, and to interpret and map the geol-
ogy of a region.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 101 and course 202. One
three-period lecture or laboratory appointment, or one afternoon in the field, with
independent field work related to the student's special problem. Students registering
for course 301 should keep at least one other three-period appointment available for
independent work on field problems. The course counts three hours a week for the
second semester. Mr. Gibson.
306.f Paleontology.
The course deals with the facts and problems of organic evolution, as revealed
by the life of past geologic ages. By means of a study of fossils, the steps in the
development from simple, generalized life forms to more complex and specialized
types are traced. The effects of physical environment upon life development
are emphasized.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed Geology 101 and either Zoology
101 or Botany 101 or a course of grade II in Geology. Juniors and seniors major-
ing in Zoology may be admitted to the course upon the recommendation of the two de-
partments. Two two-period appointments for lectures, class discussion, and labora-
tory work, with independent laboratory assignments, counting three hours a week for
the first semester. Miss Kingsley.
t Courses 306 and 311 will be withdrawn after 1935-36.
Geology and Geography 97
311. t Economic Geology. (Not given in 1935-36.)
A study of the origin, composition, and location of economically valuable
mineral deposits. The lectures and readings are directed toward familiarizing
the student with both metallic and non-metallic mineral deposits in their general
mineralogical and geological relations.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 202. Two three-period
appointments for lecture, class discussion and laboratory work. The course counts
three hours a week for the second semester. Mr. Gibson, Miss Lee.
312. Crystallography.
The course deals mainly with optical crystallography and the application of
optical crystallography to the study of minerals. The laboratory work consists
of the determination of minerals by means of their optical constants.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed Geology 202. Juniors and sen-
iors majoring in Chemistry or in Physics may be admitted to the course upon the
recommendation of the two departments concerned. Two two-period appointments
a week for lecture and laboratory work, counting three hours a week for the first
semester. Miss Kingsley.
313. Petrography.
This course includes the identification of rocks by means of a study of thin
sections with the petrographical microscope, and aims to give the student an
elementary knowledge of the origin and composition of rocks.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 312. Two two-period
appointments a week for lecture and laboratory work, counting three hours a week for
the second semester. Miss Kingsley.
314. Igneous and Structural Geology. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
315. Geomorphology. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
321. Problems in Geology. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
This course is designed to give students training in independent investigation.
Individual problems are assigned and reports to the instructor are made at reg-
ular intervals.
Open to graduate students and by permission to seniors who are majoring in Geol-
ogy. Three hours a week for a semester or for a year. Mr. Gibson.
350. Research or Individual Study.
The subject of study will be determined by the preparation of the student and
by her special interests. Her work will be under the direction of the member of
the department in whose field the subject lies.
Open by permission of the department to juniors and seniors who are majoring in
the department. Three hours a week for a semester or for a year.
f Courses 306 and 311 will be withdrawn after 1935-36.
98 Courses of Instruction
geography
208. The Geography of Europe.
A study of man's adjustment to physical environment in Europe. Topogra-
phy, climate, and other environmental factors are studied in their relation to
human development in that continent. The study makes clear how environ-
mental features help to explain the early rise of civilization in Europe, the dis-
tribution of races and languages, the origin of the present political units, and the
economic development of Europe as a whole. Certain nations of major interest
to American students are given further detailed study.
Open to juniors and seniors, and to sophomores who have completed course 101
or who are majoring in History. Three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Parker.
209. The Economic Geography of North America.
A study of man's economic activities as related to environmental factors in the
major geographic regions of North America. The objective of the course is to
develop a clear conception of the elements of the natural environment, such as
climate, topography, soils, surface and underground waters, mineral resources,
native vegetation, and to emphasize in the regions studied the important ad-
justments which man has made to these elements.
Open to juniors and seniors, and to sophomores who have completed course 101 or
who are majoring in History. Three hours a week for the second semester.
Miss Lanier.
304. The Geography of South America.
A study of the physiographic features, climates, and resources of South Amer-
ica; the influence of these factors upon the colonization of the continent by
Europeans, upon the formation of independent political units, and upon the
present and possible future economic development of the various countries.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 101 and a course of grade
II in the department; by permission to students of South American history. Three
hours a week for the first semester. Miss Lanier.
307. The Historical Geography of the United States.
An analysis of the relations between the natural environment and the settle-
ment and development of the country. The adjustments to varied environ-
ments in connection with the westward expansion of the American people. An
interpretation in selected areas of readjustments made from time to time in re-
sponse to the changing significance of some element or elements in the environ-
ment. A geographic background to American history.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 209, and by permission to
students of American history. Three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Lanier.
308. Problems in the Geography of Eurasia.
A geographic study of selected regions of the Eurasian continent (exclusive of
countries given detailed treatment in course 208). Students will interpret inde-
pendently in so far as possible the human response to physical environment in
Geology and Geography 99
each region. The course gives opportunity to apply independently geographic
principles developed in earlier regional courses, as well as to gain familiarity with
new territory and to study interesting contrasts between oriental and western
civilization.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 208. Three hours a week
for the second semester. Miss Parker.
309. Climates of the World. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
A course designed to give an understanding of the major types of climate and
of their distribution in the several continents; to show the significance of climate
as a factor in the economic activities of a region and in the trade between dif-
ferent regions.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed at least one regional course in
geography. Three hours a week for the second semester. Miss Lee.
305- Seminar in Geography.
The course begins with a study of the methods of individual research. Early
in the course a selected topic is assigned to each student for investigation and
reports of the individual work are presented weekly.
Open to graduate students and to approved seniors. Three hours a week for the
second semester. Miss Parker.
350. Research or Individual Study.
The subject of study will be determined by the preparation of the student and
by her special interests. Her work will be under the direction of the member of
the department in whose field the subject lies.
Open by permission of the department to juniors and seniors who are majoring in
the department. Three hours a week for a semester or for a year.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
Students who are planning to major in Geology are advised to take Chemistry.
Those who wish to major in Geography will find this work correlates well with
work in History or Economics.
1. Students who are majoring in Geography should elect courses 101, 208, 209,
and at least six hours of grade III work from the group 304, 307, 308, 309, 305,
350.
2. For students who are majoring in Geology and who in 1934-35 have com-
pleted a second year in Geology, the following sequence of courses is recom-
mended: 101, 202, 207, and at least six hours of grade III work selected from the
group 301, 306, 311, 312, 313, 321, 350.
3. For students electing grade II work in Geology in 1935-36 or thereafter,
the following sequence is suggested: courses 101, 202, 203 or 205, and at least
six hours of grade III work selected from the group 301, 312, 313, 314, 315, 350.
4. A combined major in Geology and Zoology may be arranged in consultation
with these departments.
5. By permission of the department, three hours of closely correlated work in
History will be accepted as part of a twelve-hour major in Geography.
ioo Courses of Instruction
GENERAL EXAMINATION
A major offered for the general examination in Geology or in Geography must
include course 101.
Some questions based upon the fundamental work given in course 101 will be
required both of students majoring in Geology and those majoring in Geography.
With this exception, entirely different examinations will be set for the two groups.
Some choice of questions will be possible. The questions will involve correla-
tion and interpretation of material, and the application of general principles to
specific cases.
The department will suggest supplementary summer reading for those stu-
dents who desire such assistance.
GERMAN
Professor: Natalie Wipplinger, Ph.D. (Chairman)
Associate Professor: Marianne Thalmann, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors: Barbara Salditt, Ph.D.
Margaret Jeffrey, Ph.D.
Instructors: Johanna Elisabeth Volbehr.
Doris Elizabeth Rich, M.A.
The language of the classroom in all courses is almost exclusively German. The student
thus has constant practice in hearing, speaking, and writing German.
A limited number of qualified students are permitted to spend the junior year in Munich.
*101. Elementary Course. Grammar, reading, oral and written
exercises.
The texts used in this course are made the basis for a study of grammatical
forms and rules, for speaking exercises and composition work. Frequent written
exercises are required.
Open to students who do not present German for admission. Three hours a week
for a year. Mrs. Volbehr, Miss Rich, Miss Salditt,
Miss Jeffrey.
*102. Elementary Course. Reading, free reproduction, written and
oral exercises, short themes; memorizing of poems.
The methods are the same as in course 101. In connection with the reading,
special attention is given to the learning of the more common idioms. Several
poems are memorized. Frequent written tests or short themes are required.
Course 102 is intended to fit students to enter courses 201, 202.
Open to students who have completed course 101 or present two units in German for
admission. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Thalmann,
Mrs. Volbehr, Miss Rich, Miss Salditt, Miss Jeffrey.
*104. Outline History of German Literature.
The object of this course is to furnish the student with the vocabulary neces-
sary for the reading and discussion of literature, and to give her a general histori-
cal background for the more detailed study of German literature in subsequent
courses.
Open to freshmen who present three units in German for admission. Three hours
a week for a year. Mrs. Volbehr.
German ioi
202. History of German Literature.
First semester: discussions, reading, and occasional lectures on the history of
German literature before Goethe. The aim is to trace the parallel development
of literature, social conditions, and religious ideals of the times. Works read
and discussed are: the Hildebrandslied, selections from the Nibelungenlied, the
works of Wolfram, Gottfried, Hartmann, the Minnesingers; Volkslied, selections
from Luther, Hans Sachs. Second semester: the classical period in German lit-
erature, with special emphasis on Lessing, Herder, Schiller, Goethe.
Open to students who have completed course 102. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Wipplinger, Miss Salditt, Miss Jeffrey.
204. Schiller's Life and Works.
(Introductory Course.) Lectures, discussions. Study of Schiller's life and
some of his important dramatic works. Texts: Die Rduber (Cotta); Wallenstein
(Carruth); Schiller's Gedichte (Cotta); Schiller's Brief e (Kuhnemann). Occa-
sional themes.
Open to students who have completed courses 104 or 202. Three hours a week for
the first semester. Miss Thalmann.
205. Goethe's Life and Works.
(Introductory Course.) Lectures, discussions. Study of the principal char-
acteristics of Goethe's life and works to the time of his literary co-operation with
Schiller. Works discussed in class: Gotz von Berlichingen, Werther, Iphigenie,
Egmont, selected poems. Interpretation of "Storm and Stress" in connection
with Gotz, of German classicism in connection with Iphigenie. Supplementary
discussion of Goethe's Brief e (Langewiesche), Dichtung und Wahrheit, Bielschow-
sky's Goethe, Euripides' Iphigenie. Occasional themes.
Open to students who have completed courses 104 or 202. Three hours a week for
the second semester. Miss Wipplinger.
206. Conversational German.
Modern German works are read and discussed. Talks in German based on
material used in other college courses or found in current German magazines are
prepared and given by members of the class.
Open to students who have completed courses 102 and 104, or on special recommen-
dation to those who have completed course 101 . One hour a week for a year.
Mrs. Volbehr.
207. Advanced Conversational German.
The same method used as in 206. More difficult reading material used.
Open to students taking other work in German, who have completed courses 202 and
206, and by special permission to those who have completed course 104. One hour a
week for a year. Mrs. Volbehr.
301. German Novel. (Not given in 1935-36.)
Historical development of the German novel since Goethe.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking three hours of grade
II. Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Thalmann.
102 Courses of Instruction
302. History of the German Language. (Not given in 1935-36.)
This course aims to give a fuller and more thorough understanding of modern
German through the study of its historical development.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed three hours of grade II. Three
hours a week for the second semester. Miss Jeffrey.
303. Middle High German. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
(Introductory Course.) Survey of Middle High German forms and sounds.
Translation of Middle High German epic and lyric poetry into the modern idiom.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed at least three hours of grade II.
Three hours a week for the second semester.
304. Goethe's Faust, Part I.
Study of the pre-Goethean development of the Faust legend in its more im-
portant literary forms. Close study of the text of Goethe's Faust, Part I. Col-
lateral readings and reports on the relation of the poem to Goethe's life and
times. Part II will be treated in a few final lectures. Frequent tests.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed courses 204, 205. Three hours a
week for the first semester. Miss Wipplinger.
305. The German Romantic School.
A study of the development and spirit of the German Romantic School.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 304. Three hours a week
for the second semester. Miss Wipplinger.
306. Lessing as Dramatist and Critic. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Treatment of Lessing's critical work in literature, theology, and aesthetics.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 304. Three hours a week
for the second semester. Miss Salditt.
307. Goethe, Advanced Course.
(Seminary Course.) Study of Goethe's lyrics, ballads, later dramas, parts of
Faust II, and other works. Collateral reading in the Goethe Jahrbuch, and from
Eckermann, Graf, Harnack, and others. Consideration of Goethe's relation to
other literatures, and as art-critic.
Open to seniors who have completed course 304. Three hours a week for the first
semester. Miss Wipplinger.
308. Nineteenth Century Drama.
Special study of Kleist, Grillparzer, Hebbel, Ibsen, Hauptmann, Schnitzler,
Hofmannsthal, Strindberg, Wedekind; their relation to classic and romantic art,
and to the social and philosophical problems of the century.
Open to seniors who have completed course 304. Three hours a week for the second
semester. Miss Thalmann.
309. Schiller as Philosopher and Writer on ^Esthetics. (Not offered in
1935-36.)
(Seminary Course.) Study of Schiller through his correspondence with
Korner, Goethe, etc., and through his philosophic poems and essays.
Open to seniors who have completed course 204 and at least three hours of grade III.
Three hours a week for the first semester.
German 103
310. Gothic. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Open to graduates and to seniors by permission of the instructor. Three hours a
week for the second semester.
311. German Lyric Poetry in the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries.
(Not given in 1935-36.)
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking three hours of grade
II. Three hours a week for the second semester. Miss Thalmann.
350. Research or Individual Study.
Open to graduate students, and, by permission, to approved seniors. Three hours
a week for a semester or for a year.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
I. For students who begin German in college.
First Year: Course 101.
Second Year: Course 102.
Third Year: Courses 202, 206.
Fourth Year: Courses 204, 205, 207, 301, 311, 302.
II. For students who offer the Two Unit Requirement.
First Year: Course 102.
Second Year: Courses 202 and 206.
Third Year: Courses 204, 205, 207, 301, 302, 311. Students may not omit
204 and 205 except by permission from the chairman of the department.
Fourth Year: Courses 304, 305, 307, 308, 207, 301, 311.
III. For students who offer the Three Unit Requirement.
First Year: Course 104.
Second Year: Courses 204, 205, 206. Students may not omit 204, 205 except
by permission from the chairman of the department.
Third Year: Courses 207, 304, 302, 305, 301, 311.
Fourth Year: Courses 302, 304, 305, 307, 308, 301, 311.
The major is based on courses 104 or 202. Students planning to major in
German are advised to take courses in Philosophy, Mediaeval History, and Eng-
lish and French Literature.
Students intending to teach German will be recommended by the depart-
ment only on condition that they have taken from three to six hours of grade III
and in addition course 207.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
The questions for the general examination will be on the following four groups:
(1) The general history of German literature.
(2) The period of Goethe and Schiller.
(3) Rationalism or Romanticism.
(4) Nineteenth century literature.
104 Courses of Instruction
Every student will be expected to answer questions from group one. The
selection of questions on the other groups will depend on the work the student
has done in the department. Knowledge of grammar and ability to use idio-
matic German will be considered in judging the answers.
GREEK
Associate Professor: Helen Hull Law, Ph.D. (Chairman)
Assistant Professor: Barbara Philippa McCarthy, Ph.D.
*101. Beginning Greek.
The aim of the course is to cover in one year the fundamental facts of Greek
grammar with practice in reading and writing. The text-book is Crosby and
SchaefTer's An Introduction to Greek. The Greek reading includes selections from
the great writers of prose and poetry.
Open to students who do not present Greek for admission. Three hours a week
for a year. Miss McCarthy, Miss Law.
*201. Plato.
Apology, Crito and selections from other dialogues.
Open to students who have completed course 101 or present two or three units in
Greek for admission. Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Law.
*205. Homer.
Selected books of the Iliad.
Open to students who have completed courses 101 and 201 or present two units in
Greek for admission and have completed course 201, and to others on recommendation
of the department. Three hours a week for the second semester.
Miss McCarthy
*202. Homer.
Selected books of the Odyssey or other material selected to meet the needs of
the class.
Open to students who present three units in Greek for admission and have com-
pleted course 201, and to those who have completed course 205. Three hours a week
for the second semester. Miss Law.
203. Greek Literature in English Translations.
The class will read in translation selections from the works of the Greek poets,
from Homer to Theocritus. Lectures on the development of Greek literature
and class discussions will accompany the reading. Special emphasis will be
placed upon Greek drama, and as many plays as possible will be read and studied.
This course may not be counted toward a major in Greek.
Open to juniors and seniors without prerequisite, and to sophomores who have
completed a course in literature in any department. {This does not include a be-
ginning course in a foreign language.) Three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Law.
Greek 105
204. Classical Mythology.
The more important myths of the classical period will be studied in relation
to the literature, art, and religion of ancient times and their influence on the
literatures of succeeding periods. This course may not be counted toward a
major in Greek.
Open to juniors and seniors without prerequisite, and to sophomores who have
completed a course in literature in any department. (This does not include a be-
ginning course in a foreign language.) Three hours a week for the second
semester. Miss Law.
206. Writing of Greek.
Review of the essentials of grammar and syntax. Written exercises based on
prose selections to be read at sight in class.
Open to students who have completed course 101 and are taking another course in
the department other than courses 203 and 204. Three hours a week for the first
semester. Miss McCarthy.
301. Greek Drama.
Reading and study of dramas of ^Eschylus, Sophocles, Euripides and Aris-
tophanes.
Open to students who have completed course 201 and either course 205 or 202.
Three hours a week for a year. Miss McCarthy.
302. Greek Poetry from Homer through Theocritus.
This course includes epic, elegiac, lyric, and pastoral poetry.
Open to students who have completed or are taking course 301. By permission of
the department students may elect either semester of course 302 as a semester course.
Three hours a week for a year. Miss McCarthy.
305. Modern Greek. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
The course will trace briefly the development of the language to the present
time with practice in speaking and writing the Greek of today.
Open to students who are taking another course of grade III in the department,
and to others by permission of the department. One hour a week for a year.
Miss McCarthy.
307. Greek Historians.
Rapid reading from the histories of Herodotus and Thucydides.
Open to students who have completed course 301. Three hours a week for the first
semester. Miss Law.
308. Plato.
The study of Plato's philosophy with reading in Greek from the Republic,
Symposium, Phaedrus, and other dialogues.
Open to students who have completed course 301. Three hours a week for the
second semester. Miss Law
For courses in the study of Greek Testament see Biblical History.
106 Courses of Instruction
directions for election
Courses 320 and 321 in Art may be counted toward a major in Greek by stu-
dents taking at the same time a course of grade III in Greek.
All courses in the department may be counted for the major except 203 and
204. Students who began Greek in college and are planning to take a general
examination in Greek should elect either 302 or 307 and 308; those who entered
with Greek, 302, 307 and 308.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
The general examination in Greek will include passages for sight translation
with questions on language and syntax. Students will be expected to show an
acquaintance with the origin, development and characteristics of the various
types of literature studied together with the background of history, religion, and
myth. The student should make a special effort to grasp the distinguishing char-
acteristics of Greek civilization as shown in its literature.
GROUP LEADERSHIP
Professor: Alfred Dwight Sheffield, M.A.
201. Leadership in Organized Groups.
A study of the processes of thought and expression by which clubs, conferences,
and committees deal with current problems in the community. The work will be
based partly on the records of group experience in Christian Associations, civic
and philanthropic boards, industrial joint councils, and adult education projects,
partly on guided observations of current organizational procedures, and partly
on readings in social psychology. There will be written analyses of typical
situations, with attention to points where adjustment calls for skill in dealing
with fixed ideas, prejudices, and other emotional factors. Occasional brief pa-
pers in both semesters, with examination for the first semester and final paper for
the second.
Open to seniors, and to juniors and sophomores who have completed, or are taking,
Economics 101 or a course of grade I in History or Political Science. Three hours a
week for a year. Mr. Sheffield.
HISTORY AND POLITICAL SCIENCE
Professors: Julia Swift Orvis, Ph.D.
Elisabeth Hodder, Ph.D. (Chairman)
Edna Virginia Moffett, Ph.D.
Edward Ely Curtis, Ph.D.
Barnette Miller, Ph.D.
Judith Blow Williams, Ph.D.
Associate Professor: Louise Overacker, Ph.D.
Instructors: Margaret Hall Cole, Ph.D.
Elizabeth Runkle, M.A.
Assistant: Margaret Holmes Habermeyer, M.A.
HISTORY
*101. Mediaeval and Renaissance Europe.
Beginning with a discussion of Rome's legacy to Europe, this course includes
the study of such topics as the Mediaeval Church, feudal society, Mohammedan-
History and Political Science 107
ism and the Crusades, mediaeval towns and guilds, the development of commerce
and banking, the intellectual awakening of the thirteenth century, the Renais-
sance of Art and Literature, the age of exploration and early colonization, the
Protestant movement, and the foundation of modern European nations.
Open to all undergraduates. This course or course 102 is prerequisite to later
election. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Orvis, Mrs. Hodder, Miss Moffett, Mrs. Cole.
*102. Modern European History.
After a survey of conditions in the second half of the seventeenth century, this
course will trace the leading movements in the development of modern Europe,
such as French and English colonial expansion in the eighteenth century, the
Industrial Revolution, the French Revolution, the Liberal and Nationalist move-
ments of the nineteenth century, the emergence of the modern British Empire,
the unification of Italy and Germany, and the Great War.
Open to all undergraduates. This course or course 101 is prerequisite to later
election. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Williams, Miss Miller, Mrs. Cole.
201. History of Europe since the French Revolution.
An introductory survey of the French Revolution and the Napoleonic Era is
followed by a discussion of the political development of France, Germany,
Austria, Italy, and Russia from 1815 to the present.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors who have completed one full course in
History. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Orvis.
203. The History of Greece. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
This course will open with a brief survey of the oriental civilizations by which
the Greeks were influenced. A study of the social, economic, and political devel-
opment of the Greek State will follow, and with this as a foundation Greek civ-
ilization in its most significant aspects will be considered.
Open to students who have completed one college course in History and, without
prerequisites, to those who are giving special attention to the Classics. Three hours a
week for a year. Mrs. Hodder.
204. History of Rome.
This course offers a general survey of Roman History. The conclusions of
modern archaeologists and historians with regard to the earlier period are studied,
but the main emphasis is placed upon Rome's experiments in government, the
attempts of her statesmen to solve the social and economic problems of the
Republic, and the Empire, and upon the development of Rome's legacy to the
modern world.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors who have completed one college course in
History, and without prerequisite to those who are giving special attention to Latin,
Greek, or Economics. Three hours a week for a year. Mrs. Hodder.
205. Colonial America.
This course deals with the foundation and growth of the British Empire in
America. Emphasis is laid upon British colonial policy and administration, and
108 Courses of Instruction
upon the causes and course of the American Revolution. Lectures, discussions,
and library readings.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors who have completed or are taking a full
course in History. Three hours a week for the first semester. Mr. Curtis.
207. Geography in European History. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
This is not a course in Geography, but in History. Emphasis, however, is
laid on geographical setting, and on the influence of Geography on national
boundaries, governmental development, economic independence, trade relations,
and the life and culture of the people within certain areas.
Open to seniors without prerequisite, and to other students who have completed or
are taking one full course in History, or Geography 208. Three hours a week for the
first semester. Miss Moffett.
208. International Politics: The Near East.
A general view of international relations in the Near East since the Congress
of Berlin, with special reference to treaty settlements since 1918, and to present
conditions.
Open to students who have completed one full course in History. Three hours a
week for the first semester. Miss Miller.
209. Political History of Russia from the earliest times to the present.
(Not offered in 1935-36.)
This course includes a study of (1) the forces which made Russia a world power,
(2) the development and policy of the autocracy, and (3) the struggle for freedom,
culminating in the revolution of 1917, and (4) the existing regime.
Open to all seniors, and to juniors who have completed or are taking another course
in History. Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Orvis.
210. Mediaeval Life and Institutions.
The aim of the course is to show the points of contact and of difference between
the modern spirit and the mediaeval, as well as to serve as a background for the
study of modern history, or of mediaeval art or literature. A few mediaeval
sources are read.
Open to students who have completed one full course in History. Three hours a
week for a year. Miss Moffett.
213. History of England and Greater Britain.
A general survey of English History with especial emphasis upon those political,
social, and economic forces which have led to the expansion of England and to the
position and problems of the British Empire of today.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors who have completed one full course in
History. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Williams.
214. The Rise of the Latin-American Republics.
After surveying the exploration and conquest of the New World by the
Spaniards, this course treats Spanish colonial policy with a view to explaining
History and Political Science 109
the causes of the revolutionary movement. The latter part of the course is
devoted to the wars of liberation and the emergence of the present republics.
Open to students who have completed one full course in History. Also open with-
out prerequisite to sophomores, juniors, and seniors who are majoring in Spanish,
and to students who have completed Geography 304. Three hours a week for the
second semester. Mr. Curtis.
215. International Politics: The Far East.
A study of the Orient in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, with special
reference to the politico-economic interests of Europe and America.
Open to students who have completed one full course in History. Three hours a
week for the second semester. Miss Miller.
301. History of the United States from 1787 to the Present Time.
A study of the formation and development of the constitution of the United
States, with special reference to controlling forces, such as the organization of
parties, the growth of democracy, the rise of the slave power, the political effect
of the development of the West. Lectures, discussions, and library readings.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed one full course and have completed
or are taking a second course in History. Three hours a week for a year.
Mr. Curtis.
302. Europe in Renaissance and Reformation.
A study of the intellectual, religious, and social life of the fifteenth and six-
teenth centuries. In the first semester the Renaissance in Italy and France is
emphasized, and in the second semester the Reformation and the Age of Eliza-
beth.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed two full courses in History, or
one course in History and two courses in Art. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Moffett.
304. England Under the Tudors and Stuarts.
This course deals with the Renaissance and Reformation in England, with
Puritanism and the accompanying democratic ideals, with the constitutional
struggles of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries, and with those social and
economic changes that were initial to the founding of the British Empire.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed two full courses in History.
Three hours a week for a year. Mrs. Hodder.
305. Diplomatic History of Europe since 1740.
This course includes (1) a review of the period 1648-1740; (2) the age of Fred-
erick the Great; (3) a survey of the Revolutionary and Napoleonic period; (4)
the age of Bismarck and its results; (5) the World War and its consequences.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed two full courses in History.
Three hours a week for a year. Miss Orvis.
306. English History in the Nineteenth Century.
After a survey of conditions in England in the latter half of the eighteenth
century, this course will study the political, social and intellectual history of
no Courses of Instruction
England in the nineteenth century, with special emphasis upon Victorian Eng-
land. It will conclude with a short discussion of recent problems.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed two full courses in History.
Three hours a week for a year. Miss Williams.
307. American Foreign Relations.
This course deals with the most significant diplomatic problems which have
arisen as the result of war, westward expansion, the growth of foreign commerce,
immigration, and the acquisition of colonial possessions. The origin of impor-
tant treaties, the development of the Monroe Doctrine, and the evolution of the
United States into a world power will be traced. Lectures and library readings.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed two full courses in History.
Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Curtis.
308. Imperialism in World Politics. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
A study of European expansion in Asia, Africa, and the Islands of the Pacific
in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries; of colonial and imperial systems and
problems; and of international politics as related to the control of raw materials,
international finance, and imperial communications.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed two full courses in History.
Three hours a week for a year. Miss Miller.
309. Selected Studies in Mediaeval History. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
The course is designed to give training in methods of historical research, using
the mediaeval period as a field.
Open to graduates, seniors, and approved juniors who have completed two full
courses in History. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Moffett.
311. Social and Cultural History of Europe. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
A course in the evolution of civilization, tracing the development of culture
from early times through the rise of the Mediterranean civilizations, the Middle
Ages, the Renaissance, and modern times, and covering the more important
phases of social, economic, and intellectual life.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed two full courses in History.
Three hours a week for a year. Miss Williams.
350. Research or Individual Study.
By consultation with the department students may arrange for from one to
three hours of individual work. Permission for this must be obtained before
handing in electives.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking a course of grade
III in the department. One to three hours a week for a year. The amount of work
contemplated must be indicated at the time at which electives are due.
POLITICAL SCIENCE
*104. Introduction to Political Science.
Fundamental political conceptions developed through a study of the govern-
ments of the United States, Great Britain, France, Germany, Italy, and Russia.
History and Political Science I I I
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors without prerequisite, and to freshmen by
permission of the Dean of Freshmen. This course is a prerequisite for all other
courses in Political Science. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Overacker, Miss Runkle.
211. Political Parties and Electoral Problems.
The nature of political parties; party organization; the "spoils system";
nominating methods, party finance and campaign methods; public opinion and
party leadership; party reform and reconstruction.
Open to students who have completed course 104 and to seniors who have completed
or are taking course 104. Three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Overacker.
212. Public Administration.
A study of the administrative aspects of modern government with special
emphasis upon municipal problems: problems of organization and structure; the
appointment, promotion, and dismissal of public employees; the city manager as
a new type of public official; special consideration of selected phases of adminis-
tration, including police, health, finance, and city planning.
Open to students who have completed course 104 and to seniors who have completed
or are taking course 104. Three hours a week for the second semester.
Miss Overacker.
216. International Organization.
The development of international organization and a study of the present
organization and activities of the League of Nations, the Permanent Court of
International Justice, and the International Labor Office.
Open to students who have completed course 104 and to seniors who have completed
or are taking course 104. Three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Runkle.
312. The Constitution of the United States. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
A study of the constitution as a governmental mechanism, with special empha-
sis upon its interpretation by the Supreme Court. The process of amendment,
problems of citizenship, the separation of powers, the distribution of powers
between the national government and the states, the Supreme Court and social
legislation will be considered.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking a course of grade II
in Political Science. Three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Overacker.
313. International Law.
Nature and scope of international law and its relation to municipal law; the
rights and duties of states in peace and war; international law and the League of
Nations; international law and the World Court.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 104 and a course of grade
II in Political Science, History, or Economics. Three hours a week for the second
semester. Mlss Runkle.
H2 Courses of Instruction
314. Current Political Problems.
Each year some one problem will be taken for intensive study through the
media of newspapers and periodicals. Oral reports will be required at frequent
intervals; a final paper.
Open to a limited number of juniors, seniors, and graduate students specializing in
Political Science, Economics, or History, who have completed courses 104 and 211.
Three hours a week for the second semester. Miss Overacker.
317. Law and the Administration of Justice.
The nature, sources, and sanction of law; fundamental principles of English
and American jurisprudence; the organization of the courts; the judicial process;
the jury system.
Open to juniors who have completed a course of grade II in Political Science and to
seniors who have completed or are taking a course of grade II in Political Science.
Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Overacker.
350. Research or Individual Study. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
By consultation with the department, students may arrange for from one to
three hours of individual work in political science.
Open to seniors who have completed or are taking a course of grade III in Political
Science. Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Overacker.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
Students electing History may choose either of the introductory courses 101
or 102, but both of these courses may not be counted in a major. A major in
Political Science is based on course 104. The only other restrictions are those
required by the prerequisites stated for each course. Students desiring to take
the general examination in History are advised, however, to seek the advice of
the chairman and other members of the department in order to insure a proper
correlation of courses.
The courses are designed to help the student to acquire methods of historical
work, and to furnish a basis for the more detailed study of particular periods.
Courses in Political Science may not be included in a major in History, and
courses in History may not be included in a major in Political Science without
the special permission of the department.
Students may take their general examination in History or in Political Science,
and these subjects may be combined in the twenty-one hours of work for con-
centration.
The courses in Political Science are arranged to meet the needs of three groups
of students: those intending to do graduate work in Political Science or Law;
those desiring to supplement their work in History, Economics, or Sociology with
a knowledge of Political Science; students in other fields who wish to be prepared
to take an intelligent part in the political activities of their communities after
college.
The department will advise candidates for honors in regard to their fields of
special study and will direct their work.
Students proposing to teach history are advised to take at least four courses in
the department.
By permission of the department three hours of closely correlated work in
Geography will be accepted as part of a twelve-hour major in History.
Hygiene and Physical Education 113
By special permission certain courses of grade III in Economics and Sociology*
may be counted toward a major in Political Science.
Students are urgently advised to consult with the department before deciding upon
the courses to constitute a major in History.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
The purpose of the general examinations in History and in Political Science is
to test:
(1) General knowledge of the subject-matter of the courses composing the
major.
(2) Ability to analyze, correlate, and compare the subject-matter of these
courses.
(3) Power to judge and appraise movements and personalities.
The general examination will not assume a knowledge of fact outside the
subject-matter of the separate courses.
HYGIENE AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Professors: Eugene Clarence Howe, Ph.D.
Ruth Elliott, Ph.D. (Chairman)
Health Officer: Mary Fisher DeKruif, M.D.
Assistant Professors: Charlotte Genevieve MacEwan, M.S.
Elizabeth Beall, M.A.
Instructors: Margaret Johnson.
Fanny Garrison, B.A.
Marion Isabel Cook, M.A.
Harriet Lucy Clarke, B.A.
Katharine Fuller Wells, M.S.
Mary Elizabeth Powell, M.S.
Jean Helen Harris, M.S.
Elinor Marie Schroeder, M.A.
Recorder: Marion Dorothy Jaques, B.A.
Secretary: Anna Elizabeth Anderson.
Special Lecturers: William Russell MacAusland, M.D.
lecturer on orthopedics.
Andrew Roy MacAusland, M.D.
lecturer on orthopedics.
Loretta S. Cummins, M.D.
lecturer on hygiene of the skin.
Hilbert F. Day, Ph.B., M.D., F.A.C.S.
lecturer on preventive surgery.
Mary Fisher DeKruif, M.D.
LECTURER ON HEALTH PROBLEMS.
Leighton Johnson, M.D.
LECTURER ON HYGIENE OF NOSE AND THROAT.
Samuel R. Meaker, M.D.
LECTURER ON HYCIENE OF MENSTRUATION AND OTHER
GYNECOLOGICAL PROBLEMS.
Abraham Myerson, M.D.
LECTURER ON MENTAL HYGIENE.
Clifford L. Derick, M.D.
LECTURER ON INTERNAL MEDICINE.
I. UNDERGRADUATE COURSES
The Department of Hygiene and Physical Education aims to build up in each student
sufficient strength and vitality to meet the demands of a normally active life; to encourage an
appreciation and maintenance of fundamental health habits; to develop poise, a habit of
normal unstrained carriage, a sense of rhythm, coordination and motor judgment — to
enable her to handle herself confidently in any situation; to develop 6kill and permanent
interest in wholesome recreational activities adapted to individual needs and capacities; to
awaken in her a sense of self as a vital, responsible part of a group and the necessity for both
harmony and individuality in effective group work ; in short, the Department aims to help each
girl to adapt herself efficiently and happily to the demands made upon her by modern life.
114 Courses of Instruction
Two hours in Hygiene and Physical Education are prescribed for the degree.
One hour is met by course 120, Personal Hygiene; the second hour is met by two
periods per week of physical education activities during freshman and sophomore
years. Each of the two years' work is divided into Fall and Spring sport seasons,
and the Winter or indoor season.
All student choices for sports or winter work are subject to the approval of the
department on the basis of the results of the medical and physical examinations,
the results of the Motor Test, and the student's previous experience.
Sports: During the four sport seasons, the department requires that students
take one season of a team sport; two seasons of an individual sport; and the other
season either an individual sport, a team sport, or, in the spring, the Modern
Dance (outdoor). If a student can demonstrate fair skill in an individual sport,
or if she has a Life Saving Certificate, she may substitute team sports for
individual sports, or, in the spring, the Modern Dance (outdoor).
Winter Season : Freshmen who pass the Motor Test may elect any of the winter
activities listed under 121; those who fail the Motor Test may choose between
the Modern Dance and Gymnastics. All sophomores who have completed the
first year indoor work may elect any of the activities listed under 122. All
electives are subject to the approval of the department.
Posture Requirement: Every student must attain a grade of at least C—
on her official posture photograph before completing her requirement.
*120. Personal Hygiene.
The aim of this course is to present the principles of personal hygiene and
public health and to develop their intelligent application to the daily living of
college students and members of families and communities. Personal conferences
are arranged for each student.
Required of freshmen. One hour a week for a year, counting one hour toward
the degree. Dr. DeKruif, Miss Cook, Miss Powell, Miss Harris.
*121.f Sports and Indoor Activities for Freshmen.
Choice of the following:
Fall: Archery, basket ball, golf, hockey, riding, rowing, tennis, volley ball.
Winter: Folk dancing, gymnastics, modern dancing, tap dancing, winter riding.
Spring: Archery, golf, lacrosse, modern dancing (outdoor), outdoor games,
riding, rowing, tennis.
Required of freshmen, two periods a week for a year, counting one-half hour
toward the degree. The Staff.
122.f Sports and Indoor Activities for Sophomores.
Choice of the following:
Fall: Archery, basket ball, golf, hockey, riding, rowing, tennis, volley ball.
t In addition to the regular gymnasium costume required of all students the following require-
ments with approximate prices should be noted: crew (33.50), fencing ($8.00), modern dancing
(33.00; sandals optional, .90), tap dancing ($3.00), individual gymnastics ($3.00). Students are
required to furnish their own individual equipment for such activities as golf, riding and tennis.
Archery rental fee $1.00. Riding $20.00 fall or spring; $40.00 winter. Written permission from
the parents to elect riding and special permission for jumping must be filed with the Hygiene Re-
corder at the time of election.
Hygiene and Physical Education 115
Winter: Fencing, folk dancing, gymnastics, modern dancing, tap dancing,
winter riding.
Spring: Archery, golf, lacrosse, modern dancing (outdoor), outdoor games,
riding, rowing, tennis.
Required of sophomores who have completed course 121. Two periods a week for
a year, counting one-half hour toward the degree. The Staff.
*124. Individual Gymnastics for Freshmen.
Required of freshmen zvhose physical condition indicates the need of individualized
gymnastics. Two hours a week in the winter, with course 121 fall and spring,
counting one-half hour toward the degree. Miss Wells and Assistants.
125. Individual Gymnastics for Sophomores.
Required of sophomores whose physical condition indicates the need of individual-
ized gymnastics. Two hours a week in the winter, with course 122 fall and spring,
counting one-half hour toward the degree. Miss Wells and Assistants.
126. Voluntary Activities for all Students.
Students may elect with the permission of the department any of the activities
listed under courses 121 and 122 and, in the winter, indoor basket ball. Students
awarded dancing honors may elect modern dancing in the Junior Dance Group
or in Orchesis.
Open to all students. Two hours a week in the fall, winter, or spring terms. Not
to count toward the degree. The Staff.
*131. Restricted Activities for Freshmen.
Required of freshmen whose physical condition indicates the need of restricted
activities. Two hours a week in the winter, with course 121 fall and spring, counting
one-half hour toward the degree. Miss Clarke.
132. Restricted Activities for Sophomores.
Required of sophomores whose physical condition indicates the need of restricted
activities. Two hours a week in :he winter, with course 122 fall and spring, counting
one-half hour toward the degree. Miss Schroeder, Miss Johnson.
II. COURSES FOR THE CERTIFICATE AND M.S. DEGREE IN
HYGIENE AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
The Graduate Department of Hygiene and Physical Education is organized to meet the
insistent demand for women of liberal education and broad professional training in this
field. Its aim is to develop skilled teachers and supervisors, not only thoroughly conversant
with the existing traditional subject matter, but also prepared to contribute to the current
advance in educational and scientific research and its application in teaching and organiza-
tion.
A. Certificate in Hygiene and Physical Education.
(1) A two years' course especially designed for the training of teachers of
hygiene and physical education and leading to the Certificate of the Department
of Hygiene and Physical Education is offered to graduates of approved colleges.
In order to be admitted to this course candidates must be without organic dis-
1 16 Courses of Instruction
ease or serious functional disorder, with a keen sense of rhythm and the ability
to use the voice with ease and power.
Candidates should present for admission: elementary courses in the following
physical education activities: Fundamental Gymnastics (Danish) and Apparatus;
Modern Dancing, Tap Dancing; Archery, Baseball, Basket Ball, Golf, Hockey,
Lacrosse, Tennis, and Swimming as evidenced by a Red Cross Life Saving
Certificate; — one year of Chemistry, one year of Physics (Physics and Chemistry
completed in secondary school may be accepted), one semester of Psychology or
Educational Psychology, one semester of Principles of Education, and, in order
to meet the requirement for state teachers' certificates, Principles of Secondary
Education and History of Education. Whenever possible the equivalent of
Mammalian Anatomy (Zoology 301 and 313) and Physiology (Zoology 302)
should be presented for admission.f The courses required for the Certificate are
iisted on pages 116 to 120 inclusive.
(2) A five years' course is offered leading to the B.A. degree and the Certificate
of the Department of Hygiene and Physical Education. This course is open
only to candidates for the B.A. degree in residence at Wellesley College. Stu-
dents in this course receive the B.A. degree at the end of the fourth year and
complete in the fifth year the work required for the Certificate and, in special
cases, the requirements for the M.S. degree in Hygiene and Physical Education.
(See schedule of required courses for five-year students, page 120.)||
B. Master of Science in Hygiene and Physical Education.
Graduate students who have qualified for advanced study and research, who
have completed or are completing the requirements for the Certificate, and who
have given evidence of a reading knowledge of French or German, may register
for and complete in one or two years the twelve year-hours required for the M.S.
degree in Hygiene and Physical Education. This requirement may be fulfilled by
electives from the following: Hygiene and Physical Education 303, 321, 322, 323,
350, thesis, and, with special permission, graduate courses in closely allied fields. ||
202. Technique of Teaching Sports.
Advanced technique, methods of coaching and officiating, (a) Fall season —
basket ball, hockey; spring season — archery, lacrosse, tennis, track, (b) Fall
season — baseball; spring season — golf.
(a) Required of first-year graduate students who have completed at least elementary
courses in the activities listed. Five hours a week in the fall and spring with an
additional hour of lecture once a week in the winter.
(b) Required of second-year graduate students who have completed at least
elementary courses in the activities listed. Two hours a week in the fall and spring.
Miss Beall, Miss Harris, Mr. Howe, Miss Schroeder.
203. Technique of Teaching Gymnastics and Apparatus.
Lectures on gymnastic terminology, selection and adaptation of material,
progression; methods of presentation with practice in teaching.
t See undergraduate courses in Chemistry, Physics, Psychology, Education, Zoology.
|| See Bulletin of Graduate Department of Hygiene and Physical Education, and Wellesley Col-
lege Graduate Circular.
Hygiene and Physical Education 117
Required of first-year graduate students who have completed an elementary course
in fundamental gymnastics {Danish) with apparatus. Three hours a week in the
winter. Miss Beall, Miss Clarke.
204. Technique of Teaching Rhythmic Activities for Children, Folk
and Tap Dancing.
Elementary rhythmic work and dramatic play for small children; folk and
national dances with practice teaching; tap dancing.
Required of first-year graduate students. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss MacEwan, Miss Beall.
207. Measurement in Physical Education.
Instruments of precision and statistical methods as used in Hygiene and Physi-
cal Education. This course is preparatory to research and to the study of
problems of applied physiology.
Required of first-year graduate students. Two hours a week for a year: one hour
of lecture and one hour of laboratory, counting one hour a week for a year. This
course counts one hour toward the B.A. degree. Mr. Howe.
208. Technique of Teaching Play Activities.
Psychology of play; growth and development of the child; selection and adap-
tation of activities for different age periods. Playground management and
supervision. Study, demonstration and practice in methods of teaching story
plays, games of low and high organization, stunts, achievement tests, and social
games.
Required of first-year graduate students. Two hours a week for a year.
Miss Beall, Miss Cook.
210. Physical Examinations and First Aid.
Purpose and technique of the physical examination, methods of recording, and
the interpretation of findings. Study of first aid methods.
Required of first-year graduate students. Two hours a week for the second
semester. Miss Wells.
212. Introduction to the Study of Physical Education.
A brief historical survey of physical education in Europe and America is used
to show the relation between aims and current practice in physical education
and the social needs and political ideals of different periods. Present-day ob-
jectives are discussed and the distinctive values of type activities are suggested.
Required of first-year graduate students. One hour a week for the first semester.
Miss Elliott.
213. Technique of Teaching and Practice, the Modern Dance.
Lectures and practice. Sources, classification, selection and adaptation of
material; terminology; principles of progression; analysis of methods of presenta-
tion and teaching.
Required of second-year graduate students who have completed the equivalent of
the elementary and intermediate undergraduate courses in the modern dance.
1 1 8 Courses of Instruction
Students zvho have completed only the equivalent of an elementary course in the mod-
ern dance may register in this course provided they take an intermediate course in
the modern dance concurrently. Four hours a week during the winter: three hours
of practice teaching and one hour practice for skill during the first semester; four hours
practice for skill during the second semester. Miss MacEwan.
214. Supervised Teaching.
Students assist in the college undergraduate required activities and conduct,
under supervision, physical education programs in the public schools of Welles-
ley.
Required of second-year graduate students. Ten hours a week for a year, exclusive
of individual conferences. Miss Cook and the Staff.
216. Music in Relation to Dancing.
The purpose of this course is to furnish the basis for an intelligent appreciation
of musical composition from the standpoint of the dance. It includes discussion
and application of the principles of interpretation with emphasis on ear training,
fully illustrated with music. No special technical knowledge of music is re-
quired.
Open to first-year graduate students. One hour a week for the second semester.
Miss Johnson.
301. Mammalian Anatomy.
(Zoology 301 — See Department of Zoology and Physiology.)
313. Mammalian Anatomy.
(Zoology 313 — See Department of Zoology and Physiology.)
302. General Physiology.
(Zoology 302 — See Department of Zoology and Physiology.)
303. Kinesiology.
Lectures and recitations dealing with the anatomical mechanism of move-
ments; the roles of joint motion, muscular action, gravity, leverage, inertia,
and internal resistance in the production and modification of movements and
their effects.
Required of first-year graduate students. Courses 301 and 313 or their equivalents
must be taken concurrently if not presented as prerequisites. Three hours a week
for a year. This course counts three hours toward the B.A. degree, or {with sup-
plementary assignments) toward the M.S. degree in Hygiene and Physical Educa-
tion. Miss Powell.
304. Principles and Philosophy of Physical Education.
Study and discussion of the purposes, scope, and ideals of physical education,
including a detailed study of the main groups of activities usually included in a
program of physical education with special reference to the selection and adapta-
tion of the same to varying situations in the field.
Required of second-year graduate students. Two hours a week for a year.
Miss Elliott.
Hygiene and Physical Education 119
306. Organization and Management.
The study of procedures upon which the teaching situation depends; i.e., anal-
ysis and selection of activities, examination and grouping of pupils, testing the
results of teaching, evaluation of the teacher or leader, provision of equipment,
department organization. Illustrative problems are selected from those of
elementary or secondary school and the college.
Required of second-year graduate students. Two hours a week for the second
semester. Miss Elliott.
309. Reconstructive Hygiene.
Conditions which affect general health; application of hygiene, corrective ex-
ercise, and massage in treatment. Approximately 30 lectures in this course are
given by orthopedic and medical specialists. Clinical demonstration of ortho-
pedic material is given in the Carney Hospital, Boston, and other clinics.
Required of second-year graduate students. Course 303 or its equivalent is
prerequisite. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Wells, Dr. MacAusland, and other Lecturers.
317. Problems of Organization and Administration. (Not given in
1935-36.)
Organization and management studied by field trips, discussion, and library
investigation. Records, reports and budgets, construction and upkeep of build-
ings and sports fields.
Open to second-year graduate students registered in course 306. One hour a week
for the second semester. Miss Elliott.
321. Applied Physiology.
The application of human physiology to the problems of hygiene and physical
education. Functional, ability, and achievement tests, nutritional standards.
Advanced problems in nutrition and growth, fatigue, coordination and training.
Required of second-year graduate students. Hygiene 207 and Zoology 302, or
their equivalents, are prerequisite. Course 207 may be taken concurrently with the
permission of the instructor. Three hours a week of lecture and recitation for a year,
and one two-hour laboratory period in the winter, counting three hours a week for a
year. This course counts three hours toward the M.S. degree in Hygiene and
Physical Education. Mr. Howe, Miss Powell.
322. Health Problems of School and Community.
The problems of growth, of health instruction, and environmental hygiene in
the solution of which the teacher in physical education should be prepared to
assist, advise or supervise. Students take active part in a school health program
of measurement and instruction.
Required of second-year graduate students. Five periods a week; in general three
of lecture and two of practical work, counting three hours a week for a year. This
course counts three hours toward the M.S. degree in Hygiene and Physical Edu-
cation. Mr. Howe, Miss Cook.
323. Seminar in Hygiene and Physical Education. (Not given in 1935-
36.)
Reading, investigation, and reports on current problems in hygiene and physi-
cal education; conferences; presentation of one or more papers for discussion.
i2o Courses of Instruction
Open to second-year graduate students. One or more semester hours. This course
counts toward the M.S. degree in Hygiene and Physical Education.
Miss Elliott, Mr. Howe.
350. Research or Individual Study.
With the permission of the department, qualified graduate students may-
arrange for directed individual study in Hygiene and Physical Education.
Open to second-year graduate students. One to three hours a week for a year.
This course counts toward the M.S. degree in Hygiene and Physical Education.
DIRECTIONS FOR UNDERGRADUATES WHO ARE CANDIDATES FOR THE
B.A. DEGREE AND FOR THE CERTIFICATE OF THE DEPARTMENT OF
HYGIENE AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Five years are required to complete the work for both degree and certificate.
The work for the degree may be completed in four years.
A student may enter this five-year course at the beginning of her freshman,
sophomore, or junior year. The College Recorder will furnish the student with
a form to be presented to the chairman of the department, since permission to
register for the five-year course must be obtained from the chairman by each
applicant. By the end of the sophomore year a student should have com-
pleted Hygiene and Physical Education 120, 121, 122, Biblical History 112
or 104, Chemistry 101, Psychology 101, Physics 101, the prescribed courses in
English Composition, and Speech, or should offer satisfactory equivalents.
A full major in Zoology is an advantage. The required work for the last three
years is as follows:
Junior Year: Courses 126, 204, 210, 212, Education 201, Zoology 301, 313.
Hygiene 207 and Zoology 302 may be taken in the junior or in the senior year.
Senior Year: Courses 126, 202(a), 203, 208, 303, and Hygiene 207 and Zoology
302, if not completed in the junior year.
Suggested Electives: Courses in French or German, Economics, Sociology,
Psychology, additional courses in Zoology, Hygiene 216, and, in order to meet
the requirement for state teachers' certificates, Principles of Secondary Educa-
tion and History of Education.
Fifth Year: Courses 202 (b), 213, 214, 304, 306, 309, 321, 322; and Thesis for
the candidates for the M.S. degree in Hygiene and Physical Education.
Students are referred to the Bulletin of the Graduate Department of Hygiene
and Physical Education.
ITALIAN
Professor: Gabriella Bosano, Dottore in Filologia Moderna (Chairman)
Assistant Professor: Angeline La Plana, Dottore in Lettere.
Instructor: Maria Priglmeir Bizzoni, M.A.
The language of the classroom is Italian except for occasional necessary explanations of
grammar and idiom.
*101. Elementary Course.
Grammar, with written and oral exercises; reading and sight translation;
conversation. In the second semester a general view of Italian civilization is
given through reading and conversation.
Italian 121
Open to students who do not present Italian for admission. Three hours a week
for a year. Miss Bosano, Miss La Piana, Miss Bizzoni.
*102. Practical Phonetics.
Exercises in pronunciation based on reading aloud short passages of prose and
poetry. Emphasis on rhythm and melody of the spoken language and on prac-
tical application of scientific phonetics.
Open to students who are taking course 101 and required of students majoring in
Italian. One hour a week for a year. Miss Bizzoni.
201. History of Italian Literature in the Twentieth Century.
Emphasis on drama and short stories.
Open to students who have completed course 101 or equivalent. Three hours a
week for a year. Miss La Piana.
202. History of Italian Literature in the Nineteenth Century.
Emphasis on Italian romanticism and the classical reaction, through a detailed
study of the works of A. Manzoni and G. Carducci.
Open to students who have completed course 101 or equivalent. Three hours a
week for a year. Miss Bosano.
205. Composition.
A study of the most difficult parts of Italian grammar and syntax. Free
composition with special attention to letter writing. The subject-matter will
deal chiefly with contemporary Italy.
Open to students who have completed course 101 and are taking course 201 or 202.
Two hours a week for the first semester. Miss Bizzoni.
206. Conversation.
Dealing especially with the various aspects of Italian contemporary life; to
give to the student a larger vocabulary and correct pronunciation, ease and
freedom of expression and clear phrasing.
Open to students who have completed course 101 and are taking course 201 or 202.
Two hours a week for the second semester. Miss Bizzoni.
301. f Dante and His Time.
The study of the outstanding characteristics of the Middle Ages and of its
writers. The reading of Dante's Divina Commedia and Vita Nuova in the orig-
inal and in full.
Open on consultation with the instructor to juniors and seniors who have com-
pleted or are taking course 201 or 202. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Bosano.
Note: — The Dante Society offers an annual prize of one hundred dollars for
the best essay on a subject drawn from the life or works of Dante. The compe-
tition is open to students or graduates of not more than three years' standing
f It will be the privilege of students in courses 301, 30S, 306, and 307 to have access to the manu-
script* and early — often contemporary — editions of Italian authors contained in the Frances
Pearsons Plimpton Collection.
122 Courses of Instruction
from colleges or universities in the United States. For subjects and conditions
consult page 417 of the Harvard University Catalogue, 1934-35.
305.$ Composition.
A comparative study of Italian grammar with reference to Latin and to the
Romance languages. A careful analysis of passages from masterpieces. Trans-
lation from English into Italian. Free composition with special attention to
essays and literary criticism.
Open to students who have completed courses 101, 201 or 202, and are taking
course 301 or 307. Two hours a week for the second semester. Miss Bizzoni.
306.$ Conversation.
Italian civilization as seen in the development of art and philosophy; to give
to students a further training in diction and in expressing themselves freely on a
given subject.
Open to students who have completed courses 101, 201 or 202, and are taking
course 301 or 307. Two hours a week for the first semester. Miss Bizzoni.
307.$ Drama and Short Stories in the Italian Renaissance. (Not offered
in 1935-36.)
Emphasis on the plays of Poliziano, Guarini, Machiavelli, Ariosto, Tasso,
Aretino, and Lasca, and on the short stories of Boccaccio and Bandello.
Open on consultation with the instructor to juniors and seniors who have com-
pleted or are taking course 301. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Bosano.
308. History and Epics in the Italian Renaissance.
A detailed study of Machiavelli's and Guicciardini's works, considered as
literary masterpieces, and the poems of Pulci, Boiardo, Ariosto, and Tasso.
Open on consultation with the instructor to juniors and seniors who have com-
pleted or are taking course 301. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Bosano.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
A major in Italian is generally based on course 101. It is very desirable that
students majoring in Italian should have had or be taking a college course in
Latin or in one of the Romance languages, and should elect such courses in
History and Art as deal in whole or in part with Italian civilization and culture.
Such courses will be required of students working for honors.
Students taking a twelve-hour major should include courses 102, 201 or 202,
301, 305, 306, 307.
Students taking a fifteen-hour major should include courses 102, 201, 202, 301,
305, 306, 307.
Note: — Course 101 may not count toward the major.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
The general examination for students taking a major in Italian will be based
largely on the work done in the courses of grade II and III, and will be of such a
character as to bring out the interrelation of these courses (of grade II and III),
bearing in mind that while some appear to be more closely articulated than others,
% See footnote on page 121.
Latin 123
they all make their contribution to the cultural development of Italian life.
Some of the questions will have a direct bearing on the content of the courses,
while others will be of a more general character, and will best be answered by-
opinions expressed and deductions drawn.
The results of the elementary work will appear in the degree of accuracy and
ease of expression shown in the written portion of the examination, but especially
in translating from English into Italian and vice versa.
The chairman of the department will be ready to answer any questions that
the above statement has not made clear.
LATIN
Professors: Caroline Rebecca Fletcher, M.A.
Anna Bertha Miller, Ph.D. (Chairman)
Associate Professor: Helen Hull Law, Ph.D.
Assistant Professor: Dorothy Mae Robathan,' Ph.D.
*101. Introduction to Latin Literature.
A brief survey of the literature based upon representative authors from the
most important fields of verse and prose: one comedy of Terence or Plautus; the
epic form in Ennius, Lucretius, and Ovid; lyrics of Catullus and Horace; epi-
grams of Martial; Cicero's essays, and letters of Cicero and Pliny; Livy's history
of early Rome. The course serves to correlate the student's earlier reading in
Latin, and to prepare for more intensive study of special authors. Emphasis is
placed upon the continuity of Latin thought or literary form as an influence on
modern literature and civilization.
Open to students who present four units in Latin for admission, or have completed
course 103. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Fletcher, Miss Miller, Miss Robathan.
*103. Vergil (JEneid l-VT) or Cicero (Orations, Letters).
The choice of author will depend upon the preparation of the students.
Open to students only who present three units in Latin for admission. Students
who have satisfactorily completed four units, even though only three have been offered
for admission, should elect course 101. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Fletcher.
*104. Roman Life and Customs.
A study of Roman civilization through the medium of its social conditions,
religious customs, education, amusements, buildings, etc. Lectures will be illus-
trated by lantern slides, photographs, coins, and other Roman antiquities. The
required reading will be in English.
This course may not be counted toward a twelve-hour major in Latin. Open to
all undergraduates. Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Miller.
*105. Latin Literature in English Translations.
The most important poets and prose writers will be read in translation, with
emphasis upon those authors who have especially influenced modern forms of
literature. Lectures on the development of Latin literature will include also the
•Absent on leave for the second semester.
124 Courses of Instruction
later writers of the empire who contributed largely to the thought of the Middle
Ages.
This course may not be counted toward a twelve-hour major in Latin. Open to all
undergraduates. Three hours a week for the second semester. Miss Miller
201. Horace.
A study of Horace's lyric verse in the Odes and Epodes, supplemented by selec-
tions from the Epistles as a basis for appreciation of the poet's art.
Open to students who have completed course 101, and, by permission of the depart-
ment, to qualified juniors and seniors without prerequisite. Three hours a week for
the first semester. Miss Miller.
202. Vergil. (Not given in 1935-36.)
Selections from the Eclogues, Georgics, and JEneid. Study of the poet's early
work in pastoral romance, and his later development through didactic epic, the
Georgics, to the heroic epic of the JEneid.
Open to students who have completed course 101, and, by permission of the depart-
ment, to qualified juniors and seniors without prerequisite. Three hours a week for
the first semester. Miss Fletcher.
204. Tacitus and Pliny.
The Agricola of Tacitus, with selections from the Histories; Pliny's Letters.
Reports on special topics concerned with the literary style and social background
of these authors.
Open to students who have completed a semester course of grade II. Three hours a
week for the second semester. Miss Miller.
205. Cicero's Philosophical Works. (Not given in 1935-36.)
Selections from the Tusculan Disputations, the De Officiis and other works.
Open to students who have completed a semester course of grade II. Three hours
a week for the second semester. Miss Fletcher.
206. Latin Writing.
Practice in turning connected English passages into Latin. Emphasis is
placed upon accuracy of expression and correct idiom.
Open to students who have completed a course of grade I. One hour a week for a
year. Miss Fletcher, Miss Robathan.
211. Mediaeval Latin. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Readings from Latin writers in the fields of literature, history, and philosophy
of the Middle Ages. Selections include Cassiodorus, Gregory the Great, Bede,
Geoffrey of Monmouth, John the Scot, Erasmus, Abelard, the chroniclers of the
Crusades, the romancers of the Gesta Romanorum, religious drama, songs of the
Goliards, and church hymns. Only so much attention will be given to linguistic
study as the reading requires.
Open to students who have completed one full course in the department, and to
juniors and seniors who present four units in Latin for admission and who are giving
special attention to Mediaval Art, History, or Literature. Three hours a week for
the second semester. Miss Miller.
Latin 125
301. Comedy. Plautus and Terence.
Careful study of two plays followed by the rapid reading of others. The course
includes a study of the sources of Latin comedy, its linguistic and literary fea-
tures, and its influence upon later literature.
Open to students who have completed two full courses. Three hours a week for
the second semester. Miss Law.
302. Satire. Horace and Juvenal.
Some attention is paid to the origin and development of satire as a literary
form. The chief emphasis is placed upon the satires of Horace and Juvenal, but
the work of other Roman satirists is studied by special topics and reports. Sight
reading in Martial.
Open to students who have completed two full courses. Three hours a week for the
first semester. Miss Robathan.
303. Latin Epigraphy. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Selected inscriptions will be studied both for their form and for their content
as sources for the study of Roman public and private life.
Open to students who have completed three full courses, and, with the permission
of the department, to qualified students who have completed two full courses. Three
hours a week for the first semester. Miss Robathan.
304. Topography of Rome.
A study is made of the early history of the city, its development, the construc-
tion and furnishings of typical public and private buildings in Rome and in
provincial towns. Such study of the material surroundings is connected with
the literary and social development of the Roman people, and is introductory to
further work in classical archaeology.
Open to students who have completed three full courses, and, with the permission of
the department, to qualified students who have completed two full courses. Three
hours a week for the first semester. Miss Robathan.
305. Religious and Political Institutions of the Roman Republic.
(Not offered in 1935-36.)
Study of the sources will be based on the first ten books of Livy. Lectures
and collateral reading.
Open to students who have completed two full courses. Three hours a week for the
first semester. Miss Fletcher.
306. Studies in Roman Religion. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Study of the private cult will precede that of the institutions of the State
religion. The chief emphasis will be upon the Roman republican period, but the
influence of the Oriental cults of imperial times will be presented in special topics.
While courses 305 and 306 may be elected as semester courses, the plan of the
work is continuous, and it is strongly advised that course 305 be taken in prepara-
tion for course 306.
Open to students who have completed two full courses. Three hours a week for the
second semester. Miss Fletcher
126 Courses of Instruction
307. Latin Literature of the Early Christian Period.
Readings from the Early Christian Apologists and Fathers illustrating the
contact of Christian ideals with Pagan thought and civilization. Latin hymns.
This course may count as an elective in the department of Biblical History.
The course is given in one weekly appointment, running into extra-schedule
hours.
Open to students who have completed three full courses, and, with the permission of
the department, to qualified students who have completed two full courses. Three
hours a week for the second semester. Miss Miller.
308. Latin Writing. Advanced Course.
Open at the discretion of the instructor to students who have completed course 206.
One hour a week for a year. Miss Fletcher.
309. Prose Literature of the Roman Empire.
The aim of this course is to secure an acquaintance with many representative
authors of the Roman Empire, and to show the interest and value of the "Silver
Latinity" in writers of the later Imperial period. The readings will vary from
year to year, with emphasis on history, philosophy, or fiction as the major study.
Individual assignments of reading and reports are an important feature of the
course. The course is given in one weekly appointment, running into extra-
schedule hours.
Open to students who have completed three full courses, and, with the permission of
the department, to qualified students who have completed two full courses. Three
hours a week for the first semester. Miss Miller.
310. Survey of Latin Poetry. Poetry of the Republic.
Some study is given to the beginning of Latin poetry and the earlier poets,
but the main emphasis is placed upon the poets of the Ciceronian Age, Catullus
and Lucretius.
Open to students who have completed three full courses. Three hours a week for
the first semester. Miss Fletcher.
312. Survey of Latin Poetry. Poetry of the Empire.
The aim of this course is to secure an acquaintance with representative poets
of the period, and to show the interest and the value of the later Latin poetry.
Rapid reading without translation is one of the features of this course.
Open to students who have completed three full courses. Three hours a week for
the second semester. Miss Fletcher.
321. History of Latin Literature.
The design of this course is to enable a graduate student to study the authors
and periods and forms of literature which were not included in her undergraduate
work, and thus to complete the work done in individual courses by a compre-
hensive view of Latin literature as a whole and its place in world literature. The
course demands much independent work and is intended to meet individual
needs.
Open to graduate students only. One to three hours a week for a year.
The Teaching Staff.
Mathematics 127
No students arc recommended as teachers of Latin who have not had at least
one full course of grade III and course 206.
Courses 320, 321 in Art, may be counted toward the major in Latin by stu-
dents who are taking at the same time a course of grade III in Latin.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
A major in Latin is based on course 101. Course 103 may not be counted in
work for concentration. Students intending to major in Latin are strongly ad-
vised to take at least one course in Greek, and a course in Roman History.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
Ever>' student who presents herself for the general examination in Latin shall
be required to show:
(1) Her ability to use the language by translation at sight of passages in prose
and verse.
(2) A general knowledge of the history of Latin literature from its beginnings
through the reign of Trajan, and of as much of the historical and social back-
ground as is necessary for understanding the literature.
(3) Familiarity with the specific fields of literature which have been covered
in the courses elected by the individual student.
MATHEMATICS
Professor: Mabel Minerva Young, Ph.D. (Chairman)
Associate Professor: Lennie Phoebe Copeland, Ph.D.
Assistant Professor: Marion Elizabeth Stark, Ph.D.
Instructor: Helen Gertrude Russell, Ph.D.
Course 106 is for students who have not had a course in trigonometry, 107 is for those
who have spent a half-year in studying this subject.
Students should consult the announcements of the departments of Astronomy and
Physics for courses to which mathematics is prerequisite.
*106. Trigonometry, Higher Algebra, Analytic Geometry.
This course aims to give students some acquaintance with advanced methods
in mathematics, as well as with advanced subjects. The topics chosen have a
close connection with earlier work, and are essential for all later work. The
trigonometry carries farther the beginnings made in elementary algebra, the
higher algebra introduces some fundamental notions of the calculus, and the
analytic (that is, algebraic) geometry is closely related to earlier work in graphs,
and, by using algebra, gives a new method of studying geometric figures, includ-
ing the conic sections.
Open to students who present three units in mathematics for admission. Three
hours a week for a year.
Miss Young, Miss Copeland, Miss Stark, Miss Russell.
*107. Higher Algebra and Analytic Geometry.
This course is similar to 106, except that it assumes an acquaintance with
trigonometry. This makes it possible to carry farther the two other subjects.
Open to students who present four units in mathematics {or admission, or have
had a course in trigonometry equivalent to that outlined by the College Entrance
Examination Board. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Russell.
128 Courses of Instruction
202. Differential and Integral Calculus.
A study of derivatives and rates of change, with applications to the conic
sections and curves of higher order, and to series; integration as the inverse of
differentiation and as a process of summation, with some work on the lengths of
curves, on areas and on volumes.
Open to students who have completed course 106 or 107. Three hours a week for a
year. Miss Copeland, Miss Stark.
203. History of Elementary Mathematics. (Not given in 1935-36.)
The evolution of the fundamental concepts of mathematics. Great mathe-
maticians and their chief contributions to elementary mathematics. A brief
survey of modern developments in mathematics and its literature. A standard
text is used, supplemented by lectures and short reports chiefly based upon rare
old books in the mathematical library.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking course 202. Three
hours a week for the second semester. Miss Copeland.
204. Introduction to the Theory of Statistics.
Statistical methods, with special emphasis on the use of elementary mathe-
matics in the development of theory and in practice.
Open to students who have completed course 106 or 107. One period of lecture
with the equivalent of one laboratory period a week, counting one hour a week for a
year. This course counts toward the degree, but not toward a major in the depart-
ment. Miss Young.
206.f Descriptive Geometry I.
The theory and practice of the representation of geometric figures. The use
of two or more planes of projection in representing lines, surfaces, and solids.
Intersections and shadows.
Open to students who have completed or are taking course 202, and, by special
permission, to a limited number who have completed course 106 or 107. All must
have a knowledge of the elements of solid geometry. The department will give direc-
tions for gaining readily the necessary acquaintance with this subject. One period
of lecture with one period of laboratory a week, counting one hour a week for a year.
Miss Stark.
208. Descriptive Geometry II.
Special methods for the construction of curves and solids. Intersections of
curved surfaces. Different types of perspective.
Open to students who have completed course 206. One period of lecture with the
equivalent of one laboratory period a week, counting one hour a week for a year.
Miss Stark.
302. Higher Analysis.
The number system of algebra; continuity and other properties of functions;
convergence of series; representation of functions by power series; theory of
t Course 206 will not be offered in 1936-37.
Mathematics 129
integration. Infinite products, infinite integrals, Fourier series, and other allied
subjects.
Open to students who have completed course 202. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Stark, Miss Russell.
303.f Differential Equations.
An introductory course in ordinary and partial differential equations.
Open to students who have completed course 202. Three hours a week for the first
semester. Miss Copeland.
304. Introduction to Modern Algebraic Theory.
Determinants, matrices, systems of linear equations, symmetric functions,
eliminants, resultants, discriminants, invariants and covariants, quadratic forms.
Open to students who have completed course 202. Three hours a week for the
second semester. Miss Copeland.
305. Introduction to Differential Geometry. (Not given in 1935-36.)
Calculus applied to geometry of two and three dimensions, including a study
of twisted curves.
Open to students who have completed course 202. Three hours a week for the
first semester. Miss Russell.
306. Modern Synthetic Geometry.
Fundamental concepts underlying modern geometry; harmonic forms; pro-
jective and metrical properties of forms of first and second orders in plane and in
sheaf; ruled surfaces of second order; inversion.
Open to students who have completed course 202. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Young.
307. Advanced Geometry. (Not given in 1935-36.)
An introduction to the study of plane curves. Both algebraic and synthetic
methods will be used. The theory of the conic will be extended, and curves of
the third order studied. Lectures, reading, and discussion.
Open to students who have completed course 306, and have completed or are taking
three additional hours of grade III. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Young.
308. Functions of a Complex Variable.
Elementary treatment of analytic functions. Infinite series and products,
with applications to elliptic functions.
Open to students who have completed course 302. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Copeland.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
For a major or minor or for honors in mathematics course 202 is required as a
basis.
A major must include at least six hours of grade III.
t Physics 305, if preceded by Mathematics 303, may be counted toward a major in mathematics.
13° Courses of Instruction
The ability to read French, German, or Italian is required in all grade III
courses. A reading knowledge of more than one of these languages is desirable.
Only those students who have completed satisfactorily at least three hours of
grade III in the department will be recommended as teachers of mathematics.
SPECIAL COURSE
Not counted in the majors: Course 204.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
Modern mathematics is a many sided subject, including fields widely diverse
in nature. Work in each of these fields, however, requires as a basis an under-
standing of the fundamental principles and methods of analytic geometry and
the differential and integral calculus. This implies skill in the use of elementary
algebra, geometry, and trigonometry as tools. Each student majoring in mathe-
matics is therefore expected to spend two years in gaining acquaintance with the
elements of these essential subjects. On this foundation rests more advanced
work of three types: analysis, geometry, and applied mathematics. The work
offered by the department in these fields is as follows:
Analysis: Courses 302, 303, 304, 308.
Geometry: Courses 206, 208, 305, 306, 307.
Applied Mathematics: Courses 206, 208, 303, Physics 305, Astronomy 302
or 303.
Course 203, History of Mathematics, is supplementary to all these fields.
The general examination will include some questions on the fundamental
subjects and some on the more advanced subjects, with special emphasis on the
interrelations between the courses. In these questions students will have a wide
range of choice, determined partly by their electives, but each one will be ex-
pected to answer some elementary and some more advanced questions.
MUSIC
Professor: Howard Hinners, B.A. (Chairman)
Assistant Professor: Helen Joy Sleeper, M.A., Mus.B.
Visiting Lecturer: Walter Piston, B.A.
Instructors: Edward Barry Greene, B.A.
DIRECTOR OF CHOIR
Hubert Weldon Lamb, B.A.
Assistant: Barbara Goldsmith Trask, B.A.
(For list of Instructors in Practical Music, see page 133)
I. MUSICAL THEORY
The courses in theory and history are open to all students without regard to previous
musical knowledge, and count toward the B.A. degree. The history and theory courses are
subject to no separate tuition fee. Courses 206, 207, 305, 306, 309, 313, 314, and 316 are
designed especially for those students who desire to gain an appreciative knowledge of
musical literature.
A limited number of tickets for reserved seats at the concerts of the Boston Symphony
Orchestra in Symphony Hall, Boston, are free to students who are able to use them
profitably.
*101. Elements of Music.
Rudiments, major, minor and ecclesiastical modes, modality and tonality,
intervals, chord construction, analysis of the mechanism of modulation. Aural
Music 131
drill in the identification of the roots of triads and dominant seventh chords and
their inversions. Intensive work in ear-training and sight-singing, designed to
develop a keen ear for intervals, rhythmic patterns and tonal relations.
Open to students who do not offer harmony for admission. This course or course
102 or, by special permission, course 201 or 203 or 207 is required of all freshmen
who elect practical music. Not to be counted toward a major. Three hours a week
for a year. Miss Sleeper, Mr. Greene.
*102. Introduction to the History of Music.
An analytical study, for students without previous training, of the essentials
of musical expression and the principles of harmonic design as exemplified in the
music of the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. Intended for those who do not
expect to major in music.
Open to students who do not offer harmony for admission. This course may be
taken to fulfill the theory requirement for practical music. Not to be counted toward
a major. Students taking this course may not also elect either course 101 or 206.
Three hours a week for a year. Miss Sleeper.
*201. Harmony.
Major and minor triads and their inversions, elementary modulation, suspen-
sions and other non-harmonic tones. Harmonization — both written and at the
keyboard — of simple melodies and basses, figured and unfigured. Dictation
and analysis.
Open to students offering harmony for admission and to those who have completed
course 101, or who can satisfy the instructor, by a special test in ear-training, of their
ability to take the course. All candidates for the course must have an elementary
knowledge of piano or organ playing sufficient to enable them to play simple hymn-
tunes at sight. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Hinners.
*203. Elementary Counterpoint.
Counterpoint in two and three voices. Analysis.
Open to students offering harmony for admission and to those who have completed
course 101, or who can satisfy the instructor, by a special test in ear-training, of
their ability to take the course. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Lamb.
205. Sound (Physics 205. See Department of Physics).
206. Introduction to Musical Literature.
An historical survey course designed to develop the student's musical under-
standing, insight, and powers of observation through the study of music of various
styles and periods. No previous knowledge of music is required.
Open only to juniors and seniors who have had no other course in the department.
Not to be counted toward a major. Three hours of lecture and one section meeting a
week, counting three hours a week for a year. Mr. Greene, Miss Trask.
*207. Instrumental Music
Orchestral, keyboard, and chamber music of the seventeenth, eighteenth, and
nineteenth centuries. A few representative works by classic and romantic
composers will be selected for detailed study.
132 Courses of Instruction
Open to students who offered harmony for admission or who have completed course
101 or 102. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Lamb.
303. Advanced Counterpoint and Composition. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Counterpoint in four voices; double and imitative counterpoint. Composi-
tion in the simpler contrapuntal forms: canon, motet, invention, choral prelude,
and variations.
Open to graduate students and approved undergraduates who have completed
courses 203 and 310 and, by special permission, to students who are taking 310.
Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Hinners.
305. Choral Music.
Mediaeval and Renaissance music as represented by Gregorian chant, trouba-
dour songs, and the rise of polyphony. Special emphasis is given to the cul-
minating schools of the sixteenth century, with detailed study of selected works
by Palestrina, Lassus, Victoria, and the English Madrigalists.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 201 or 203 or 207. Three
hours a week for the first semester. Miss Sleeper.
306. Beethoven and Wagner. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
An intensive course devoted to the study of selected sonatas, chamber music,
and symphonies of Beethoven and the music dramas of Wagner. The aim of
the course will be to give an intimate knowledge of the two composers' works
and to estimate their place in musical history.
Open to students who have completed course 201 or 203 or 207. Three hours a
week for a year. Miss Sleeper.
309. Bach.
An intensive study of selected masterpieces from among the choral, organ,
clavier, and orchestral works, with special reference to the forms perfected by
Bach, and his place in the history of music.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 305. Three hours a week
for the second semester. Miss Sleeper.
310. Advanced Harmony.
Dominant and secondary seventh and ninth chords, altered chords and mod-
ulation to remote keys. Harmonization of more extended melodies and basses,
involving some of the elementary principles of musical composition. Advanced
dictation, keyboard work, and analysis.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 201. Three hours a week
for a year. Mr. Hinners.
313. Symphonic Music.
Origin and development through the seventeenth century. The perfected
forms of the classic period. Chief tendencies of the nineteenth century, leading
to a consideration of modern works. The emphasis of the first semester will be
on the symphonies of Beethoven, of the second semester on those of Brahms.
Open to graduate students and to undergraduates who have completed courses
201 and 305-309 or 306. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Lamb.
Music 133
314. Development of Dramatic Music.
The progress of sacred and secular forms used in dramatic music from the
opening of the seventeenth century to the present. Intensive study will be made
of a few representative works.
Open to students who have completed course 201 or 203 or 207. Three hours a
week for the first semester. Mr. Hinners.
315. Instrumentation.
The technique, timbres and ensemble of the instruments of the modern or-
chestra. Drill in transposition by clef and practice in simple score-reading.
Elementary orchestration. The mechanism and scope of the various instru-
ments will be illustrated by members of the Boston Symphony Orchestra.
Open to graduates and to approved juniors and seniors who have completed courses
201, 203, and 310; and by special permission to students who have completed course
201 , and 203 or 310, and are taking 310 or 203. Three hours a week for a year.
Mr. Piston.
316. Chamber Music.
The string fantasias and suites of the seventeenth century, the rise of the string
quartet, chamber works of Haydn, Mozart, Beethoven, Brahms, and the
moderns.
Open to students who have completed course 201 or 203 or 207. Three hours a
week for the second semester. Mr. Hinners.
II. PRACTICAL MUSIC (INSTRUMENTAL AND VOCAL LESSONS)
Instructors in Practical Music: Jean Evelyn Wilder, B.A. (Piano)
Gladys Avery Lebert (Voice)
Yves Chardon (Violoncello)
Clarence Everett Waiters, Mus.M., F.A.G.O. (Organ)
Richard Burgin (Violin)
David Barnett, B.A. (Piano)
Malcolm Haughton Holmes, B.S. (Conductor of
Orchestra)
Attention is called to the fact that a student need not necessarily spend five years in college in
order to carry on practical music at the same time with the academic course. See (a) following.
Freshmen may not elect instrumental or vocal music without course 101 or course 102 or,
by special permission, course 201 or 203 or 207. There is an extra charge for instrumental
or vocal music, and work in this field is not credited toward the B.A. degree.
Practical music, subject to the restrictions above and under paragraph (a)
below, is an elective, and students should notify the department of their election
of the subject in the usual manner and at the proper time. It is offered to all
students, whether candidates for degrees or not, as stated below:
(a) Candidates for the B.A. degree who propose to spend but four years in college
may take practical music, provided that they obtain each year the permission of
the Dean as well as of the chairman of the department; they must also take a full
course in Musical Theory, unless they have completed two three-hour courses
in the subject.
{b) Candidates for the B.A. degree who are willing to devote five years to the
college course will be permitted to take practical music each year of the course,
governed by the restriction laid down in (a).
134 Courses of Instruction
(c) Candidates for the B.A. degree who wish also the Certificate of t lie Depart-
ment of Music should plan to devote five years to the college course. Such students
are required to take practical music, two lessons a week, throughout the five
years. They must complete, satisfactorily to the department, a course in the
literature of the instrument chosen or of the voice; they must apply for the certifi-
cate at least three years in advance. The study of Musical Theory is required
throughout the course.
(d) Students not candidates for the B.A. degree who desire to specialize in
music must meet the requirements prescribed for admission to the freshman class,
and must in addition pass an entrance examination in Harmony. Special stu-
dents must take both Musical Theory and vocal or instrumental lessons, two a
week, with not less than twelve hours of weekly practice. They must also take
from six to nine hours per week of academic work, including Musical Theory, as
may be decided in consultation with the Dean.
(e) Students not candidates for the B.A. degree who wish the Certificate of
the Department of Music must comply with the conditions laid down in (d);
moreover, the academic work taken must include modern languages. Such stu-
dents must apply for the certificate on entering the department, and must have
already acquired the fundamental technique of the instrument chosen or of the
voice. The time occupied in study for the certificate depends upon the talent,
upon the proficiency of the student at entrance, and upon her subsequent dili-
gence; but in general four years at least are necessary. The various courses
are so arranged that the pupil on completion will have an acquaintance with the
best musical literature.
(/) Graduates of Wellesley College or of other institutions may make special
arrangement for instrumental or vocal lessons.
(g) Permission to practice in Music Hall cannot be given to students not regu-
larly registered in the department.
(h) Students whose progress is not satisfactory may be required to discon-
tinue their lessons.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
For a twelve-hour major, either of the following sequences is required:
(1) 201, 310, 207 or 306 and any grade III history course.
(2) 201, 203, 310 and 207 or 306.
For a fifteen-hour major, the following courses are required: 201, 203, 310,
207 or 306 and any grade III history course.
Course 101, which does not count toward a major, is a prerequisite to any of
the above sequences.
The new requirements for the major, as stated above, apply only to the class
of 1937 and thereafter.
Physics 205, Latin 211, courses in modern languages, European history, litera-
ture, and art are recommended to major students as correlative courses.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
The general examination will be a test of the student's knowledge of (1)
musical theory (harmony, counterpoint, and composition); and (2) music his-
Philosophy and Psychology 135
tory and appreciation, including familiarity with outstanding examples of the
work of leading composers studied in each course.
Required questions will deal with courses taken by all the major students.
Questions on other courses will be wholly or partly optional.
PHILOSOPHY AND PSYCHOLOGY
Professors: Tbomas Hayes Procter, Ph.D. (Chairman)
Edna Frances Heidbreoer, Ph.D.
Associate Professors: Michael Jacob Zigler, Ph.D.
Mary Lowell Coolidce, Ph.D.
Assistant Professor: Edith Brandt Mallory, Ph.D.
Instructor: Virginia Onderdonk, B.A.
Assistants: Grace Allerton Andrews, M.A.
Thelma Gorfinkle Alpfr, M.A.
Louisf Ward Gates, M.A.
Alfred Harold Holway, M.S.
Harriet Faust Metzcer, B.A.
I. PSYCHOLOGY
*101. Introductory Course in Psychology.
This course is designed to secure to students a comprehensive survey of the
field of general psychology, to provide a psychological basis for their study of
philosophy, of sociology, and of education and to fit them for more advanced
psychological work. Texts: Woodworth, Psychology; Warren and Carmichael,
Elements of Human Psychology; Gault and Howard, An Outline of General
Psychology; Murphy, General Psychology.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors and, by special permission, to approved
freshmen. Three hours a week for a semester. Given in both semesters.
Lecturers: Miss Heidbreder, Mrs. Mallory, Mr. Zigler.
Conference Instructors: Mrs. Alper, Miss Gates, Mr. Holway.
204. History and Method of Psychological Experimentation.
This course aims to trace the historical development of the principal move-
ments in experimental psychology and to indicate the steps in refinement of
method and technique which have attended advance in these movements.
Reference texts include Boring, A History of Experimental Psychology, and Mur-
phy, Historical Introduction to Modern Psychology.
Open to students who have completed course 101. Three hours a week for a
semester. Given in both semesters. Mr. Zigler.
207. Genetic Psychology.
This course presents the characteristic changes in conscious attitude and in
behavior tendencies which take place in normal individual development. At-
tention is given both to the instinctive or unlearned traits and to the differen-
tiating effects of environment and training. The material is primarily that of
child psychology, but is supplemented by data drawn from the study of animals
and of primitive peoples. The texts include Goodenough, Developmental Psy-
chology, and Johnson, Child Psychology.
Open to seniors, juniors, and by permission to sophomores who have completed
course 101. Three hours a week for the second semester. Mrs. Mallory.
209. Experimental Psychology, Laboratory Course.
Every student is expected to perform one or two typical experiments in each of
the main fields of psychological investigation. The laboratory work is sup-
136 Courses of Instruction
plementcd by occasional lectures. This course is designed to train the student
in psychological method.
Open to students who have completed course 101. Six periods a week of laboratory
work, counting three hours a week for a semester. Given in both semesters.
Mr. Zigler, Mrs. Mallory, Mrs. Alper, Miss Gates, Miss Metzger.
210. Experimental Problems in Psychology.
This course comprises investigation of special problems by individual students.
In 1935-36 problems may be chosen in the following subjects: visual, auditory,
tactual and olfactory sensation, higher mental processes, and attitudes. The
methods employed are wider than the problems and are adapted to training
students in the fundamental demands of research.
Limited in number and open to students who have shown in course 209 an aptitude
for laboratory work. Six periods of laboratory a week, including one or two with
instructor, counting three hours a week for a semester. Given in both semesters.
Miss Heidbreder, Mr. Zigler, Mrs. Mallory.
303. Advanced Course in Experimental Problems in Psychology.
This is an experimental-project course. It resembles course 210 except that
greater mastery of laboratory technique is required.
Open to students who have completed course 210. Six periods of laboratory a
week, including one or two with instructor, counting three hours a week for the first
semester. Miss Heidbreder, Mr. Zigler, Mrs. Mallory.
308. Advanced Course in Experimental Problems in Psychology.
This is also an experimental-project course. It may be taken either as a con-
tinuation of course 303 or as a substitute for it.
Open to students who have completed course 210. Six periods of laboratory a
week, including one or two with instructor, counting three hours a week for the second
semester. Miss Heidbreder, Mr. Zigler, Mrs. Mallory.
309. Abnormal Psychology.
This course includes the following topics: (1) The abnormal phenomena of the
normal mind (such as dreaming); (2) the minor mental aberrations in their rela-
tion to mental hygiene; (3) certain major disturbances of which some knowledge
is important to the social worker. Reference books include Rosanoff, Manual
of Psychiatry; Dorcus and Shaffer, Abnormal Psychology.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 101 and have completed,
or are taking, at least two semester courses chosen from the following: courses 204,
207 , 209, 210, 313 and 310 in Psychology; course 303 and the second semester of
course 202 in Sociology; course 306 in Zoology; and the second semester of course
201 in Education. Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Heidbreder.
310. Social Psychology.
This course includes the following topics: (1) The nature of social conscious-
ness and behavior; (2) such social phenomena as "mob-mind," convention and
custom; (3) certain present-day problems, such as racial and national antipathies
Philosophy and Psychology 137
in their psychological aspects; (4) individual cases of social maladjustment in the
light of differential psychology and of mental hygiene. Reference books will in-
clude Dunlap, Civilized Life; Murphy, Experimental Social Psychology; the
Case Studies of the Judge Baker Foundation.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 101 and have completed,
or are taking, at least two semester courses chosen from the following: courses 204,
207, 209, 210, 313 and 309 in Psychology; course 303 and the second semester of
course 202 in Sociology; and the second semester of the course in Group Leadership
or of course 201 in Education. Three hours a week for the second semester.
Miss Heidbreder.
313. Differential Psychology.
This course treats of the differences which exist between one human being and
another in respect to mental traits and capacities. It offers a survey of the
methods by which psychologists have tried to determine and define such differ-
ences and also includes a study of the test movement. Opportunities are of-
fered for students to acquaint themselves with representative tests, and to gain
some practice in giving and scoring them. The reference works include Free-
man, Mental Tests; Terman, The Measurement of Intelligence; Garrett and
Schneck, Psychological Tests, Methods, and Results.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 101 and have completed
or are taking at least two semester courses chosen from the following: courses 204,
207, 209, 210, 309 and 310 in Psychology; course 306 in Zoology; course 320 and
the second semester of course 201 in Education. Three hours a week for the first
semester. Mrs. Mallory.
324. Seminary in Psychology: Types of Psychological Theory.
This course attempts a comparison of structural, personalistic and behavioris-
tic psychology, "psychology of the unconscious," and Gestalt psychology.
Open to graduate students, to seniors who are taking twelve hours in Psychology,
and to approved seniors who are taking nine hours. Three hours a week for the
second semester. Miss Heidbreder, Mr. Zigler.
326. Seminary Course: Training in the Use of Psychological Sources.
(Not offered in 1935-36.)
This course is designed to train students especially interested in psychology to
trace the development of special problems through the psychological literature.
Experimental contributions bearing upon a topic will be analyzed and discussed.
This course will be given as directed reading with weekly or bi-weekly confer-
ences.
Open to graduate students, and to approved seniors who have completed course 210
and who are interested in experimental research. Three hours a week for the first
semester. Mr. Zigler.
350. Research or Individual Study.
Open only to graduate students by special permission. Three hours a week
for a year.
138 Courses of Instruction
ii. philosophy
*102. Introduction to Philosophy.
The aim of this course is to stimulate philosophical thinking and to give the
student some acquaintance with metaphysical problems and some training in
method. The discussions are based on classical texts chosen to illustrate dual-
ism, materialism, and idealism. The texts studied include selections from Des-
cartes, Hobbes, and Berkeley.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors and, by special permission, to approved
freshmen. Three hours a week for a semester. Given in both semesters.
First semester, Miss Coolidge, Miss Onderdonk.
Second semester, Mr. Procter, Miss Coolidge, Miss Onderdonk.
111. Introduction to Philosophy Through the Problems of Religion.
A brief historical and psychological study of the religious consciousness leading
to a discussion of the nature and validity of religious experience in contrast with
other types of experience and of the philosophical problems involved in this
contrast. Reference texts include Moore, The Birth and Growth of Religion;
James, Varieties of Religious Experience; Russell, A Free Man's Worship; White-
head, Religion in the Making and Science and the Modern World.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors. Three hours a week for the first
semester. Mr. Procter.
*107. Introduction to Philosophy Through Greek Thought.
A year course based on the material presented by the Greek thinkers. After a
discussion of the various Pre-Socratic schools, special attention is given to Plato's
Apology, Crito, Phaedo and Republic and to Aristotle's Ethics and to parts of the
Metaphysics. Texts: Bakewell, Source Book in Greek Philosophy; Plato, Selec-
tions (Demos); Plato, The Republic; Aristotle, Selections (Ross). Supplementary
reading.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors and, by permission, to approved fresh-
men. Three hours a week for a year. Mr. Procter.
108. Logic
Training in argument and in logical criticism. Work expressly designed to
meet the practical needs of the student. The course deals not only with the
principles of deductive and inductive logic, but also with elementary questions
of observation, testimony, and evidence. Text-book: Chapman & Henle, Fun-
damentals of Logic.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors. Three hours a week for the second
semester. Miss Onderdonk.
203. /Esthetics. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
This is a discussion course dealing with such problems as those of the nature of
our consciousness of beauty, the nature of artistic creation, the subjectivity or the
objectivity of standards of criticism, and the relationship of aesthetic and ethical
values. The theories considered are those of such classical philosophers as Plato
and Schopenhauer, and of such recent writers as Santayana, Puffer, Tufts,
Croce, and Bosanquet.
Philosophy and Psychology 139
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors who have completed course 101 or 102.
Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Coolidge.
205. Ethics. (Not given in 1935-36.)
Study and criticism of representative ethical theories. The course will not
be an historical one, but it will include discussion of the writings of such older
moralists as Plato and Kant as well as those of later or contemporary philos-
ophers, such as Schopenhauer and Nietzsche, Dewey and Bergson.
Open to sophomores, juniors, and seniors who have completed or are taking course
101 or 102, or 107 or 111. Three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Coolidge.
214. Studies in the Development of Modern Philosophy.
First semester: The philosophical systems of Spinoza, Leibniz, Locke, and
Hume. Second semester: The Kantian philosophy and its developments in
modern thought. Texts: Spinoza, Ethics; Leibniz, Monadology and Discourse on
Metaphysics; Hume, Treatise of Human Nature; Kant, Critique of Pure Reason,
Metaphysic of Morality, and Critique of Practical Reason; Hegel, Logic of the En-
cyclopedia.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed courses 102 or 111 or 107. Open
also, by special arrangement, to graduate students. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Onderdonk.
307. The History of Greek Philosophy.
An advanced study of Greek Philosophy, offering more extended and more
detailed readings in Plato (with emphasis on the later dialogues) and also in
Aristotle, the Stoics, Epicureans, and Neo-Platonists. In addition to the texts
of the Greek philosophers, use is made of Robin's Greek Thought.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed four and one-half hours in the
department, of which three must be in Philosophy, and, by special permission, to
other seniors majoring in related departments. Open also to approved graduate
students. Not open to students who have taken course 107. Three hours a week for
a year. Mr. Procter.
312. Studies in Philosophies of the Last Half Century.
The course will consist of papers and discussions based on representative read-
ings from the writings of Bradley, Royce, Bergson, and Whitehead. This course
may be given in extra-schedule hours.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 214 and to graduate stu-
dents. Three hours a week for the second semester. Mr. Procter.
325. Study of Naturalism, Pragmatism, and Realism in the Last Half
Century.
Study of representative writings of such philosophers as James, Dewey, Rus-
sell, Alexander, Santayana, etc.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 214 and to graduate
students. Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Coolidge.
14° Courses of Instruction
305. The Logic of Hegel. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Study of the Logic of Hegel's Encyclopedia in Wallace's translation, with
supplementary references to commentators and critics, as basis for the discussion
of philosophical method and metaphysical problems.
Open on the same conditions as 325.
350. Research or Individual Study.
Open only to graduate students by special permission. Three hours a week for a
year.
HONORS
The department will advise candidates for honors in regard to their field of
special study and will direct their work. Students are urged to consult the de-
partment before making their plans.
INDIVIDUAL WORK
The attention of students is called to courses 210, 303, 308, and 350.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
I. Major in Psychology
A twelve or fifteen hour major in Psychology mast include courses 209 and 324
and one semester of grade I work in Philosophy. Courses supplementary to a
Psychology major include courses in Philosophy, Education, Statistics, Sociology,
Physics, Physiology and Zoology.
The attention of students interested in social psychology is called especially to
the course in Group Leadership.
II. Major in Philosophy
A twelve or fifteen hour major in Philosophy must include courses 101, 214,
and either 107 or 307. As courses supplementary to a Philosophy major may be
suggested certain courses in Psychology, Mathematics, Natural Science, History,
Political Science and Sociology, and in English, German, French, Latin and
Greek literature.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
Students who plan to take the general examination in Philosophy or in Psy-
chology are expected to consult the department. Advice in regard to prepara-
tion will be given gladly.
GRADUATE WORK
The department offers to graduate students direction in independent work
both in Philosophy and in Psychology, and conducts graduate conferences with
individual students at stated times.
Physics 141
PHYSICS
Professor].- Louise Sherwood McDowell, Ph.D. (Chairman)
Lucy Wilson, Ph.D.
Associate Professor: Grace Evangeline Davis, M.A.
Assistant Professors: Alice Hall Armstrong, Ph.D.
Dorothy Heyworth, Ph.D.
Laboratory Assistants: Emily Buckingham Wilson, M.A.
Jessamine Roberta Goernkr, B.A.
*101. Elementary Physics.
This course is for beginners, and presents briefly the elementary principles of
mechanics, sound, heat, electricity, and light, and their applications. The lec-
tures are fully illustrated by experiments.
Open to students who do not present Physics for admission. Three periods of lecture
and discussion with one three-period laboratory appointment a week, counting three
hours a week for a year. Miss McDowell, Miss Wilson, Miss Armstrong,
Miss Heyworth, Miss Goerner.
*104. Elementary Physics. (Not given in 1935-36.)
This course is for beginners. The same topics are considered as in course
101, but somewhat greater emphasis is placed upon the mathematical develop-
ment of the subject. The lectures are fully illustrated by experiments.
Open to students who do not present Physics for admission and who have completed
or are taking a year course in Mathematics in college. Three periods of lecture and
discussion with one three-period laboratory appointment a week, counting three
hours a week for a year.
*102. General Physics: Mechanics, Electricity, and Light.
This course is intended for students who already have an elementary knowl-
edge of physics; it gives a rapid survey of the fundamental principles in mechan-
ics, magnetism and electricity, wave motion and light. The lectures are fully
illustrated by experiments.
Open to students who have presented one unit in Physics for admission. Incoming
freshmen may apply to the Dean of Freshmen, and sophomores to the chairman of the
department for an examination for exemption from this course and admission to
course 201. Three periods of lecture and discussion, with one three-period labora-
tory appointment a week, counting three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Armstrong, Miss Heyworth, Miss Goerner.
201. Electricity.
Topics include magnetic and electric fields of force, current, potential differ-
ence, resistance, capacity, electromagnetic induction. Lectures and laboratory
work are closely correlated and measurements are made with instruments of
precision.
Open to students who have completed course 101 or 104 or 102, or who are exempt by
examination from course 102, and by special permission to juniors and seniors who
have presented one unit in Physics for admission. Three periods of lecture and dis-
cussion, with one three-period laboratory appointment a week, counting three hours a
week for the first semester. Miss Davis.
142 Courses of Instruction
*203. Meteorology.
The study of the phenomena of the weather with special attention to the appli-
cation of the principles of heat. Topics include temperature, air pressure,
winds, clouds, precipitation, progress of storms, cold waves; the principles of
weather prediction; atmospheric optical phenomena.
Open to students who have completed course 102 and to sophomores, juniors, and
seniors who have completed or are taking course 101 or 104 or who present one unit in
Physics for admission. Three periods of lecture and discussion with one three-
period laboratory appointment a week, counting three hours a week for the second
semester. Miss Davis.
*205.f Sound. (Not given in 1935-36.)
A preliminary study of vibrations and wave motion, including reflection, re-
fraction, interference, and the principle of resonance. Properties of musical
notes: intensity, pitch, and quality; scales and tonal combinations; types of
sounding bodies; musical instruments; architectural acoustics; reception of
sound by the ear; reproduction by telephone, phonograph, and radio.
Open to students who have completed course 102, and to sophomores, juniors, and
seniors who have completed or are taking course 101 or 104 or who present one unit in
Physics for admission. Three periods of lecture and discussion, with one two-period
laboratory appointment a week, counting three hours a week for the second semester.
206. Electricity: Alternating Current Phenomena.
The production, characteristics, and applications of variable currents of elec-
tricity; methods of measurement of resistance, inductance, and capacity; alter-
nating current instruments; alternating current machinery, generators, motors,
and transformers; simple theory and use of electron tubes.
Open to students who have completed course 201. Three periods of lecture and
discussion with one three-period laboratory appointment a week, counting three
hours a week for the second semester. Miss Armstrong.
204. The Automobile: Principles and Construction.
The internal combustion engine; carburetors; systems of ignition, starting and
lighting, and transmission. Lectures with demonstrations to illustrate the
physical principles involved. Individual laboratory study of various auto-
mobile mechanisms.
Open by permission to sophomores, juniors, and seniors who have completed
course 101 or 104 or 102 or who present one unit in Physics for admission. One
period of lecture or one three-period laboratory appointment a week, counting one
hour a week for a year. Miss Wilson.
3014 Light.
The wave theory and its application to the phenomena of dispersion, interfer-
ence, diffraction, double refraction, and polarization; theory and use of optical
instruments; brief discussion of the quantum theory.
t Offered in cooperation with the Department of Music.
X Astronomy 301, to which Physics 301 is prerequisite, may be counted toward a major in Physics.
Physics H3
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed a course of grade II in Physics, or
a year course of grade I in Physics and a year course of grade I in Astronomy.
Three periods of lecture and discussion with one three-period laboratory appointment
a week, counting three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Wilson.
302. Electromagnetic Oscillations and the Principles of Radio Com-
munication.
The production and detection of electromagnetic oscillations; the effect of
resistance, inductance and capacity; resonance, damping, coupled circuits; elec-
tron tubes and their application to the transmission, reception and amplification
of electromagnetic waves. Experimental lectures with individual laboratory
study.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 206 in Physics and course
202 in Mathematics. Three periods of lecture and discussion, with one three-period
laboratory appointment a week, counting three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss McDowell.
303. Atomic Physics.
The course gives a brief introduction to the quantum theory and theories of
the structure of the atom and considers in some detail the evidence offered by the
phenomena of cathode rays, x-rays, positive rays, radio-activity, isotopes,
photoelectricity, ionization, and optical spectra. The treatment is non-
mathematical.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 201 or 301 in Physics, and
have completed or are taking a year of Chemistry, and, by special permission, to
seniors taking a major in Chemistry who have had a grade I course in Physics.
Three hours a week for the second semester. Miss McDowell.
304. % Theoretical Electricity and Magnetism. (Not given in 1935-36.)
The work is based upon Starling's Electricity and Magnetism and free use is
made of the calculus.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 201 and also course 202 in
Mathematics. Three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Heyworth.
305. t Mechanics.
Equations of motion; simple harmonic motion; central orbits; statics of rigid
bodies; work, energy; dynamics of a particle; motion of rigid bodies. Emphasis
is placed on the application of mathematics, especially plane analytic geometry
and the calculus, to physics; use will be made of differential equations.
Open to students who have completed course 101 or 104 or 102 in Physics and course
202 in Mathematics. When combined with course 303 in Mathematics it may be
counted toward a major in Mathematics. Three hours a week for the second semester.
Miss Heyworth.
308. Bio-Physics. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
This course deals with those parts of physics, especially surface-tension, heat,
light, and electricity, that are essential to a knowledge of modern biology,
t Mathematics 303, if followed by Physics 304 or 30S, may be counted toward a major in
Physics.
144 Courses of Instruction
physiology, and medicine. Readings and lectures are designed to explain our
present conceptions of the principal biological processes that are physical in
nature and the ways in which physical apparatus is used to investigate organisms.
Laboratory exercises enable the student to visualize the processes more clearly
and to obtain practice in using apparatus commonly employed in medical and
advanced biological laboratories.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed in college one year of Physics
and one year of either Botany or Zoology. Three periods of lecture and discussion,
with one three-period laboratory appointment a week, counting three hours a week for
the first semester.
307. Laboratory Technique.
Practice arranged to fit the needs of the individual student. Photography,
including the making of lantern-slides; glass blowing; silvering; shop work, in-
cluding the use of the lathe.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking a course of grade III
in the department, and by special permission to advanced students in other science
departments. One three-period laboratory appointment a week, counting one hour a
week for a year. The Staff.
350. Research or Individual Study.
The work will be under the direction of the member of the department in
whose field the work lies. Opportunity will be offered for a series of experiments
as well as for investigation of a single problem.
Open to graduate students and, by permission of the department, to juniors and
seniors who have completed nine hours in the department. To count two to three
hours a week for a semester or for a year. By permission the work may be arranged
to count one hour for the first semester in case two or three hours are elected for the
second semester. The amount of work contemplated must be indicated at the time
of handing in electives.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
A major in Physics should ordinarily include courses 101 or 104 or 102, 201
and 301 and at least three of the following courses: 302, 303, 304, 305. By per-
mission of the department other combinations may be arranged.
For honors, Physics may be combined with Mathematics and Chemistry or
Astronomy. A reading knowledge of German is desirable.
Pre-medical students are referred to the requirements as given under electives,
page 45.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
The general examination may be based on any combination of courses which
includes the courses mentioned under Directions for Election. The examina-
tion will consist of two parts: (1) questions based upon courses 101, or 104, or
102, and 201; (2) questions based upon the other courses of grade II and grade
III. The number of questions will be sufficient to permit considerable choice
in part I and a wide range of choice in part II.
The questions will be designed: (1) to show the essential unity in the different
branches of physics; (2) to test the knowledge of fundamental principles and the
Spanish 145
ability to apply these principles to concrete problems. No reading outside that
assigned for courses will be required.
SPANISH
Professor: Auct: Huntington Bushee, M.A. (Chairman)
Associate Professor: Ada May Coe, M.A.
Assistant Professors: Anita Oyarzabal, M.A.
Helen Phipps Houck, Ph.D.
A reading knowledge of French is required for all grade IH work and desirable in all
courses. The language of the classroom is Spanish.
A limited number of qualified students are permitted to spend the junior year in Spain
with the foreign study group of Smith College.
*101. Elementary Course.
Grammar, composition, dictation, conversation, prepared and sight transla-
tion, short lectures in Spanish.
Open to students who do not present Spanish for admission. Three hours a week
for a year. Miss Bushee, Miss Coe, Miss Oyarzabal, Mrs. Houck.
*102. Intermediate Course.
Grammar, composition, themes, lectures, reading from modern authors and
selections from Don Quijote.
Open to students who have completed course 101 or an equivalent. Three hours a
week for a year. Mrs. Houck.
*103. Outline History of Spanish Literature.
A survey course with illustrative reading, grammar, and composition, planned
especially for those who intend to major in Spanish.
Open to students who present three units in Spanish for admission and on recom-
mendation of the department to students who have completed course 101 . Three
hours a week for a year. Miss Coe.
201. Spanish Literature in the Nineteenth Century.
The aim of this course is to give the student a general idea of Spanish litera-
ture after the Golden Age: the French influence, Romanticism, and the noted
authors of the latter part of the nineteenth century. Rapid reading of both
prose and poetry will be required, and authors previously studied will be referred
to in the outline.
Open to students who have completed course 102 or 103. Three hours a week for
a year. Miss Bushee.
203. Advanced Conversation and Composition.
This course is designed to give special opportunity for conversation, composi-
tion, and the acquisition of a large working vocabulary.
Open to students who have completed course 103, and to approved students who
have completed course 102. One hour a week for a year. Miss Oyarzabal.
204. Contemporary Spanish Literature.
A survey of the literary movement since 1898 as represented by the novel,
drama, and essay.
146 Courses of Instruction
Open to students who have completed course 102 or 103. Three hours a week for
a year. Miss Oyarzabal.
205. Spanish Civilization.
The aim of this course is to provide a background for the study of Spanish
literature. Lectures in Spanish, some illustrated, will treat briefly the geography
and history of Spain, the development of its social and economic institutions, its
arts, national ideals, and customs. Parallel readings and papers will be assigned.
Open to students who have completed course 102 or 103. One hour a week for a
year. Mrs. Houck.
301. Drama of the Golden Age.
This course will be introduced by a short general outline of the historical and
literary influences at work during the period. Characteristic dramas of Lope
de Vega, Alarcon, Tirso de Molina, and Calderon will be studied as representa-
tive of the nation's thought and ideals at the time.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 201 or 204. Three hours
a week for a year. Miss Coe.
302. Novel of the Golden Age.
The first semester will be devoted to a general study of the novel before 1650,
especially the caballeresca, picaresca, and pastoril. During the second semester
Don Quijote will be studied.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 201 or 204. Three hours
a week for a year. Mrs. Houck.
303. Old Spanish Literature from 1100 to 1500. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
Study of El Poema del Cid and other characteristic works of the period.
Open to graduates and to approved seniors who have completed at least one course
of grade III. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Bushee.
304. Spanish Poetry.
Special study of the romances and of the poetry of the Golden Age.
Open to graduates and approved seniors who have completed at least one course of
grade III. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Oyarzabal.
305. Cervantes.
A careful comparative study of the works of Cervantes.
Open to graduates and approved seniors who have completed course 302. Three
hours a week for a year. Miss Bushee.
306. Modern Spanish American Literature. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
The aim of this course is to show the influences at work in the making of Span-
ish American Literature with the reaction, especially in poetry, on the literature
of Spain.
Speech 147
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed course 201 and History 214 or an
equivalent. Three hours a week for a year. Miss Coe.
350. Research or Individual Study.
Open by permission to a limited number of seniors who are taking or have com-
pleted a course of grade III in the department. One to three hours a week for a year
or two to three for a semester. The amount of work contemplated must be indicated
at the time of handing in electives.
Miss Bushee, Miss Coe, Miss Oyarzabal, Mrs. Houck.
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
A twelve-hour major should be made up of courses elected in the following
sequence: 102 or 103, 201 or 204, and two of the following: 301, 302, 306.
A nine-hour major or minor should be made up of courses elected in the fol-
lowing sequence: 102 or 103, 201 or 204, 301 or 302 or 306.
The department advises that the sequence be 103, 201, 301, but students may
consult their instructors in regard to other combinations. It is also very de-
sirable that every major should include 203 and 205. It is expected that those
who are planning to teach will complete satisfactorily a twelve-hour major.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
Every student who presents herself for the general examination in Spanish
shall show:
(1) Her knowledge of the language by her ability to use it in the examination.
(2) A general knowledge of the outline of Spanish literature with as much of
the historical background as is necessary for understanding the literature.
(3) Familiarity with the specific fields of literature elected and their interre-
lation.
SPEECH
Assistant Professors: Edith Margaret Smaill, A. A.
Edith Winifred Moses,' M.A. (Chairman)
Instructors: Cecile de Banke
fEANNETTE BaRRY LaNE, Ph.B.
ohn Huber McDowell,' M.A.
Assistant: Sarah Emily Brown, M.F.A.
Not more than seven and one-half hours in this department may be counted within the
minimum number of hours for the B.A. degree.
One hour in the sophomore year is required of all students except those who are exempted
by examination or have completed course 101 or 105 in the freshman year, or who elect
course 101 in the sophomore year.
Each applicant for an examination for exemption from Speech will be asked to give from
memory a two-minute excerpt from a poem, preferably a lyric, and to speak extempora-
neously for two minutes on a topic of interest to herself.
The courses are designed to help the student to acquire: (a) free use of the voice and a
good pronunciation of English, (b) ease in public address, (c) the power to read aloud simply
and with expression, (d) the ability to interpret dramatic literature. The courses are ar-
ranged to make possible systematic and progressive study along these various lines.
The general aim of all the courses is, through training in speech, to add to the effective-
ness of the individual.
* Absent on leave for the second semester.
s Appointed for the second semester only.
148 Courses of Instruction
*101. Fundamentals of Vocal Expression.
The purpose of this course is to develop the ability to read and speak audibly,
correctly, and expressively. Phonetics, voice production, platform delivery, and
the oral study of various forms of literature.
Open to all undergraduates. Three hours a week for a year.
Miss Moses, Miss de Banke, Miss Lane, Mr. McDowell.
*104. Voice and Speech (A).
This course is intended to promote right habits in the production of voice,
and to increase precision in articulation and pronunciation for conversation,
classroom use, and extempore speaking.
Required of sophomores except those who have been exempted by examination or
have completed or are taking course 101 or have completed course 105. Not open to
students who have completed course 101 or 105. One hour a zveek for a year.
Miss Moses, Miss de Banke, Miss Lane, Mr. McDowell.
*105. Voice and Speech (B).
This course is, in general, the same as course 104 with some extension of the
work.
Open to freshmen and, by special permission, to sophomores. Not open to stu-
dents who have completed course 101 or 104. Three hours a week for the second
semester. Miss de Banke.
201. Interpretation of Modern Poetry and Drama.
This course is designed to stimulate creative imagination and to give practice
in the art of interpretation. Modern drama, from Ibsen to the contemporary
period, and modern poetry, from Browning to the contemporary, will be used for
platform interpretation.
Open to students who have had one course in the department, also to those who
have completed or are taking English Literature 210, 211, or 307. Three hours a
week for a year. Miss Smaill.
202. The Art of Speaking in Public
The course makes a study of the principles of speech composition, and of the
technique of delivery, with application of these to different kinds of original
addresses, including speeches of introduction, welcome, presentation, commemo-
ration, the after-dinner speech; the speech designed to persuade; types of debate.
An opportunity will be given to organize and conduct an open forum meeting.
Open to students who have completed course 101, 104, or 105. Three hours a week
for a year. Miss Moses, Mr. McDowell.
203.f The Art of Play Production.
Theory and practice of play production. A brief study of the evolution of the
theatre from the Greek and Roman periods to the contemporary stage. Prepa-
t A special fee of 325.00 is charged for Speech 203. Loans from the Malvina Bennett Fund for
this fee are available for a limited number of students. The chairman of the department should
be consulted.
Zoology and Physiology 149
ration of plays, including setting, lighting, costuming, casting, acting, directing;
scene design and construction. Several laboratory projects and one public
production will be given each year.
Open to juniors and seniors. Art 202 or 203, English Literature 211 or English
Composition 305, and Speech 201 are advised. Four periods of lecture and labora-
tory a week, counting three hours a week for a year. Director, Miss Smaill.
Assistant, Miss Brown.
301. Dramatic Interpretation of Shakespeare. (Not given in 1935-36.)
A comedy and a tragedy will be studied in detail for oral interpretation,
and scenes from these and other Shakespearean plays will be acted under student
direction.
Open to students who have completed one three-hour course in the department, also
to those who have completed or are taking English Literature 205 or 309. Three
hours a week for a year. Miss Smaill.
ZOOLOGY AND PHYSIOLOGY
Professors: Marian Elizabeth Hubbard, B.S.
Julia Eleanor Moody, Ph.D. (Chairman)
Associate Professor: Margaret Alger Hayden, Ph.D.
Assistant Professors: Helen Warton Kaan,2 Ph.D.
Harriet Cutler Waterman, Ph.D.
Gladys Kathryn McCosh, Ph.D.
Mary Lellah Austin,1 Ph.D.
Ada Roberta Hall, Ph.D.
Instructors: Margaret Elliott Van Winkle, M.S.
curator of museum.
Rosemary Anne Murphy, M.A.
Helen Elizabeth Butts, Ph.D.
Eva Elizabeth Jones, Ph.D.
Altha Louise Palmer, M.S.
Custodian of Laboratories: Eleanor Leach, M.A.
Laboratory Assistants: Gwynneth Pease, B.A.
Pauline Burgess Rohm, B.A.
Judith Dudley Smith, B.A.
Secretary and Custodian: Kathleen Millicent Leavitt
*101. The Biology of Animals.
This course aims to furnish the basis for an intelligent understanding of animal
life and of the place of man in the world of living things. The study of a series
of forms of increasing complexity, culminating in a vertebrate, develops a con-
ception of what an animal is and suggests probable evolutionary sequences.
Cells are studied as units of structure and to demonstrate, particularly in germ-
cells, the mechanism of heredity. Supplementing the facts gained in the lab-
oratory, there runs through the second semester a series of lectures and discus-
sions on the evidence and factors of evolution, on heredity and eugenics.
Open to all undergraduates. Six periods a week, in general two of lecture, dis-
cussion, or quiz, and four of laboratory, counting three hours a week for a year.
Miss Hubbard, Miss Hayden, Miss McCosh,
Mrs. Van Winkle, Miss Butts, Miss Palmer, Miss Jones.
'Absent on leave.
'Absent on leave for the second semester.
150 Courses of Instruction
zoology
203. Vertebrate Zoology.
Evidences of evolution from the study of the comparative anatomy and the
development of the vertebrates, based upon a careful dissection of dogfish,
necturus, and cat. It is the aim throughout the course to trace the evolution of
the vertebrate type from a primitive form to man, with particular emphasis
upon the changes leading up to the structures found in the human body. Lec-
tures, laboratory, and museum work.
Open to juniors and seniors without prerequisites, and to other students who have
completed course 101. Five-year Hygiene students electing this course must also
take course 301. Six periods a week, in general two of lecture, discussion, or quiz,
and four of laboratory, counting three hours a week for a year.
Miss Moody, Miss Waterman.
204. Animal Ecology.
A study of representative members of certain phyla based upon their dis-
tribution and natural history. Primary consideration is given to animals in
the local fauna. Special emphasis is placed upon their behavior and activities,
the relations existing between them and their environment, and their relations
with each other. Lectures, laboratory and field work.
Open to students who have completed course 101. Six periods a week, in general
two of lecture, discussion, or quiz, and four of laboratory or field work, counting
three hours a week for a year. Miss McCosh.
301. Mammalian Anatomy (Hygiene 301).
Lectures and laboratory work on the gross anatomy of bones and muscles.
Required of first-year graduate students in the Department of Hygiene and Physi-
cal Education; also of juniors who are registered as five-year Hygiene students.
If counted as part of a major in Zoology, course 301 should be preceded by course 101.
Three periods a week, in general one of lecture, discussion or quiz, and two of lab-
oratory, counting two hours a week for the first semester. Miss Waterman.
313. Mammalian Anatomy (Hygiene 313).
Lectures and laboratory work on the digestive, respiratory, excretory, repro-
ductive, circulatory, and nervous systems.
Required of first-year graduate students in the Department of Hygiene and Physi-
cal Education; also of juniors who are registered as five-year Hygiene students with
the exception of those students who have already completed course 203. If counted
as part of a major in Zoology, course 313 should be preceded by courses 101 and
301. Three periods a week, in general one of lecture, discussion, or quiz, and two of
laboratory, counting two hours a week for the second semester. Miss Waterman.
303. Histology and Histological Technique.
This course includes a study of the microscopic structure of the tissues and
organs of mammals. Emphasis is laid on the relation of structure and function.
Some training is given in the preparation of tissues for microscopical study.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking course 203 or 204
or 308. Six periods a week, in general two of lecture, discussion, or quiz, and four
of laboratory, counting three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Kaan.
Zoology and Physiology 15 1
304. Embryology.
This course deals with the development of an individual from its origin as a
fertilized egg through the time of formation of the principal organs and systems.
The maturation and function of the germ cells are also considered. Laboratory
work is based chiefly on a study of chick and pig embryos.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed or are taking course 203 or 204
or 30S. Six periods a week, in general two of lecture, discussion, or quiz, and four
of laboratory, counting three hours a week for the second semester. Miss Jones.
305. Theories and Problems of Zoology.
A course dealing with the present-day theories and problems of Zoology, and
the history of their development; including such questions as the origin of life,
growth, and the theories and factors of evolution. Three hours are spent in
lecture, reports, and discussions. One or two short papers are usually required.
Open to students completing a twelve-hour major, and under special conditions
to others with the approval of the department. Three hours a week for the second
semester. Miss Moody.
306. Heredity.
A study of the principles of heredity, based on the cytological and genetical
evidence found in animals; the application of these principles to human inherit-
ance and to the practical problems of eugenics. The class work is supplemented
by a few practical breeding tests with Drosophila and guinea-pigs, carried on in
the preparation time allotted to the course. There are no fixed hours for ex-
perimental work. Three hours are spent in lecture, reports, class discussion,
and quizzes.
Open to students completing a twelve-hour major, to five-year Hygiene students
completing a major in Zoology, and to others under certain conditions with the ap-
proval of the department. Three hours a week for the first semester.
Miss Moody.
310. Histology of the Organs (and Histological Technique). (Not given
in 1935-36.)
This course continues the study of organs not included in course 303 . Various
aspects of histological research are considered in a series of reports on original
papers. Individual problems afford practice in special methods of technique.
Open to juniors and seniors who have completed 303. Six periods a week, in
general one of lecture or discussion and five of laboratory, counting three hours a
week for the second semester. Miss Jones.
314. Cytology.
This course treats of the biology of the cell, including the structure of proto-
plasm, nucleus, cytoplasm; the phenomena of mitosis, maturation, fertilization;
the relation of cellular structure to sex and heredity. Some training is offered
in the technique of microscopical preparation.
Open to approved students completing a twelve-hour major in Zoology. Six
periods a week, in general two of lecture, discussion, or quiz and four of laboratory,
counting three hours a week for the second semester. Miss Hayden.
152 Courses of Instruction
315. Protozoology. (Not offered in 1935-36.)
This course will include (1) a study of the morphology, taxonomy, and interre-
lationships of the Protozoa, in order to introduce the student to the vast series
of forms comprised in this group; (2) a study of their general physiology; (3)
a consideration of some of the problems of broad biological significance illus-
trated by a study of the group.
Open to approved students completing a twelve-hour major in Zoology. Six
periods a week, in general two of lecture, discussion, or quiz and four of laboratory,
counting three hours a week for the first semester. Miss Austin.
350. Research or Individual Study.
This course offers elementary research problems in Histology, Embryology,
Invertebrate and Vertebrate Zoology, Ecology, Cytology, Protozoology, and
Physiology. Independent work will be required of the student under the di-
rection of the instructor in the field chosen.
Open to graduate students and, with the advice of the department, to approved
seniors who have completed or who are completing a twelve-hour major in Zoology.
Three to six periods a week, counting one and one-half to three hours a year, or six
periods a week, counting three hours a week for a semester. For graduate students,
three to twelve periods a week, counting one and one-half to six hours for the year,
or six to twelve periods, counting three to six hours for a semester. The amount of
work contemplated must be indicated at the time of handing in electives.
The Teaching Staff.
PHYSIOLOGY
302. General Physiology (Hygiene 302).
The course aims to give a fundamental knowledge of general physiological
processes. It includes elementary physical and chemical phenomena of living
organisms, and a study of the coordinated systems in mammalian forms. Lec-
tures, demonstrations, written reports, and laboratory work cover simple
chemical studies of the constituents of living matter, and observations of more
complex physiological processes — nutrition, circulation, respiration, excretion,
nerve-muscle response, reproduction, endocrine activities.
Required of first-year graduate students in the Department of Hygiene and Physi-
cal Education; also required of students registered for the five-year Hygiene course,
either in the junior or senior year. If counted as part of a major in Zoology, course
302 should be preceded by course 101. Open to Hygiene students only; others take
course 308. Six periods a week, in general two of lecture, discussion, or quiz and
four of laboratory, counting three hours a week for a year. Miss Hall.
308. General Physiology.
The course aims to give a fundamental knowledge of general physiological
processes. It includes elementary physical and chemical phenomena of living
organisms, and a study of the coordinated systems in mammalian forms. Lec-
tures, demonstrations, written reports, and laboratory work cover simple
chemical studies of the constituents of living matter, and observations of more
complex physiological processes — nutrition, circulation, respiration, excretion,
nerve-muscle response, reproduction, endocrine activities.
Zoology and Physiology 153
Open to students who offer as prerequisites Zoology 101 and Chemistry 101 or
102; or to students who in addition to fulfilling the Chemistry requirements have
completed or are taking Zoology 203. Open by special permission without prerequi-
site to students majoring in Chemistry. Chemistry 301 is recommended as a parallel
course. Six periods a week, in general two of lecture, discussion, or quiz, and four
of laboratory, counting three hours a week for a year. Miss Murphy.
309. Metabolism.
A study of the physiological reactions by means of which energy changes are
produced in the animal body. The laboratory work includes a clinical method of
determining basal metabolism and individual problems to illustrate normal and
abnormal physiological oxidations in laboratory animals.
Open to students who have completed course 302 or 308. Six periods a week, in
general two of lecture, discussion, or quiz, and four of laboratory, counting three
hours a week for the first semester. Miss Murphy.
311. Physiology of the Nervous System. (Not given in 1935-36.)
A study of the control of the animal organism through the central nervous
system and the organs of special sense. The course includes a consideration of
the theories of conductivity, and of the physiological basis of mental processes
and behavior.
Open to students who have completed course 308 or 302. Six periods a week, in
general two of lecture, discussion, or quiz, and four of laboratory, counting three
hours a week for the first semester. Miss Hall.
312. Physiology of Nutrition.
The course includes the study of assimilation by tissue cells as well as the proc-
esses involved in normal digestion and absorption of foodstuffs. Normal and
faulty nutrition will be compared by feeding experiments with animals. Lab-
oratory and written work will be individually assigned.
Open to students who have completed course 308 or 302. Chemistry 301 is not
required as a prerequisite but is recommended. Six periods a week, in general two
of lecture, discussion, or quiz, and four of laboratory, counting three hours a week for
the second semester. Miss Murphy.
316. Physiology of the Endocrine Glands.
A study of the chemical control of the animal organism through the secretions
of the endocrine glands. Individual problems will constitute a part of this
course.
Open to students who have completed course 302 or 308. Six periods a week, in
general two of lecture, discussion, or quiz, and four of laboratory, counting three
hours a week for the second semester. Miss Hall.
350. Research or Individual Study.
(See Zoology.)
DIRECTIONS FOR ELECTION
These courses are designed to provide for the general student a basis for the
interpretation of phenomena in the world of living things. At the same time
154 Courses of Instruction
they may furnish a foundation for students who plan to follow professionally
some phase of biological work, such as teaching, research, laboratory technique,
medicine, public health, physical education, nursing, medical social service.
Five-year Hygiene students wishing to major in the department should elect
course 101 in the freshman or sophomore year, and courses 301, 313, 302, 306
in the junior and senior years.
Pre-medical students are referred to the requirements as given under elec-
tives, page 45.
For public health work, students are advised to elect courses 101 or 203, 308
and 303. Students majoring in Zoology are advised to include Botany 308 as
part of the six or nine hour minor.
A major is based on course 101. A knowledge of Chemistry is required of all
students majoring in Physiology and is desirable for all students majoring in
the department. A reading knowledge of German will prove valuable.
Students majoring in Zoology or Physiology may under certain conditions
obtain special permission from the Chemistry Department to take organic
Chemistry, course 301, after having taken course 101.
Students who intend to major in Zoology or Physiology as a foundation for
professional work are urged to consult with the department before completing
their plans.
GENERAL EXAMINATION
The general examination will be based on the courses taken in the major sub-
ject. In the course of the year members of the department will meet major
students to discuss methods of preparation for the examination. No summer
reading is required but references will be given to students desiring them.
The purpose of the general examination is to test the student's knowledge of
the fundamental principles underlying animal life, the essential facts involved
and their significance. Four hours in one session will be allowed for the exam-
ination. The questions offered will permit adequate choice.
The following combinations are suggested as samples of a basis for the general
examination:
ni 101 ' ?fu i ^ms s'x nours or more °f grade III courses which may be chosen
(X\ Ml' 1DR I 'n Zoology or Physiology or a combination of the two.
It is desirable that the student consult with the department before electing
her courses of grade III.
Expenses '55
EXPENSES
/. For resident students
Tuition for the year 2500
Board and room for the vear 500
31,000
//. For non-resident students
Tuition for the year 3500
Students who are permitted to take seven hours or less of classroom work a
week, and who do not live in college buildings, pay tuition by the course as follows:
for a one-hour course, 250; a two-hour course, 2100; a three-hour course, 2150.
Payment is due at the beginning of the year.
FIXED TIMES AND AMOUNTS OF PAYMENT
/. For students who room in college buildings
August 15 250
Deposit to reserve a place in college for the ensuing year.
Failure to make such deposit will mean loss of enrollment.
No part of any scholarship or loan awarded by Wellesley
College and ordinarily no part of a grant from the Wellesley
Students' Aid Society can be applied on this payment. The
deposit is not refundable.
Unless requested the College does not expect to send re-
ceipts for this deposit, as cancelled checks will be receipts.
September (at the opening of college)
On account of tuition 2250
On account of board and room 250
500
February (before the beginning of the second semester)
Balance on tuition 2200
Balance on board and room 250
450
Total for the year 31,000
The regular charge for board begins at the opening of col-
lege houses.
//. For students who do not room in college buildings
August 15 250
Deposit to reserve a place in college for the ensuing year.
Failure to make such deposit will mean loss of enrollment.
No part of any scholarship or loan awarded by Wellesley
College and ordinarily no part of a grant from the Wellesley
156 Expenses
Students' Aid Society can be applied on this payment. The
deposit is not refundable.
Unless requested the College does not expect to send
receipts for this deposit, as cancelled checks will be receipts.
September (at the opening of college) 250
February (before the beginning of the second semester) . . . 200
Total for the year 2500
Graduate and special students who do not live in college buildings make pay-
ment for room and board directly to the management of the private houses in
which they have secured lodging and meals, at such rates and times as the parties
to the arrangement may agree upon. Information regarding boarding places
may be obtained by addressing the Dean of Residence.
jp^T* Payments must be made before the student can take her place in the class-
room. No exception will be made to this rule without a written permission from the
Assistant Treasurer.
D^"" Checks or money orders should be made payable to Wellesley College. If
sent by mail, they should be addressed to the Assistant Treasurer.
£J^"" There are no deductions for absences, and no refunds save in exceptional
cases of which the College shall be the sole judge.
TUITION AND OTHER CHARGES IN DEPARTMENT OF MUSIC
For instruction for the college year in Pianoforte, Organ, Violin or Voice,
two lessons a week 2150
One lesson a week 75
(Lessons thirty minutes in length)
For use of the Pianoforte, one period daily for the college year ... 15
For two or three periods daily, in proportion.
For use of the Pipe Organ in Music Hall, one period daily for the college
year 20
For two or three periods daily, in proportion.
Special arrangements may be made for lessons on instruments not mentioned
above.
Tuition in music is payable in advance in two equal installments, one at the
beginning of each semester, and is not subject to return or deduction since no stu-
dent may elect music for a shorter period than one semester.
FEES
/. Undergraduate.
a. Application Fee.
An application fee of 310 is required from all candidates for admission, and no
application is recorded until the fee is received. The same fee is required from
Health *57
all former students who apply for readmission. If the fee of £10 for application
for admission to college was paid before March 15, 1931, it will be credited on
the first payment for tuition. As heretofore announced, application fees paid
after March 15, 1931, will not be credited on any bill. If the application is
cancelled for any reason the fee is forfeited to the College. A student who
postpones entrance until the year following the one for which she first applied
may transfer her application fee.
b. Diploma Fee.
At the time of taking the B.A. degree a diploma fee of 210 is charged.
Note: — Every student should also plan for an expenditure of #30 to 350 for
the purchase of books and supplies.
//. Graduate.
A matriculation fee of 25 is payable when an applicant is accepted as a grad-
uate student. The amount of this fee will be deducted from the diploma fee of
225 payable for the Master's degree, or from the fee of 210 payable for the certifi-
cate in Hygiene and Physical Education.
UV" No student may receive a diploma until a satisfactory settlement of all
her college dues has been made.
HALLS OF RESIDENCE
The residence halls within the limits of the campus are situated as follows:
Hazard Quadrangle — Beebe, Cazenove, Pomeroy, Shafer, with Munger adjacent;
Tower Court group — Claflin, Crawford, Severance, Tower Court; Stone group —
Dower, Homestead, Olive Davis, Stone; Norumbega. In addition to these
houses the College maintains four houses on property immediately adjoining the
college grounds: Eliot, Elms, Washington, Little, and Noanett for freshmen;
Crofton for graduate students. In all houses the rooms are furnished, and
equipped with desk lamps. A Head of House, appointed by the President of
the College, presides over each house.
Rooms are assigned to new students in the order in which their original appli-
cation fees have been received.
HEALTH
The college physicians, together with the Director of the Department of
Hygiene and Physical Education, and (ex officiis) the President, the Dean of
the College, the Dean of Residence, and the Class Deans constitute a board of
health to which all matters affecting the health of students are referred. Simp-
son Cottage is maintained as an infirmary under the charge of the Resident
Physician. Three trained nurses are in constant attendance. The privileges
of the infirmary, when prescribed by the Resident Physician, are open to all
students without charge for a period not exceeding seven days, provided no extra
service is required. There will be a charge at the rate of 22.25 a day for periods
exceeding seven days. Charges for extra service will be determined by the
158 Fellowships and Scholarships
amount required. The services of the college physicians for consultation and
treatment are free to all students.
FELLOWSHIPS AND SCHOLARSHIPS
A. FOR GRADUATES
The Alice Freeman Palmer Fellowship, yielding an income of about
31,400, was founded in 1903 by Mrs. David P. Kimball. The holder of this
fellowship must be a graduate of an American college of approved standing, a
woman of good health, not more than twenty-six years of age at the time of her
appointment, unmarried throughout the whole of her tenure, and as free as
possible from other responsibilities. She must have completed at least one year
of graduate study. The same person will not be eligible to the fellowship for
more than two years.
The fellowship may be used for study abroad, for study at any American
college or university, or privately for independent research. Three times during
the period of tenure the holder of the fellowship must furnish evidence that it is
used for purposes of serious study and not for general culture; and within three
years from entrance on the fellowship she must present to the faculty a thesis
embodying the results of the research carried on during the period of tenure.
A form to be used in applying may be obtained from the Secretary to the Presi-
dent, Wellesley College. The application must be filed before February first.
Each applicant must furnish papers showing her most advanced work, letters
from instructors as to ability, and a certificate of health.
The Fanny Bullock Workman Scholarship, yielding an income of about
31,200, was founded in 1929 by the bequest of Mrs. Fanny Bullock Workman.
The holder of this scholarship must be an alumna of Wellesley College who has
completed at least one year of graduate study. She must present evidence of
good health, character, financial need, and ability; and must be free from per-
sonal obligation which would interfere with study. The scholarship may be used
to assist preparation for any useful work. Twice during the period of tenure
the holder of the scholarship must furnish evidence of work done; and not later
than one year after the completion of the period she must present a full report or
other suitable evidence of the use to which the scholarship has been applied.
Forms to be used in applying may be obtained from the Secretary to the Presi-
dent, Wellesley College. Applications must be filed before February first.
Each applicant must furnish letters of recommendation and papers showing her
most advanced work.
The Anne Louise Barrett Fund, yielding an income of not less than 31,000,
was founded in 1935, in memory of her sister, by bequest of Mrs. Helen Barrett
Montgomery of the Class of 1884. The income is to be awarded to a woman
who is a candidate for an advanced degree, preferably in the field of music. At
the discretion of the trustees it may be awarded in any other field.
Forms to be used in applying may be obtained from the Secretary to the Presi-
dent, Wellesley College. Applications, accompanied by letters of recommenda-
Fellowships and Scholarships 159
tion and papers showing the candidate's most advanced work, must be filed
before February first.
The Horton-Hallowell Fellowship has been established by the Alumnae
Association of Wellesley College in honor of Mary E. Horton, the first professor
of Greek, and Susan M. Hallowell, the first professor of Botany. It is open to
alumnae of Wellesley College for graduate study in candidacy for the degree of
Doctor of Philosophy or for private research of equivalent standard. The
amount of the fellowship is 31250. A candidate for this fellowship must present
evidence of good health and financial need, and must remain unmarried through-
out the whole of her tenure.
Forms to be used in applying may be obtained from the Chairman of the
Fellowship Committee, Alumnae Office, Wellesley College. Applications must
be filed before February 15. The applicant should describe the plan of study
which she proposes to follow if granted the fellowship, and should present speci-
mens of written work which demonstrate her ability to carry on independent
study.
Research Fellowship for the Study of Orthop/edics in Relation to
Hygiene and Physical Education, yielding 31,000.
The general requirements to be met by applicants are as follows: — good
health; the bachelor's degree from a college or university of good standing; sound
preparation in chemistry, physics, and biology; special preparation in anatomy,
kinesiology, and physiology; familiarity with the elements of orthopaedic theory
and practice; and an insight into some one or more of the problems of ortho-
paedics as related to hygiene and physical education.
The work on the problem chosen in consultation with the department must be
done in residence at Wellesley College. It will, in general, begin in the Septem-
ber following the acceptance of the applicant, and will continue through one
calendar year. It will involve kinesiology, applied physiology, and the study
of clinical material. For the latter, opportunity will be provided to study the
work of orthopaedic surgeons in Boston and other eastern cities. The results of
the investigation are to be embodied in a thesis to be submitted to the depart-
ment and published.
Applications for this fellowship should be received by the Chairman of De-
partment of Hygiene and Physical Education, Wellesley College, not later than
March first of the academic year preceding that for which the fellowship is asked.
The decision reached by the department will be based upon the applicant's
record, upon personal correspondence, and, when possible, upon personal
interviews.
The Loretta Fish Carney Memorial Scholarship, yielding an income of
not less than 348, was founded in 1920 by the alumnae and staff of the Boston
Normal School of Gymnastics and the Department of Hygiene and Physical
Education of Wellesley College; the income of this fund to be awarded, at the
discretion of the teaching staff of the department and of the President of the
College, to a second-year student in the department.
The Amy Morris Homans Scholarship Fund, yielding an income of not
less than 3268, was founded in 1924 by the Mary Hemenway Alumnae Associa-
160 Fellowships and Scholarships
tion of the Graduate Department of Hygiene and Physical Education in honor
of Miss Amy Morris Homans, pioneer and leader in physical education in the
United States; the income of this fund to be awarded to a student in the Gradu-
ate Department of Hygiene and Physical Education who is in need of assistance
and shows proficiency and promise.
The Trustee Graduate Scholarships. Two scholarships yielding an
income of 3750 each have been established by the Trustees of Wellesley College
for members of the senior class who are qualified for graduate work. The schol-
arships may be used for study in this country or abroad. Notice of the condi-
tions of application are sent by the Dean of Graduate Students in the spring of
each year to qualified seniors.
Eighteen Graduate Scholarships of the annual value of tuition for one
year have been established for the benefit of approved candidates for the Mas-
ter's degree in residence at Wellesley College. Application for one of these
scholarships should be made before March first by personal letter from the candi-
date to the Dean of Graduate Students, Wellesley College, stating the applicant's
reasons for desiring to do graduate work in the department chosen, and her
reason for applying for the scholarship. The application should be accompanied
by letters of recommendation from persons familiar with the candidate's college
work, and by a doctor's certificate of health. The award will be made after the
candidate's formal application for admission to graduate work has been accepted.
Laboratory assistants and other members of the official staff of the College are
granted the privileges of graduate study without tuition charge.
Graduate Study in Classics: —
The American School of Classical Studies in Athens offers special opportunity
for graduate study in Greek. Membership without tuition,* is open to all
graduates and graduate students of Wellesley College who have done sufficient
work in Greek and Archaeology to profit by the opportunity. The object of the
School is to furnish an opportunity to study in Greece the literature, art, antiq-
uities, and history of the country under suitable guidance; to prosecute and to
aid original research in these subjects; and to assist in the exploration and exca-
vation of classic sites. Three fellowships of 31,000 each are awarded annually
on the basis of competitive examinations and are open to graduates of the
co-operating colleges of which Wellesley College is one. For further information
apply to Associate Professor Law.
The American School of Classical Studies in Rome is an integral part of the
American Academy. The object of this School is to promote the study of
classical literature in its bearing upon antiquities and history; of classical, Etrus-
can, and Italian art and archaeology, including topography, palaeography, and
epigraphy, and of the art and archaeology of the early Christian, Mediaeval, and
Renaissance periods within the boundaries of Italy. It furnishes regular in-
struction and guidance in some or all of these subjects, encourages and assists in
original research and exploration. Students should have the ability to read
ordinary Greek and Latin prose at sight and to use French and German as in-
• The income of the Julia Josephine Irvine Fund makes possible the studentships in the American
School of Classical Studies in Athens.
Scholarships 161
struments of research; they will find an elementary knowledge of Italian very
useful. Those admitted are expected to put themselves under the guidance of
the Director of the Academy and the Professor in charge of the Classical School
for the full period of eight months. Duly qualified graduates of Wellesley Col-
lege are exempt from any charge for tuition. Three Fellowships in the School of
Classical Studies are offered by the Academy, each with a stipend of 31,500 a
year for two years, and an allowance of 3500 for transportation to and from
Rome. The academic year begins on the first day of October and students are
expected to report in Rome at the Academy on that day. A Summer School
established in 1923 offers a program of great value for students and teachers
of the classics. For further information application may be made to Professor
A. Bertha Miller.
Scholarships in the Marine Biological Laboratory at Woods Hole. —
Admission to courses at Woods Hole is upon a selective basis. Wellesley College
offers annually two scholarships to applicants who are successful candidates.
This laboratory is primarily for research, but in the summer courses of instruc-
tion are offered, four in Zoology and one in Botany. The purpose of these
courses is to aid in the production and training of investigators, and first consid-
eration is given to persons who, whether graduate or undergraduate, give prom-
ise of contributing to the advancement of science. Applicants must have
completed at least two full college courses in the subject in which they wish to
work. The laboratory offers, besides these courses of instruction, opportunity
for research, either directed or independent. In addition, there are courses
of lectures on special topics and on subjects of general biological interest.
Applicants should state the character of the work to be done, whether botan-
ical or zoological, whether courses of instruction are desired, or investigation
under direction. All applications should be sent to Professor Snow or Professor
Moody in time to reach Wellesley College before April first. These applications
will be forwarded to Woods Hole to be acted upon May fifteenth; after this date
notification will be sent to the successful candidates.
B. FOR UNDERGRADUATES
The scholarships listed are awarded in recognition of genuine pecuniary need
and of satisfactory character, college citizenship, health, and intellectual and
practical ability as tested by a year or more of life and study at Wellesley College.
The foundations are of varying amounts, and the income is apportioned as justly
as possible according to need and merit. These scholarships are intended
primarily for students who have completed one or more years' work at Wellesley
College. Provision for new students and additional provision for other students
has been made as indicated below.
Beginning with the academic year 1926-27 the Trustees have set aside an-
nually a sum for the aid of students of recognized intellectual ability who are
financially unable to meet the charges for tuition and residence. The scholar-
ships vary from 3100 to 3500, and are awarded on the basis of merit with due
consideration to need, scholarship attainment, and personal qualities. Appli-
cations from students in college must be filed with the Executive Secretary of the
College, who is Chairman of the Faculty Committee on Scholarships, before
162 Scholarships
March first on forms furnished for the purpose and in accordance with the
instructions posted in February of each year.
Scholarships for Freshmen. Six competitive scholarships are awarded
annually on the basis of entrance examinations to members of the freshman
class needing financial assistance. One of these scholarships, for 3600, will be
given to the freshman who has made the highest average grade in her entrance
examinations. The other five scholarships, for 3500 each, will be assigned by
districts in the following divisions of states: New England, Middle Atlantic,
Southern, Middle Western, and Far Western. In each district the freshman
making the highest examination grade will ordinarily receive the award, but if
no student attains a sufficiently high average, the award will not be made.
Three regional scholarships, for 3300 each, are open to candidates of good scho-
lastic standing and evident promise from the Middle West, Far West, and
South. As funds permit, additional freshmen are aided by scholarships of 3100
to 3200 in the second semester.
applications from all candidates for admission should be made to the Dean of
Freshmen before March first of the year of admission.
Munger Hall, a cooperative house, accommodating 111, is open to self-helping
students of the three upper classes. For the year 1935-36 Norumbega Hall,
accommodating 50 students, will also be used as a cooperative house. Twenty
places in this house are reserved for freshmen. An award of a place in a coopera-
tive house is considered a part of the total scholarship grant.
The Personnel Bureau is actively engaged in bringing students into connection
with work to be done for compensation within the College and in the neighbor-
hood, but such employment, since it makes a distinct draft upon strength and
time, is hardly to be advised for the freshman year.
Another source of pecuniary aid is the work of the Students' Aid Society
established by the founders of Wellesley College and revived and incorporated
by the alumna? of the College in April, 1916. Distributions are made both in
gifts and in loans without interest. The existing funds are not sufficient for the
work in behalf of students which the Society aims to do, and contributions of
any amount will be gladly received by the treasurer of the Society, Miss Ruby
Willis, care of Wellesley College.
I. SCHOLARSHIPS
Adams Scholarship Fund of 32,200, founded in 1907 by bequest of Adoniram
J. Adams of Boston.
Aldrich Scholarship Fund of 3650, founded in 1931 by bequest of Alzora
Aldrich of the class of 1896.
Edith Baker Scholarship of 37,800, founded in 1892 by bequest of Mrs.
Eleanor J. W. Baker, in memory of her daughter.
Walter Baker Memorial Scholarship of 37,800, founded in 1880 by Mrs.
Eleanor J. W. Baker and increased by her bequest in 1892, in memory of
her son.
Scholarships 163
Dr. Alma Emerson Beale Fund of 33,300, founded in 1917 by bequest of
Dr. Alma E. Beale of the class of 1891.
Charles Bill Scholarship Fund of 37,800, founded in 1898 by bequest of
Charles Bill.
Charles B. Botsford Scholarship Fund of 35,600, founded in 1920 by be-
quest of Lucy A. Botsford.
Marian Kinney Brookings Scholarship Fund of 35,000 founded in 1929 by
Mrs. Selina M. Kinney, in memory of her daughter, of the class of 1904.
Florence N. Brown Memorial Scholarship of 35,600, founded in 1880 by
Mr. and Mrs. Samuel N. Brown, Jr., in memory of their daughter.
Emily Grace Bull Scholarship of 320,000 founded in 1930 by bequest of Mrs.
E. Grace Bull Morse of the class of 1899.
Arthur L. Carns Fund of 310,000, founded in 1931 by bequest of Arthur L.
Cams.
Mary Caswell Memorial Scholarship of 35,404, founded in 1928 by Miss
Caswell's faculty and alumnae friends.
Augustus R. Clark Memorial Scholarship of 35,600, founded in 1880 by
Mr. and Mrs. A. N. Clark.
Class of 1880 Scholarship of 31,194, founded in 1930 by the class of 1880.
Class of 1884 Scholarship Fund of 36,540, founded in 1919 by the class, and
increased in 1928 by bequest of Clara Brewster Potwin of the class of 1884.
Class of 1889 Memorial Scholarship of 31,100, founded in 1904 by the class,
in memory of classmates who had died.
Class of 1893 Memorial Scholarship Fund of 35,600, founded in 1913 by the
class, in memory of Laura Jones Miller and Carrie A. Mann.
Class of 1916 Scholarship Fund (accumulating), founded in 1933 by the class
of 1916.
Abbie A. Coburn Memorial Scholarship of 32,200, founded in 1892 by Mrs.
Helen Smith Coburn in memory of her sister-in-law.
Connecticut Scholarship of 35,600, founded in 1912 by bequest of Mrs.
Louise Frisbie.
Margaret McClung Cowan Fund of 31,100, founded in 1888 by Rev. and
Mrs. P. D. Cowan, in memory of their daughter.
Elizabeth and Susan Cushman Fund of 323,610, founded in 1923 by bequest
of Susan L. Cushman of the class of 1891.
164 Scholarships
George H. Davenport Scholarship of $10,000, founded in 1933 by bequest of
George H. Davenport, a former member of the Board of Trustees.
Norma Lieberman Decker Scholarship Fund of $5,487, founded in 1924 by
Mrs. Emma Lieberman in memory of her daughter, Mrs. Decker, of the
class of 1911.
Durant Memorial Scholarship of $5,600, founded in 1883 by the officers and
students of Wellesley College, in honor of Henry F. Durant.
Pauline A. Durant Scholarship of $8,250, founded in 1880 by Mr. Henry F.
Durant, and increased in 1919 by bequest of Mrs. Durant.
John Dwight Memorial Scholarship of $10,000, founded in 1930 by William
Scott Lyon.
Emmelar Scholarship of $5,600, founded in 1889 by the Class of 1891.
Ruby Frances Howe Farwell Memorial Scholarship of $2,100, founded in
1926 by John W. Farwell, in memory of his wife.
Elizabeth S. Fiske Scholarship of $5,600, founded in 1904 by bequest of Miss
Fiske.
Joseph N. Fiske Memorial Scholarship of $9,000, founded in 1892 by Mrs.
Fiske.
Rufus S. Frost Scholarships of $1,100, and $5,600, founded in 1880 by Mr.
Frost.
Howard Cogswell Furman Scholarship of $5,000, founded in 1928 by Mrs.
Eleanor Van Allen Furman.
Mary Elizabeth Gere Scholarship Fund of $5,600, founded in 1900 by be-
quest of Mary Elizabeth Gere.
Josephine Keene Gifford Scholarship of $2,000, founded in 1932 by Mrs.
Jarvis B. Keene, in memory of her daughter, of the class of 1917.
Goodwin Scholarship of $5,600, founded in 1897 by bequest of Mrs. Hannah B.
Goodwin, a former member of the Board of Trustees.
Helen Day Gould Scholarship of $11,200, founded in 1896 and increased in
1901 by Helen Miller Gould Shepard in memory of her mother.
Helen Day Gould Scholarship of $11,200, founded in 1899 and increased in
1901 by Helen Miller Gould Shepard.
Helen Day Gould Scholarship of $11,200, founded in 1901 by Helen Miller
Gould Shepard.
M. Elizabeth Gray Scholarships of $11,200, founded in 1914 by bequest
of William J. Gray.
Scholarships 165
Grover Scholarship of 35,600, founded in 1878 by William O. Grover.
Sarah Evelyn Hall Scholarship Fund of 25,000, bequeathed in 1911 by
Sarah Evelyn Hall of the class of 1879 as a scholarship fund subject to
annuity, became available for scholarships in 1930.
Cora Stickney Harper Fund of 22,200, founded in 1915 by bequest of Mrs.
Harper of the class of 1880.
Emily P. Hidden Scholarship Fund of 22,200, founded in 1909 by bequest of
Emily P. Hidden.
Winifred Frances Hill Scholarship of 220,000, founded in 1928 by bequest
of Ida Parker Hill.
Sarah J. Holbrook Scholarship of 23,300, founded in 1898 by bequest of
Sarah J. Holbrook.
Evelyn and Mary Elizabeth Holmes Scholarship Fund of 26,000, founded
in 1930 by bequest of Evelyn Holmes, sister of Mary Elizabeth Holmes of
the class of 1892.
Sarah J. Houghton Memorial Scholarship of 26,700, founded in 1889, in
memory of his wife, by William S. Houghton, a former member of the Board
of Trustees.
Ada L. Howard Scholarship of 26,700, founded in 1895 in honor of Miss How-
ard, the first President of the College.
Sarah B. Hyde Scholarship of 22,200, founded in 1898 by bequest of Sarah B.
Hyde.
John and Jane Jackson Fund of 21,000, founded in 1932 by Margaret H.
Jackson.
Eliza C. Jewett Scholarships of 26,700, founded in 1894 by bequest of Eliza
C. Jewett.
Sophie Jewett Memorial Scholarship of 21,100, founded in 1911 by Elsa D.
James Garvin of the class of 1906 in memory of Sophie Jewett, instructor
and associate professor of English Literature 1889-1909.
Mildred Keim Fund of 211,200, founded in 1912 by Newton and Frances S.
Keim in memory of their daughter Mildred, until her junior year a member
of the class of 1912.
Katharine Knapp Scholarship of 25,600, founded in 1920 by bequest of
Katharine Knapp.
ViNNiETTA June Libbey Scholarship (accumulating), founded in 1932 by be-
quest of Vinnietta June Libbey of the class of 1892.
Gertrude C. Munger Scholarships of 210,587, founded in 1930 by gift of
Miss Jessie Munger of the class of 1887.
166 Scholarships
Anna S. Newman Memorial Scholarship of $2,100 founded in 1913, through
gifts from former students.
New York Wellesley Club Scholarship Fund of $6,225, founded in 1930
by the New York Wellesley Club.
Northfield Seminary Scholarship of $5,600, founded in 1878.
Anna Palen Scholarship of $11,200, founded in 1902.
Mary Arnold Petrie Scholarship (accumulating), founded in 1934 by be-
quest of Mrs. Anna A. Petrie, in memory of her daughter.
Adelaide L. Pierce Scholarship Fund of $15,000, founded in 1933 by bequest
of Helen A. Pierce of the class of 1891, in memory of her mother.
Eleanor Pillsbury Memorial Scholarship Fund of $106,500, founded in
1926 by Mr. and Mrs. Cyrus H. K. Curtis, in memory of their daughter,
Eleanor Pillsbury Pennell of the class of 1913.
Pittsburgh Wellesley Club Scholarship of $1,500, founded in 1932 by the
Pittsburgh Wellesley Club.
Catherine Ayer Ransom Scholarship of $1,100, founded in 1908 by bequest
of Mrs. Ransom.
Mae Rice Memorial Scholarship Fund of $1,100, founded in 1905 by the
class of 1902, in memory of their classmate.
Samuel M. and Anna M. Richardson Fund of $102,619, founded in 1931 by
bequest of Samuel M. Richardson, and increased in 1933 by bequest of
Mrs. Richardson.
Rollins Scholarship of $9,000, founded in 1903 by Augusta and Hannah H.
Rollins, in memory of their parents.
Helen J. Sanborn Alumnae Scholarship Fund of $11,200, founded in 1905
by Helen J. Sanborn of the class of 1884.
Oliver N., Mary C, and Mary Shannon Fund of $18,550, founded in 1916 by
bequest of Mary Shannon.
Harriet F. Smith Scholarship Fund of $22,500, founded in 1881 by Henry
Fowle Durant, in memory of his mother.
Mary Frazer Smith Scholarship of $1,000, founded in 1934 by bequest of
Mary Frazer Smith of the class of 1896.
Stockwell Memorial Scholarship of $2,000, founded in 1930 by bequest of
Marie Louise Stockwell of the class of 1897.
Stone Educational Fund of $28,100, founded in 1884 by Valeria G. Stone.
Sweatman Scholarship of $5,600, founded in 1880 by V. Clement Sweatman.
Scholarships 167
Jessie Goff Talcott Fund of 3538,799, founded in 1931 by bequest of Mrs.
Elizabeth R. Stevens, who stipulated that one-half of the income be used
for scholarships.
Julia Ball Thayer Scholarship of $6,700, founded in 1907 by bequest of Mrs.
Julia Ball Thayer.
Jane Topliff Memorial Scholarship of $6,700, founded in 1883 by Mrs.
William S. Houghton, in memory of her mother.
Ann Morton Towle Memorial Scholarship of 35,600, founded in 1901 by
bequest of George Francis Towle.
George William Towle Memorial Scholarship Fund of 37,550 founded in
1901 by bequest of George Francis Towle, in memory of his father.
Marie Louise Tuck Scholarship Fund of 311,200, founded in 1919 by be-
quest of Miss Alice C. Tuck, in memory of her sister of the class of 1883.
Union Church Scholarship of 32,800, founded in 1880 by Mr. and Mrs.
A. W. Stetson.
Weston Scholarship of 35,600, founded in 1878 by David M. Weston.
Jeannie L. White Scholarship of 35,600, founded in 1886 by bequest of
Jeannie L. White.
Amasa J. Whiting Scholarship of 32,600, founded in 1928 by bequest of Mrs.
May C. W. Speare, in memory of her father.
Annie M. Wood Scholarship of 311,200, founded in 1880 by her husband,
Frank Wood, and increased by his bequest in 1915.
Caroline A. Wood Scholarship of 35,600, the first scholarship of the college,
founded in 1878 by Mrs. Caroline A. Wood, in memory of her husband,
Caleb Wood.
Warren Mead Wright Scholarship Fund of 310,000 founded in 1931, in
memory of her son, by Mrs. George S. Wright of the class of 1881.
II. LOAN FUNDS
McDonald-Ellis Memorial of 31,000, founded in 1908 by former students of
the McDonald-Ellis School of Washington, D. C, in memory of the late
principals of the school, and increased in 1926 by gift of Jessie C. McDonald
of the class of 1888.
Helen A. Shafer Loan Fund of 31,000, founded in 1930 by bequest of Mary
L. Sawyer of the class of 1888.
III. PRIZE FUNDS
The income of these funds is assigned for excellence in the subjects indicated.
1 68 Equipment
Billings Prize Fund (Music).
Katharine Coman Memorial Prize Fund (Economics and Social History)
Davenport Prize Fund (Oral Interpretation).
Isabelle Eastman Fisk Prize Fund (Public Speaking or Debating).
Sophia Helen Fisk Fund (Crew).
Mary G. Hillman Mathematical Scholarship (Mathematics).
Jacqueline Award (English Composition).
Mary White Peterson Prize Fund (Botany, Chemistry, Zoology).
Stimson Mathematical Scholarship (Mathematics).
Ethel Folger Williams Memorial Fund (German).
PERSONNEL BUREAU
The staff of the Personnel Bureau consists of a Director, a Consultant, an
Associate, an Appointment Secretary, and two assistants.
The Personnel Bureau is a central depository of the individual histories of the
students as collected from the records of grades, from interviews, personality
ratings by the faculty, psychological tests, health reports, and extra-curricular
activities, and is maintained for furnishing material of value in educational and
vocational advising. The Bureau is in active cooperation with other adminis-
trative offices by means of the Personnel Board. This is composed of the
President of the College, the Deans, the Recorder, the Health Officer, the Resi-
dent Physician, the Professor of Psychology, and the Director of the Personnel
Bureau. Meetings are held from time to time for the consideration of personnel
questions and methods of procedure.
The Personnel Bureau, established by the Founders as the Teachers' Registry,
includes also in its scope the placement of graduates in teaching and in business
positions, and the work of the Committee on Vocational Information, which
arranges lectures and discussions on occupations. Registration for placement is
open to all who have taken courses in Wellesley College, and seniors are invited
to register during their residence at the College. The Bureau maintains files,
collects credentials, and is the source of information concerning the vocational
equipment and experience of Wellesley women. The registration fee is 32.00
for life membership, and no commission is charged for placement. The Bureau
also registers undergraduates and alumnae for summer work, and has charge of
undergraduate employment.
EQUIPMENT
Hetty H. R. Green Hall, the administration building, contains the offices
of the President and other officers of administration, class and seminar rooms,
the faculty assembly hall, and offices of student organizations.
Equipment 169
Founders Hall, a building for lecture rooms and department offices pertaining
to instruction in the Liberal Arts, was opened for use in September, 1919. The
hall was built from the Restoration Fund, secured for the College through trus-
tees, faculty, alumnae, and other friends, and replaces in some part College Hall,
the first and main building of the College, destroyed by fire, March 17, 1914.
The building is dedicated as a memorial to the Founders of the College, Henry
Fowle Durant and his wife, Pauline Adeline Durant.
The Library of the College, endowed by Eben Norton Horsford, now num-
bers over 150,000 bound volumes, including the departmental libraries. The
books in the General Library building form a collection chosen primarily for the
use of students and instructors in the college courses in Literature and Languages,
History, Economics, Sociology, Philosophy, Education, Religious History, and
certain of the sciences. The General Library is open on week days from 8:10
A.M. to 9:30 P.M., and on Sundays from 2:30 to 5:30 P.M. Students have
direct access to the shelves. The Library is catalogued by author and subject
entries, and the most recent and useful bibliographical aids are provided. Spe-
cial effort is made to train students in methods of research.
The Library subscribes for more than six hundred American and foreign peri-
odicals, including daily newspapers representing different sections of the United
States, besides representative British and Continental dailies.
The Library has also many special collections of great interest and value to
the student doing graduate or other research work. Among the most valuable
of these are the Plimpton Collection, established by Mr. George A. Plimpton
in memory of his wife, Frances Pearsons Plimpton, of the class of 1884, which
comprises over a thousand volumes of Italian books and manuscripts chiefly of
the Renaissance; the Ruskin Collection, the gift of Mr. Charles E. Goodspeed;
and the Collection of Early and Rare Editions of English Poetry given for the
most part by Professor George Herbert Palmer.
The Brooks Memorial Room, opened in 1921, provides comfortable and beau-
tiful surroundings with carefully selected books for leisure hours of reading.
The following departmental libraries are located in the buildings of the re-
spective departments: Art, Astronomy, Botany, Chemistry, Hygiene, Music
Physics, Psychology, and Zoology.
Farnsworth Art Building. — The Farnsworth Art building was the gift of
the late Isaac D. Farnsworth in 1889. It contains lecture rooms and exhibition
galleries and is used by the department of Art for its library, study rooms, and
studios.
Through the active interest of friends of the College, the Museum contains
a representative selection of Egyptian minor arts; the M. Day Kimball collec-
tion of classical sculpture; examples of Graeco-Buddhist stucco sculpture from
Kashmir; a fragment of mosaic excavated at Antioch in 1932; a few Italian
primitives; a 16th century tapestry; a bronze by Kolbe; an early Corot; an attrib-
uted Morland; the Cumaean Sibyl by Elihu Vedder; the Spanish Cavalier by
Frank Duveneck; a portrait study by Whistler; and a late Renoir.
Further information may be found in the Art Museum Bulletin.
170 Equipment
Music Hall and Billings Hall are large brick buildings, devoted to the
department of Music. Music Hall contains offices, studios, and practice rooms
equipped with thirty-seven new pianos of standard makes, four victrolas and a
Mason and I Iamlin Ampico; also a large room, containing a two-manual pipe
organ for the use of the organ pupils. Billings Hall, opened in 1904, contains
the offices of the Professor of Music and the Assistant, the library, and a class-
room for instruction in Musical Theory; also a concert room with a seating
capacity of 330 people, containing a grand piano, a clavichord, a victrola, and
the Grover organ — a three-manual organ, rebuilt and modernized by the Estey
Organ Company.
The Music Library includes a collection of manuscripts, twenty-five hundred
scores and two thousand reference books on musical subjects. The depart-
ment owns about eight hundred victrola records and fifty ampico rolls.
Alumnae Hall, the gift of the alumnae for a recreation centre, contains an
auditorium seating 1,570, a hall for college dances, a library, committee rooms
for the use of alumnae and students, and full equipment for entertaining.
LABORATORIES AND SCIENTIFIC COLLECTIONS
Astronomy. — The Whitin Observatory is a one-story building of brick, faced
with white marble, situated on a small hill on the college grounds, and devoted
entirely to the use of the department of Astronomy. It contains two rooms sur-
mounted by rotating domes, twenty-five feet and twelve and one-half feet in
diameter respectively; a transit room; a spectroscopic laboratory; a large, well-
lighted room for elementary laboratory work; and another large room in which
is kept the department library. In the larger dome room is mounted a twelve-
inch Clark equatorial refracting telescope, which is provided with a filar microm-
eter, a polarizing photometer, and an attachment for photographing the moon.
The smaller dome contains a six-inch Clark refractor, which is provided with an
electric driving clock, a filar micrometer, a wedge photometer, and an Evershed
protuberance spectroscope, and which may be used as a guiding telescope for a
small photographic camera. Both domes are rotated by electric motors. In
the transit room is mounted a Bamberg prismatic transit of three inches aper-
ture. A four-inch telescope with objective by Browning is mounted in a south
wall of the building, with the eye end inside and the optic axis parallel to the
axis of the Earth; a plane mirror beneath the object-glass reflects into the latter
the light of the object observed. In the spectroscopic laboratory are a Hale
spectrohelioscope and a small Rowland concave grating spectroscope. The
Observatory is supplied with two Howard sidereal clocks, a Bond mean-time
chronometer, and a chronograph, any of which may be connected electrically
through a switch-board with keys near the various telescopes; a Berger surveyor's
transit; a 60-mm. Zeiss tripod telescope; two calculating machines; a Gaertner
comparator for measuring spectrograms; a projecting lantern and about 1,200
astronomical lantern slides; and a large collection of illustrative apparatus and
photographs. A flat portion of the roof of the neighboring Sage Hall is fitted
with illuminated desks for the use of astronomy students during naked-eye study
of the sky.
Equipment 171
Observatory House, the residence of the Director of the Observatory, is near-
by. Both the Observatory and the house, and also much of the astronomical
equipment, are the gift of the late Mrs. John C. VVhitin.
Botany. — The department of Botany occupies a modern building (Sage Hall)
with laboratories, research rooms, offices, etc., fully equipped for general and
special work. Connecting with the building at three points is a range of modern
greenhouses consisting of a large palm house and fourteen smaller houses.
The illustrative collections comprise an herbarium of some eighty thousand
sheets, a working museum of more than five thousand specimens, and a large
collection of lantern slides and microscopical mounts. The department has an
"Outdoor Laboratory" for the use of certain courses. The greenhouses con-
tribute to all the courses in the department, but are of especial importance in
connection with the work in landscape gardening, physiology, ecology, taxon-
omy, and genetics. The native flora about Wellesley is easily accessible, furnish-
ing a convenient field for both the taxonomist and ecologist. The Susan M.
Hallowell Memorial Library is exceptionally well supplied with reference works
and with current periodicals.
Chemistry. — The department of Chemistry occupies a fine, modern, fire-proof
building which is excellently equipped for its work. There are three lecture
rooms with complete demonstration tables and apparatus for special experi-
ments, a seminar room, and a library in memory of Professor Charlotte Fitch
Roberts. Each course is provided with a laboratory designed and equipped for
its special needs. There is a large dark room for optical instruments and smaller
ones for photographic and spectrographic work. Rooms have been arranged for
special organic experiments, for electrolytic work and for microcumbustions.
General research rooms are available which are provided with equipment adapt-
able to various experimental problems. Throughout the building there are sys-
tems for hot and cold water, distilled water, gas, compressed air, vacuum, high-
pressure steam, hydrogen sulfide, and both direct and alternating current, so that
these services are available wherever desired.
Geology and Geography. — The department of Geology and Geography has
a large and well equipped lecture hall, a small lecture room, and two laboratories.
Both lecture rooms are equipped with projecting lanterns.
The museum and laboratory material of the department includes a typical
collection of dynamical and structural geology specimens, systematic mineralogi-
cal and petrographic collections, and a wide variety of fossils. These collections
are all the generous gifts of colleges, museums, and friends. The department
has two noteworthy collections. The first is the Horace I. Johnson Mineral
Collection, which consists of five thousand valuable and beautiful mineral speci-
mens, including many precious metals and stones. This collection is the gift of
the late Mr. John Merton, and was presented through the Class of 1915 by the
courtesy of Miss M. Helen Merton. The second is the Reverend David F. Pierce
Collection, which includes a complete and rare collection of building and orna-
mental stones and many precious and semi-precious minerals. This collection is
the gift of Professor Frederick E. Pierce of Yale, Miss Anna H. Pierce, and Miss
Mary E. Pierce of the Class of 1898.
172 Equipment
The maps of the department include many large scale wall maps, maps of the
United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, and complete files of geologic folios
and topographic maps of the United States Geologic Survey. In addition several
thousand topographic maps and folios are arranged in collections for individual
use in the laboratory. The department has an excellent assortment of lantern
slides which illustrate many phases of geology and geography.
Hyg ene and Physical Education. — The department of Hygiene and Physi-
cal Education occupies Mary Hemenway Hall on the western border of the col-
lege grounds. The equipment of the department is designed for the application
of modern science to the maintenance and promotion of health and for education
through motor activity.
Mary Hemenway Hall includes a large well-lighted gymnasium with ample
shower facilities, administrative offices, class rooms, and laboratories for anat-
omy, physiology, hygiene, anthropometry, corrective exercise, and research.
Unusual facilities for outdoor activities are provided as follows: one six-
target archery range, six volley ball, four basket ball, and twenty-two tennis
courts; one baseball diamond, two hockey and lacrosse fields, one 100-yard
straight-away track and jumping pits; and a nine-hole golf course. Bridle paths
are available for horseback riding. Close by, on Lake Waban, are two boat-
houses, with canoes, eight-oared shells, and motor boat for coaching and safety
patrol. The Lake provides opportunity for swimming in the spring and fall
terms, and for skating in the winter. The campus is well adapted to skiing,
snowshoeing, and coasting.
The department library in Mary Hemenway Hall contains 4,500 volumes, a
collection of valuable pamphlets, and regularly receives 59 periodicals dealing
with matters related to hygiene and physical education.
Mathematics. — The department has a collection of 45 Brill-Schilling models
of surfaces, chiefly of the second and third orders, and a lantern for use with large
thread models in the study of skew curves, beside several simple models, includ-
ing some made by its members. There is a fine transit for the use of classes in
trigonometry, and two computing machines, used in the classes in statistics.
Physics. — The new Physics Laboratory, opened in September, 1935, is of fire-
proof construction. On the second floor are large, well-lighted laboratories for
general physics, optics, electricity, and meteorology; on the first floor, lecture
and recitation rooms surrounding a large apparatus room, library, and offices.
In the basement are well-equipped machine and wood shops, advanced labora-
tories, research rooms, photographic dark rooms, glass-blowing and chemical
preparation rooms. Lecture tables and laboratories are fitted with gas, water,
compressed air and vacuum systems. Six electrical distribution panels permit
the use of direct and alternating currents in all parts of the building.
The equipment is thoroughly modern. The lecture apparatus is sufficient to
permit a wide range of experiments. In the elementary laboratory, duplication
of apparatus permits a close coordination between lectures and laboratory exer-
cises. The equipment for advanced laboratory work is especially strong in
electrical and optical apparatus. It includes unusual equipment for experiments
in electric oscillations; a Hilger quartz spectrograph and constant deviation
spectrometer; a Weiss electromagnet, a Bragg X-ray spectrometer, etc. A
mechanician makes and repairs apparatus as needed.
Equipment 173
Psychology. — The new laboratory, opened in October 1935, consists of a
number of small rooms in which an observer and subject may work on elementary
problems; several larger laboratories for advanced problems requiring more
elaborate apparatus; specially designed rooms for studies in visual, auditory,
and olfactory sensations; facilities for photography; a small but well-fitted
workshop. There is also a room so equipped that it may be used, when funds
permit, for animal experimentation. The money from the Sanford Fund is
being used to purchase all apparatus necessary for a modern laboratory.
The library and seminar room is dedicated to the memory of Eleanor Acheson
McCulloch Gamble, late professor of psychology.
Zoology and Physiology. — The department of Zoology and Physiology
occupies a modern building (Sage Hall), containing lecture rooms, laboratories,
research rooms, a library — a memorial to Caroline B. Thompson, — a museum,
and a vivarium, which includes mammal rooms and runways and a large
aquarium room containing frog and turtle pools, tanks for salt and fresh water
forms and for tropical fishes. The museum material includes a collection of
New England birds; an interesting collection of birds and bird-skins from Peru,
the gift of Mrs. Graham Ker; and a valuable collection of shells, the gift of Mrs.
Rebecca S. Beaman of Cambridge.
174
Degrees Conferred
DEGREES CONFERRED IN 1935
MASTER OF ARTS
Audra Julia Albrecht (B.A., Wellesley College, 1933), Chemistry.
Catharine Harding Dwight (B.A., Wellesley College, 1901), Italian.
Margaret Antoinette Gerber (B.A., Wellesley College, 1930), English Literature.
Ruth Esther Grew (B.A., Wellesley College, 1934), History.
Mi lima Djevdet Inay (B.A., Istanbul American College, 1934), Zoology and Physiology.
Marguerite Harriet Naps (B.A., Milwaukee- Downer College, 1933), Chemistry.
Dorothy Jane Perkins (B.A., Wellesley College, 1933), Chemistry.
Edith Mathilde Stockman (B.A., Connecticut College, 1934), German.
Marca Isabel Taliaferro (B.A., University of Richmond, Westhampton College, 1933), Zoology
and Physiology.
Margaret Eleanor Thomas (B.A., University of Wyoming, 1933), English Literature.
Elizabeth Helen Thorpe (B.A., Oxford University, St. Hugh's College, 1934), History and Politi-
cal Science.
Bertha Charlotte Vogel (B.A., Smith College, 1926), German.
Margaret May Wright (B.A., Oberlin College, 1934), German.
MASTER OF SCIENCE IN HYGIENE AND PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Mary Dixey Bigelow (B.A., Pomona College, 1934).
Jeanette Cutts (B.A., Bates College, 1930).
Lois Elizabeth Ellfeldt(B.S. in Physical Education, The George Washington University, 1933).
Sara Louise Houston (B.A., Wellesley College, 1934).
Barbara Bertha Johnston (B.S., Elmira College, 1933).
Selena Read Knight (B.A., Converse College, 1933).
Helen Wallace McColl (B.A., Converse College, 1932).
Mary Berrien Nevius (B.A., Wilson College, 1932).
Marjorie Porter Phillips (B.S. in Education, Boston University, School of Education, 1931).
Alma Virginia Wyche (B.A., Duke University, 1930).
BACHELOR OF ARTS
Doris Abel
Charlotte Alexander
Mary Teulon Allen
Lucia Greenman Allyn
Louise Amerman
Catherine Jane Andrews
Pauline Jessica Arkus
Rena June Aronson
Laura Jean Arrowsmith
Mary Watt Atherton
Alice Ayers
Jane Webster Badger
Ruth Barnefield
Barbara Tufts Barnes
Carey Wilberta Barnett
Alice Graham Bayne
Barbara Beakes
Barbara Beall
Dorothy Bradford Belt
Marjory Best
Elizabeth Louise Billings
Ruth Rita Bii.rky
Ruth Boschwitz
Esther Penny Boutcher
Margaret Innes Bouton
Elizabeth Brainerd
Marjorie Anita Braun
Elise Bristol
Helen Frances Brown
Janet Danby Brown
Marjorie Brown
Elisabeth Virginia Burns
Grace Lorraine Burtis
Patricia Blanche Busey
Elizabeth Averill Button
Helen Eustis Cameron
Anne Walton Capern
loretta carleton
Margaret Carmichael
Doris Adams Carpenter
Barbara Carr
Eleanor Lorene Carter
Virginia Annette Cassidy
Jean Clark Chamberlin
Mary-Morris Chaney
Beatrice Clark
Margot Sinclair Clark
Melva Adeline Clark
Degrees Conferred
'75
Martha Eucenia Cleaver
Jessie Thomson Cleverdon
Frances Wentworth Clough
Julia Cornelia Cocswell
Ruth Collin
Margaret Eleanor Connors
Carolyn Vail Cook
Ruth Eleanor Cortell
Marion Wright Crampton
Elizabeth Creamer
Mary Gertrude Crowley
Nancy Jane Cummins
Sylvia Dartt
Geraldine Ruth Davis
Marion Rosina Delnoce
Emily Rogers Denton
Emily Edna DeNyse
Dorothy Gillette Dissell
Lulu Frances Doremus
Betty Virginia Doyle
Dorothy Rita Drinkwater
Frances Lewis Eady
Eleanor Louise Eckels
Nancy Dorothea Ellen
Barbara Elliot
Catherine Anne Epstein
Esther Epstein
Lenore Alice Epstein
Clara Lee Carter Faris
Annette Fassler
Barbara Ellen Files
Ruth Shirley Fleischl
Thelma Mildred Flint
Hulda Elisabet Fornell
Gertrude Whitman Foster
Roberta Parkinson Foster
Rosalie Frank
Mary Elizabeth Frear
Sarah Freeman
Janet Eva French
Edith Stix Friedman
Charlotte Elizabeth Gardiner
Betty Louise Geismer
Mary Margaret Gibbons
Frances Pinkney Gott
Eleanore Beatrice Grant
Phyllis Judith Green
Marjorie Isabelle Greene
Elizabeth Grover
Tacey Elizabeth Hackstaff
Elizabeth Ann Hamilton
Jean Priscilla Harrington
Dorothy Frances Harris
Margaret Louise Harris
Mary Fogle Harrold
Jane Worsley Hartzog
Marian Gertrude Hastings
Martha Eldora Hathaway
Anne Healy
Grace Margaret Hellerson
Mary Henderson
Patricia Althea Hendrickson
Myerma Reid Hersey
Margaret Jane Hildebrand
Janet Hilsinger
Jean Elizabeth Hogenauer
Margaret Aitken Holt
Sarita Sessions Hopkins
Eleanor Boyd Horton
Mary Elizabeth Houlihan
Jewell Peterson Hunter
Janice Jane Jackson
Barbara Jacobs
Elsa Serge Jaffin
Virginia Sartwell James
Sarah Bartholomew Johlin
Miriam Johnson
Charlotte Jones
Doris Woodbury Jones
Martha Lillian Josephs
Sara Babette Kaufman
Natalie Williamine Keene
Dorothy Jane Kelley
Miriam Marjorie Keli.ner
Virginia Thomas Kilburn
Mary MacClement Kincsley
Mary Reynolds Kline
Ellen Marjorie Knower
Genevieve Louise Knupfer
Bella Kussy
Katharine Borden Lake
Catherine Mary Lamb
Margaret Anne Lancaster
Sarah Jane Landauer
Helen Elizabeth Ledyard
Margaret Lee
Jane Elizabeth Leeds
Maxine Rita Levin
Virginia Mae Lewis
Elaine Lilley
Eleanor Anna Lindemann
Martha Louise Little
Dorothy Edna Lobb
Doris Lodge
Ruth Ellen Lorish
Florence Lyons
Mary Christine Lyons
Betty Lu McBride
Elizabeth Knight McClintic
Josephine Margaretta McDonough
Marion Frances McEnery
Doris McGee
Arria Griffith McGinniss
Gertrude Elizabeth McIver
Sarah McKeever
Rosemary Miller McNatt
Catherine Sanderson Martin
Alice Julienne Marting
Julia H\rriet Maslen
Mary Jane Mason
Marie Marcia Mayfield
Elaine Wootten Meekins
Margaret Mellor
Marjorie Merritt
Helen Elizabeth Meyer
Charlotte Lee Miller
Edith Kitzmiller Miller
Mary Harris Miller
Frances Elsie Elizabeth Mitchell
Marjorie Clare Morris
Martha Goddard Morrow
Dorothy Jane Moseni elder
Eleanor Mowry
Elisabeth Muir
Elizabeth Ann Mullen
Sarah Elizabeth Murdock
Louise Helen Nash
Eunice Lawrence Needham
Jeanette Nelson
Betty May Nevin
Jean Elizabeth Newland
Ruth Nicholson
Ruth Noble
Helen Louise Thomas Norcross
176
Degrees Conferred
Anna Marie O'Connor
Mary Carroll O'Leary
Margaret Aacot Olsen
Phyllis Mary Opper
Henrietta Page
Madeline Palmer
Winifred Isabel Park
Elizabeth Rebecca Parker
Isabelle Leonard Parker
Dora Patten
Eleanor Florence Pease
Ella Green Peck
Eleanor Pelt
Virginia Nathalie Yvonne Peugnet
Virginia Washburn Peyser
Micaela Constance Phelan
Dorothy Phillips
Ruth Lf.et Pitcairn
Helen Ege Pittenger
Ruth Irene Place
Barbara Porteous
Jane Posner
Audrey Price
Zillah Soule Prophett
Priscilla Proudfoot
Alice Marion Rand
Lena Elizabeth Ready
Helen Bricker Rearick
Barbara Gaston Reeves
Nancy Nicholson Reinke
Muriel Margaret Rice
Jane Elizabeth Richards
Alice Richardson
Eleanor Mitchell Riley
Louise Langford Riley
Virginia Lee Riley
Adele de la Barre Robinson
Hope Elizabeth Robinson
Beatrice Terese Roggen
Dorothy Virginia Rose
Charlotte Gladys Rubinow
Elizabeth Anabel Rudy
Erma Louise Rumbaugh
Dorothy Helen Saathoff
Esther Sagalyn
Jeanette Sayre
Eleanor Sylvia Schwarz
Helen Jeanne Seitz
Barbara Alice Sellars
Anne Lancaster Shanklin
Antoinette Florence Sharp
Evelyn Shimelman
Marjorie Esther Shumacker
Selma Ruth Silverman
Frances Maude Sloan
Barbara Garth waite Smith
Eleanor Audrey Smith
Janet Smith
Katharine Wiswell Smith
Louise Joslyn Smith
Ruth Elizabeth Smith
Jeanette Snyder
Maude Louise Sommer
Dorothea Elisabeth Stater
Mary Elizabeth Stedman
Mary Elizabeth Steele
Nancy Pauline Stern
Dorothy Bailey Sterrett
Emily Arnold Stetson
Faith Stevenson
Marian Colman Stewart
Esther Harding Swaffield
Eleanor Frances Tarr
Jane Louise Taylor
Marjorie Isabel Taylor
Gertrude Ada Thomas
Laura Marie Thomas
Julia Earll Thorne
Katharine Wolcott Toll
Oi.ga Anna Marie Tomec
Helen Louise Tomkinson
Carol Louise Treyz
Mary Gilman Tufts
Ella Messinger Uhler
Mary Helene Van Loan
Barbara Woodburn Van Wie
Virginia Millicent Veeder
Margaret Walker Wade
Marian Blauvelt Walbran
Sarah Joy Waldron
Mildred Yale Waterhouse
Virginia Webbert
Ellen Sayles Webster
Betty Stone Weidman
scotta vletta weymouth
Charlotte Mae Wheaton
Louise Bigelow Whipple
Elizabeth Paine Wiggin
Edith Abigail Wightman
Alice Amelia Williams
Marion Williams
Alida Wilson
Mary Bates Winslow
Helen LaBar Withers
Mary Elizabeth Witter
Jean Barnes Wolfe
Dorothy Frances Wood
Priscilla Edna Woodley
Norma Zolte
Marion Viola Zottoli
CERTIFICATE OF THE DEPARTMENT OF HYGIENE AND
PHYSICAL EDUCATION
Mary Lowndes Barron (B.A., Converse College, 1933).
Helen Parker Bowlby (B.A., Wellesley College, 1934).
Sara Louise Houston (B.A., Wellesley College, 1934).
Barbara Bertha Johnston (B.S., Elmira College, 1933).
Selena Read Knight (B.A., Converse College, 1933).
Florence Elizabeth Ludlum (B.A., Wellesley College, 1934).
Marjorie Porter Phillips (B.S. in Education, Boston University, School of Education, 1931).
Ruth Carolyn Wiggins (B.A., Wellesley College, 1934).
Alma Virginia Wyche (B.A., Duke University, 1930).
Honors in a Special Field 177
HONORS IN A SPECIAL FIELD
Pauline Jessica Arkus
Marxian Theory and Russian Practice — The Industrial Worker
Ruth Rita Bilsky
The Evolution of the Gold Standard
Ruth Eleanor Cortell
The Extraction, Assay and Functions of the Male Hormone and its
Interrelations with the Anterior Pituitary
Esther Epstein
The American Workingman in Post-War Literature
Lenore Alice Epstein
Marxian Theory and the Bolshevik Rise to Power
Margaret Louise Harris
A Study of the Theory and Methods of Construction of the Rational Plane Cubic
Martha Eldora Hathaway
A Study of Fourier Series
Sarita Sessions Hopkins
Medagliere delle Donne Ariostee con Riferimento ai Romanzi Medioevali
di Chretien de Troyes
Sarah Bartholomew Johlin
The Last Judgment in Early Christian and Byzantine Art: Iconography and
Literary Sources
Genevieve Louise Knupfer
Nationalism and Cosmopolitanism in French Social Thought, 1715-1789
Virginia Nathalie Yvonne Peugnet
Hellenistic Relief on Armor, with Special Reference to the Armored Statue Recently
Found in the Agora at Athens
Jeanette Sayre
A History of the Penal Treatment of Women in Pennsylvania, Massachusetts and
New York from 1775 to the Present
Ella Messinger Uhler
A Group Study of the Biological Value of Carotene
178 Prizes
PRIZES
KATHARINE COMAN MEMORIAL PRIZE, for Economic and Social History
Audrey Price
DAVENPORT PRIZE, for excellence in Speech
Virginia Millicent Veeder
ERASMUS HISTORY PRIZE
Edith Stix Friedman
1SABELLE EASTMAN FISK PRIZE, for excellence in Public Speaking
Margaret Wynn MacCallum
MARY G. HILLMAN PRIZE IN MATHEMATICS
Elma Pierson Van Artsdalen
JACQUELINE AWARD, for excellence in English Composition
Betty Virginia Doyle
JOHN MASEFIELD PRIZE, for excellence in Prose Writing
Frances Elsie Elizabeth Mitchell
JOHN MASEFIELD PRIZE, for excellence in Verse Writing
Elizabeth Brainerd
MARY WHITE PETERSON PRIZE IN ZOOLOGY
Ruth Eleanor Cortell
ETHEL FOLGER WILLIAMS MEMORIAL PRIZE, for excellence in German
Jane Gardner
Scholarships and Fellowships 179
SCHOLARSHIPS AND FELLOWSHIPS
GRADUATE SCHOLARSHIPS AWARDED TO MEMBERS OF THE
SENIOR CLASS
Lenore Alice Epstein
Ella Messinger Uhler
ALICE FREEMAN PALMER FELLOWSHIP
Awarded for the year 1935-36 to Marjorie Glicksman, B.A., Wellesley College,
1931; M.A., Radcliffe College, 1934; graduate study at the Universities of
Freiburg and Heidelberg; Ph.D., Radcliffe College, 1935
Subject: Existential Philosophy
FANNY BULLOCK WORKMAN SCHOLARSHIP
Awarded for the year 1935-36 to Ruth Whittredge, B.A. {cum laude), Welles-
ley College, 1929; M.A., Radcliffe College, 1930; Scholar in French, 1933-34,
Fellow and Research Assistant, 1934-35, Bryn Mawr College
Subject: An Investigation of Certain French Miracle and Mystery Plays
HORTON-HALLOWELL FELLOWSHIP
Awarded for the year 1935-36 to Dorothy Good, B.A., 1927, M.A., 1931,
Wellesley College; Student at the London School of Economics
Subject: Economic and Political Origins of the Labor Party
i8o
Honor Scholarships
HONOR SCHOLARSHIPS
Honor Scholarships (without stipend) have been established by the College
for the purpose of giving recognition to a high degree of excellence in academic
work. These honors fall into two classes: students in the first, or higher class,
are termed Durant Scholars; students in the second class are termed Wellesley
College Scholars.
These honors are awarded to seniors on the basis of two and one-half years'
work, to juniors on the basis of one and one-half years' work. The standard in
each case is absolute, not competitive.
Jane Webster Badger
Dorothy Bradford Belt
Ruth Rita Bilsky
Ruth Boschwitz
Elise Bristol
Helen Frances Brown
Margot Sinclair Clark
Ruth Eleanor Cortell
Emily Rogers Denton
Dorothy Gillette Dissell
Betty Virginia Doyle
Esther Epstein
Lenore Alice Epstein
DURANT SCHOLARS
Appointed in 1935
Class of 1935
Mary Elizabeth Frear
Jean Priscilla Harrington
Martha Eldora Hathaway
Miriam Marjorie Kellner
Bella Kussy
Florence Lyons
Elizabeth Knight McClintic
Gertrude Elizabeth McIver
Edith Kitzmiller Miller
Dorothy Virginia Rose
Marjorie Esther Shumacker
Mary Elizabeth Stedman
Ella Messinger Uhler
Margaret Burton Bailey
Esther Brezner
Muriel Esther Coffin
Esther Pastene Edwards
Annette Loeb Florence
Dorothy Virginia Gorrell
Hester Gray
Olive Marion Hughes
Margaret Bates Knapp
Class of 1936
Jane Rose Levin
Bernice Libman
Frances McLester
Charlotte Laramy Meaker
Katharine Elizabeth Menton
Miriam Ruth Mottsman
Janet Koontz Sanford
Elma Pierson Van Artsdalen
Nancy Walker
WELLESLEY COLLEGE SCHOLARS
Pauline Jessica Arkus
Elizabeth Louise Billings
Esther Penny Boutcher
Elizabeth Brainerd
Janet Danby Brown
Doris Adams Carpenter
Eleanor Lorene Carter
Ruth Shirley Fleischl
Hulda Elisabet Fornell
Janet Eva French
Betty Louise Geismer
Mary Margaret Gibbons
Marjorie Isabelle Greene
Dorothy Frances Harris
Margaret Louise Harris
Janet Hilsinger
Appointed in 193S
Class of 1935
Mary Elizabeth Houlihan
Jewell Peterson Hunter
Elsa Serge Jaffin
Sarah Bartholomew Johlin
Miriam Johnson
Charlotte Jones
Doris Woodbury Jones
Genevieve Louise Knupfer
Katharine Borden Lake
Margaret Anne Lancaster
Margaret Lee
Elaine Lilley
Dorothy Edna Lobb
Arria Griffith McGinniss
Mary Jane Mason
Marjorie Merritt
Honor Scholarships
181
Frances Elsie Elizabeth Mitchell
Marjorie Clare Morris
Eunice Lawrence Needham
Jean Elizabeth Newland
Ruth Nicholson
Anna Marie O'Connor
Phyllis Mary Opper
Eleanor Florence Pease
Virginia Nathalie Yvonne Peugnet
Virginia Washburn Peyser
Micaela Constance Phelan
Ruth Lest Pitcairn
Barbara Porteous
Jane Posner
Eleanor Mitchell Riley
Jeanette Sayre
Eleanor Sylvia Schwarz
Nancy Pauline Stern
Emily Arnold Stetson
Esther Harding Swaffield
Jane Louise Taylor
Laura Marie Thomas
Barbara WooDBURN Van Wie
Charlotte Mae Wheaton
Alida Wilson
Marion Viola Zottoli
Marjorie Holmes Appelgate
Elaine Ruth Bassler
Dorothy Bidwell
Sylvia Maryl Bieber
Dorothea Hammond Boorn
Jean Brownell
Katherine Louise Bryan
Jane Burgess
Margaret Louise Butsch
Virginia Catharine
Anne Douglas Coyle
Irma Deitz
Teresa Marie D'Esopo
Margaret Sidney Eaton
Estelle Viola Edelmann
Olga Victoria Edmond
Ruth Ehrlich
Frances Glenn Emery
Lena Everett
Margaret Fitz
Elizabeth Glidden
Pauline Louisa Gunsser
Class of 1936
Ethelmay Kennedy
Mary Elizabeth Kennedy
Margaret Kilbon
Jeannette Virginia Lincoln
Muriel Millar
Jane Addams Mull
Martha Nichols
Elizabeth Brown Nipps
Dorothy Charlotte Paresky
Barbara Baen Patterson
Gladys Pearlman
Gwendolyn Pratt
Janeth Ravner
Ruth Paxton Russell
Barbara Aurore Ryerson
Elizabeth Gay Simmons
Carol Dumary Sleicher
Marjorie Gordon Smith
Helen Lee Thurston
Marion Willard
Martha Crocker Williams
182
FORMS OF BEQUEST
/ give and bequeath to Wellesley College, a corporation established by law, in the
Tozvn of Wellesley, county of Norfolk, and Commonwealth of Massachusetts, the
sum of dollars, to be safely invested by it and called the
Endowment Fund. The interest shall be applied to the payment of the salaries of
teachers in Wellesley College, as the Trustees shall deem expedient.
I give and bequeath to Wellesley College, a corporation established by law, in the
Tozvn of Wellesley, county of Norfolk, and Commonwealth of Massachusetts, the
sum 0f dollars, to be appropriated by the Trustees for the benefit of
the College in such manner as they shall think will be most useful.
I give and bequeath to Wellesley College, a corporation established by law, in the
Town of Wellesley, county of Norfolk, and Commonwealth of Massachusetts, the
sum of dollars, to be safely invested by it, and called the
Scholarship Fund. The interest of this fund shall be applied to the aid of deserving
students in Wellesley College.
i«3
SUMMARY OF STUDENTS
Resident candidates for the M.A. degree .
Resident candidates for the M.S. degree in H. & P. E.
Resident candidates for the Certificate in H. & P. E. .
Candidates for the B.A. degree:
Seniors ........
Juniors ........
Sophomores .......
Freshmen ........
Non-candidates for degrees .....
Duplicates .....
Total registration November, 1935
Juniors in France .
Junior in Germany
35
12
15
290
357
404
378
1,429
13
1,504
10
1,494
4
1
United States:
North Dakota
Alabama .
4
Ohio
Arizona
1
Oklahoma
Arkansas .
1
Oregon
California .
16
Pennsylvania
Colorado .
2
Rhode Island
Connecticut
91
South Carolina
Delaware .
1
Tennessee .
District of Columbia .
12
Texas
Florida
3
Utah
Georgia
2
Vermont .
Idaho
4
Virginia
Illinois
54
Washington
Indiana
13
West Virginia
Iowa
8
Wisconsin .
Kansas
5
Wyoming .
Kentucky .
7
Canal Zone
Maine
25
Hawaii
Maryland .
19
Porto Rico .
Massachusetts .
347
Michigan .
32
Other Countries:
Minnesota.
16
Canada
Missouri
23
Chile
Montana .
2
China
Nebraska .
5
England
New Hampshire.
22
France
New Jersey
119
Germany .
New York
313
Japan
North Carolina .
5
Mexico
2
67
4
2
131
28
3
8
25
2
11
12
6
2
12
4
1
2
1
184 Alumnae Association
OFFICERS OF THE ALUMNAE ASSOCIATION
1935-1936
Marion Mills Brown (Mrs. Ralph C), President 711 Prospect Ave., Winnetka, 111.
Elizabeth Moore MacLeish (Mrs. Bruce), 1st Vice-President
Birken Craig, Hubbard Woods, 111.
Alma Seipp Hay (Mrs. William Sherman), 2nd Vice-President 645 Sheridan Rd., Winnetka, 111.
Joy Scheidenhelm Taylor (Mrs. Alfred H.), Secretary 528 Madison Ave., Glencoe, 111.
Eleanor Dawes Walter (Mrs. W. Hamilton), Treasurer 500 South Ave., Glencoe, 111.
Miss Florence A. Risley, Executive Secretary Wellesley College
LOCAL ASSOCIATIONS
In the following, an arrangement by states has been adopted. The name standing after that of
the club refers to the president. In the address of this officer, the name of the city and state are
omitted if these have already been expressly stated in the heading. Corrections or additions will
be gratefully received.
California
Central, Caroline Frear Burk (Mrs. Frederic), Box 35, Corte Madera, Marin Co.
Southern, Helen Quinn Hogeboom (Mrs. F. E.), 127 North Lucerne Blvd., Los Angeles
Canada
Montreal, Elizabeth Quimby Pineo (Mrs. C. C), 4360 Westmount Ave.
China
Elsie Sites Raven (Mrs. Franklin), 955 Avenue Joffre, Shanghai
Colorado
Miss Gladys Bode, 608 E. 12th Ave., Denver
Connecticut
Bridgeport, Miss Bertha S. Watson, 822 Colorado Ave.
Hartford, Marion Whipple Mackay (Mrs. K. T.), 47 Four Mile Rd., West Hartford
New Haven, Alice Poole Hall (Mrs. E. J.), 376 Yale Ave.
Waterbury, Ruth Hart Butler (Mrs. J. I.), 50 Buckingham St.
District of Columbia
Washington, Virginia Weakley Roberts (Mrs. D. F.), 4600 Langdrum Lane, Chevy Chase, Md.
Florida
Miami, Carrie Summers McCaskill (Mrs. G. E.), 1556 N. W. South River Dr.
Hawaii
Elizabeth Rath Mack (club sec'y), 2246 Sea View Ave., Honolulu
Illinois
Chicago, Marguerite Stitt Church (Mrs. Ralph), 300 Church St., Evanston
Indiana
Florence Goodrich Dunn (Mrs. F. W.), 4138 North Pennsylvania St., Indianapolis
Iowa State
Esther Woodford Ashland (Mrs. L. E.), 401 N. Fourth St., Clear Lake
Japan
Betsey Baird Neville (Mrs. E. L.), American Embassy, Tokyo
Kentucky
Anna Kent Moore (Mrs. J. W.), Upper River Rd., Louisville
Maine
Eastern, Caroline Weatherbee Tarbell (Mrs. P. H), 188 Broadway, Bangor
Western, Hattie Brazier Libby (Mrs. Ralph), 125 Vaughan St., Portland
Maryland
Baltimore, Jeannette Brown Copeland (Mrs. M. M.), Warrington Apts. 7-B
Alumnae Association 185
Massachusetts
Berkshire County, Helen Gates Walker (Mrs. M. H.), 24 Weston St., Pittsficld
Boston, Marjorie Ely Monroe (Mrs. R. T.), 87 Greenough St., Brookline
Fitchburg, Nina Hill Beverly (Mrs. H. M.), 12 High St., Ayer
Haverhill, Elizabeth Smart Judkins (Mrs. J. B.), 26 Grove St., Merrimac
Lowell, Miss Louise P. Holden, Ixjcke Rd., Chelmsford
Middlesex, Irma Port Cheney (Mrs. R. F.), St. Mark's Rectory, Southboro
North Shore, Florence Phillips Cooke (Mrs. T. C), 40 Atlantic Rd., Swampscott
Quincy, Miss Grace Osgood, 14 West Elm Ave., Wollaston
Southeastern, Julia Locke Dewey (Mrs. Arthur), 29 Arch St., New Bedford
Springfield, Pauline Leonard Lawrence (Mrs. R. E.), 136 Westmoreland Ave., Longmeadow
// mchester, Mary Bodge Davis (Mrs. W. E.), 9 Marshall Rd.
Worcester, Miss Rachel Clark, 12 Germain St.
Michigan
Detroit, Charlotte Heme Decker (Mrs. J. R.), 2136 Seminole Ave.
Western, Kathryn Albin Hodgman (Mrs. A. B.), 1029 J4 W. North St., Kalamazoo
Minnesota
Minneapolis, Katherine Coan Carleton (Mrs. F. P.), 2421 Lake PI.
St. Paul, Helen Parker Mudgett (Mrs. H. I.), 2182 Stanford Ave.
Missouri
Kansas City, Caroline Rodgers Woodworth (Mrs. C. R.), 827 W. 57th St.
St. Louis, Meta Small Taylor (Mrs. Chas.), 7546 Buckingham Dr., Clayton
Nebraska
Omaha, Flora Marsh Burritt (Mrs. W. L.), 5613 Leavenworth St.
New Hampshire
Marion Ireland Benton (Mrs. Corning), 181 High St., Exeter
New Jersey
Cornelia Deming Van Arnam (Mrs. Wm. D.), 424 Clark St., South Orange
New York
Brooklyn, Marguerite Schenck Maires (Mrs. T. W.), 604 E. 18th St.
Buffalo, Hortense Barcalo Reed (Mrs. J. McW.), 50 Ashland Ave.
Eastern, Thelma Wade Holding (Mrs. Reynolds), Hotel Wellington, Albany
Elmira, Camilla Bryan Lowman (Mrs. A. M.), 104 Demarest Pky.
New York, Harriet Hinchlif Coverdale (Mrs. W. H.), 1020 Fifth Ave.
Rochester, Dorothy Hunting D'Amanda (Mrs. Francis), 69 Brunswick St.
Syracuse, Miss Grace Rockwood, 310 Roosevelt Ave.
Troy, Dr. A. Hazel Curry, Ford and Fonda Aves.
Utica, Lilla Howes Lee (Mrs. Franklin), P. O. Box 383, 143 Farmington Rd.
Welle sley-ln-Weslchester, Margaret Noyes Skinner (Mrs. Ross), 1337 North Ave., New Rochelle
Ohio
Akron, Katharine Baird Johnson (Mrs. A. C), 654 N. Portage Path
Cincinnati, Miss Lois Bauman, 599 Howell Ave.
Cleveland, Miss Bessie Sargeant Smith, 2504 Derbyshire Rd., Cleveland Heights
Columbus, Lelia Timberman Smith (Mrs. W. A.), 2612 Fair Ave.
Toledo, Florence Ross Baxter (Mrs. Stuart), 2024 Brookdale Rd.
Youngstown, Miss Marion Maiden, 240 Curry PI.
Oregon
Portland, Mary Atkinson Tracey (Mrs. R. S.), 2656 S. W. Gerald Ave.
Pennsylvania
Philadelphia, Dorothy Spellissy Watson (Mrs. Seth W.), 308 West Hortter St., Germantown
Pittsburgh, Marion Gaston Ballard (Mrs. J. D.), 1422 Greystone Dr.
Scranton, Miss Ellen M. Fulton, 1737 Capouse Ave.
Southeastern, Sara Truby Hiney (Mrs. Solomon), Cottage Hill, Steelton
Rhode Island
Maud Arnold Barnefield (Mrs. R. T.), 97 Summit St., Pawtucket
Texas
San Antonio, Margaret Hale Thorne (Mrs. G. G.), 1023 W. Magnolia St,
Utah
Miss Helen Keyser, Walker's Lane, Salt Lake City
186 Alumnae Association
Vermont
Miss Laila A. McNeil, 13 Elm St., Middlebury
Washington
Western, Helen Andrews Beaudin (Mrs. O. J.), 1953 10th Ave., W., Seattle
Wisconsin
Madison, Miss Margaret Shelton, 111 West Gilman St.
Milwaukee, Matilda Aarons Jung (Mrs. C. S.), 4612 N. Oakland Ave.
INDEX
PACB
Al AIM IOC Vl.AR 5
Administrative Officers .... 19
Admission:
Advanced Standing 39
Department of Hygiene anJ Physical
Education 41, 1 17
Department of Music 133
Examinations 30
Freshman Class 27
Graduate Students 40
Requirements 33
Special Students 41
Aesthetics 138
Alumna; Association, Officers of 184
American School of Classical Studies
in Athens 160
American School of Classical Studies
in Rome 160
Architecture 52
Art 48
Art Collections 169
Astronomy 54, 170
Bacteriology 63
Bequest, Forms of 182
Biblical History, Literature and
Interpretation 56
Bibliography 84
Biology 60, 149
Board 155
Botany 60,171
Calendar 5
Certificates in Hygiene and Physical
Education 117,176
Chapel 25
Chemistry 65, 171
Christian Association 25
College Entrance Examination Board 30
Committees of Trustees .... 7
Committees of Faculty .... 24
Correspondence 2
Courses of Instruction 48
Cytology 62, 151
Dante Prize 121
Degrees:
B.A. Requirements for 42
M.A. and M.S. Requirements for . 47
Degrees Conferred in 1935 . . . 174
Dormitories 157
Drama 81,84,88,148
Economics 69
Education 74
English Composition 85
English Language and Literature . 79
Enrollment 183
Ethics 139
Examinations:
Admission 30
Course 44
Expenses 155
Faculty 8
Farnsworth Art Museum .... 169
Fees 155
Fellows 179
Fellowships 158
Foundation and Purpose .... 25
French 89
Geography 95, 171
Geolocy 95,171
German 100
Gothic 103
Government, Instruction in ... 110
PAGE
( Iraduate Instruction 47
Greek 104
Group Leadership 106
Halls:
Alumna 170
Billings 170
Founders 169
Hetty H. R. Green 168
Music 170
Harmony 131,132
Health Provisions 157
Hebrew 57,59
History 106
Honors in a Special Field . 44, 177
Hygiene and Physical Education. 113, 172
Infirmary 157
Italian 120
Journalism 86
Kindergarten 78
Kinesiology 118
Laboratories 170
Landscape Gardening 63
Latin 123
Law Ill
Libraries 169
Loan Funds 167
Logic 138
Marine Biological Laboratory at
Woods Hole 161
Mathematics 127, 172
Meteorology 142
Mineralogy 95
Music 130
Fees 156
Equipment in 170
Instrumental and Vocal .... 133
Theory of 130
Mythology 105
Nursery School 78
Observatory 170
Palaeontology 96
Personnel Bureau 168
Philosophy 138
Physical Education 113
Physics 141,172
Physiology 152, 173
Play Production 148
Political Science 110
Pre-Medical Course 45
Prizes 167,178
Psychology 135, 173
Residence 157
Scholarships 158
With Stipend:
Awarded for 1935-36 179
For Graduates 158
For Undergraduates .... 161
Without Stipend 180
Scientific Collections .... 170
Sociology 69
Spanish 145
Special Students 41
Speech 147
Sports 114
Students' Aid Society 162
Trustees, Board of 6
Tuition 155
Vacations 5
Wellesley Clubs 184
Zoology 150. 173
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11